Академический Документы
Профессиональный Документы
Культура Документы
users guide
Upfront CFD
Version 9.0
Copyright
The CFdesign product is copyrighted and all rights are reserved by
Blue Ridge Numerics, Incorporated.
Copyright (c) 1992-2006 Blue Ridge Numerics, Incorporated. All
Rights Reserved.
The distribution and sale of CFdesign is intended for the use of the
original purchaser only and for use only on the computer system
specified at the time of the sale. CFdesign may be used only under
the provisions of the accompanying license agreement.
The CFdesign Release Notes may not be copied, photocopied,
reproduced, translated or reduced to any electronic medium or
machine readable form in whole or part without prior written consent from Blue Ridge Numerics, Incorporated. Blue Ridge Numerics,
Incorporated makes no warranty that CFdesign is free from errors
or defects and assumes no liability for the program. Blue Ridge
Numerics, Incorporated disclaims any express warranty or fitness
for any intended use or purpose. You are legally accountable for
any violation of the License Agreement or of copyright or trademark. You have no rights to alter the software or printed materials.
The development of CFdesign is ongoing. The program is constantly
being modified and checked and any known errors should be
reported to Blue Ridge Numerics, Incorporated.
Information in this document is for information purposes only and
is subject to change without notice. The contents of this manual do
not construe a commitment by BRNI.
Portions of this software and related documentation are derived
from and are copyrighted by Symmetrix and Ceetron.
All brand and product names are trademarks of their respective
owners.
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
CHAPTER 1
Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1
1.1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1
1.2
1-2
1.3
Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-5
1.4
Product Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-6
1.5
Starting CFdesign . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-7
1.6
1-10
1.7
CFdesign Client-Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-11
1.8
1-14
1.9
1-16
1-17
CHAPTER 2
2-1
2.1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1
2.2
2-1
2.3
Tool Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3
2.4
File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-8
2.5
Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-19
2.6
Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-22
2.7
Entity Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-24
2.8
Entity Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-26
2.9
Feature Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-27
2.10 Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-30
2-37
2-43
CHAPTER 3
Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1
3.1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1
3.2
3-1
Table of Contents
3.3
Pro/Engineer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3.4
3.5
CATIA V5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
3.6
Outlets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
3.7
3.8
3.9
CHAPTER 4
Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1
4.1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
CHAPTER 5
Mesh Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1
5.1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
5.8
5.9
ii
Table of Contents
CHAPTER 6
Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-47
6-1
6.1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1
6.2
6-1
6.3
Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3
6.4
Solids. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-17
6.5
6-22
6.6
Resistances. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-32
6.7
Internal Fans. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-47
6.8
Centrifugal Pump/Blower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-54
6.9
Check Valves. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-59
6-61
6-66
6-72
6-79
6-79
CHAPTER 7
Motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-1
7.1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-1
7.2
Guidelines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2
7.3
Linear Motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-6
7.4
Angular Motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-18
7.5
7-34
7.6
7-45
7.7
Nutating Motion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-53
7.8
7-63
7.9
Free Motion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-70
CHAPTER 8
Analysis Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-1
8.1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-1
8.2
Flow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-1
iii
Table of Contents
8.3
Compressibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
8.4
8.5
Optional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
CHAPTER 9
Analyze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-1
9.1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
9.2
9.3
9.4
9.5
9.6
Analyze!. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
9.7
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
9.8
9.9
CHAPTER 10
Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-1
CHAPTER 11
Viewing Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-1
iv
Table of Contents
11-12
11-12
11-13
11-14
11-27
11-36
11-37
11.11Iso Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-43
11.12Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-44
11.13Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-47
11-50
11-56
CHAPTER 12
12-1
12.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12-1
12.2 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12-1
12-3
12-6
CHAPTER 13
Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13-1
13.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13-1
13-1
13-2
13-5
13-9
13-12
CHAPTER 14
Analysis Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14-1
14.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14-1
14-2
14-7
14-11
Table of Contents
CHAPTER 15
Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15-1
vi
CHAPTE R 1
1.1
Getting Started
Introduction
Congratulations and thank you for choosing CFdesign as your Upfront CFD Solution!
CFdesign 9 represents a major step forward for all engineers responsible for products that incorporate fluid flow and heat transfer. CFdesign is a design tool, and
incorporates many features that make flow analysis a valuable and practical part of
the product design process.
CFdesign has been developed from day one for multi-faceted product development
teams using MCAD tools such as Pro/Engineer, CATIA, Autodesk Inventor, Solid
Edge, Unigraphics, Solid Works, and many others. Powered by proprietary numerical techniques and leading-edge computational methods, CFdesign features a true
associative relationship with components and assemblies, and automatically applies
the optimal mesh required for accurate fluid and thermal simulations.
The principal Value Drivers of CFdesign are summarized below:
A Tool for the People
Process Continuity
Overhead Reduction
Innovation Gateway
1-1
Getting Started
1.2
CFdesign is built upon the Upfront CFD Solution Platform. The platform is shown:
There are six fundamental pillars of Upfront CFD, each shown as a separate item in
the graphic. Each pillar represents a part in the process of performing a CFD analysis. The most significant aspect of this concept is that the process is repeatable-multiple design iterations can be analyzed, compared, and communicated with
those in the design chain efficiently and effectively. Each pillar is described in more
detail below:
CAD Integration
Starting in the CAD system of your choice, the component or assembly model you
build is all CFdesign needs to deliver a reliable fluid flow and heat transfer simulation. A direct link to the major geometry engines eliminates the need for IGES,
STEP, or STL. Make a change to the model in your CAD system, and the change will
be a part of the CFdesign analysis.
1-2
Getting Started
Mesh Generation
Tools such as Shell surfaces allow significant reduction in overall mesh sizes by
allowing the inclusion of solid surfaces within three dimensional volumes. Mesh
Enhancement automatically refines the mesh to focus nodes and elements in areas
of high physical gradients. Finally, new technology has been developed to mesh
large assemblies more efficiently, using less computational resources.
Simulation Scope
CFdesign solves the mathematical equations which represent heat and momentum
transfer in a moving fluid. The finite element method is used to discretize the flow
domain, thereby transforming the governing partial differential equations into a set
of algebraic equations whose solution represent an approximation to the exact (and
most often unattainable) analytical solution. The numerical formulation is derived
from the SIMPLER solution scheme introduced by Patanker1. More detail is available
in the Technical Reference.
The influence of Fluid-Structure Interaction is a very significant element in many
mechanical devices. The CFdesign Motion Module brings this capability to the world
of product design as a key element of Upfront CFD. Through simulation, this Module
allows understanding the interaction between fluids and moving solids to be integral to the product design process.
The flow analysis is often just the beginning in many analysis-design projects.
Results from CFdesign can be applied as structural boundary conditions for subsequent analysis with many popular FEA packages. Aerodynamic and hydrodynamicinduced pressures as well as temperatures can be interpolated directly onto the FEA
1. Patankar, S.V., Numerical Heat Transfer and Fluid Flow, Hemisphere Publishing,
New York, 1980
CFdesign Users Guide
1-3
Getting Started
CFdesign employs finite element mesh generation with numerous intelligent algorithms to make the process automatic and transparent. By using automatic,
unstructured meshing, CFdesign quickly meshes complicated (real world) geometry
without forcing the user to become an expert in the application of mesh generation
tools. Assignment of the mesh distribution to geometry is virtually automatic, and
is based on a highly detailed geometric interrogation of the geometry.
Getting Started
mesh. This very powerful capability completes the analysis circle, and is a major
integrating factor of CFdesign into the Design Supply Chain.
Simulation Speed
The intuitive user interface in CFdesign makes setting up the simulation very easy.
Using engineering language, the user simply applies the material and operating
conditions that are needed. Combined with many intelligent algorithms, analysis
set-up is fast and easy for users with no CFD experience.
In many design situations, running many what if scenarios is the key to the optimal design. Because of time constraints, a single license often just wont get the
job done. With the Fast Track Option, our on-demand licensing plan, engineering
groups can temporarily ramp up their analysis capability in order to get the job
done quickly. Unlike an ASP or main frame scheme, this system allows engineering groups to utilize in-house computer resources without having to send out proprietary data over the internet.
Design Review
Results are displayed at every step of the calculation. The user can interact with the
model, and view results real-time using cutting planes, iso surfaces, xy plots, and
particle traces.
Because CFdesign is a design tool, it is very important that results from multiple
analyses be viewed, compared, and contrasted easily. The Design Review Center
makes it easy to get a true apples-to-apples comparison between all of the analyses in your project.
Project Collaboration
Sharing results with other members of the design supply chain is easy using the
Dynamic Image, a part of the Design Communication Center. Using our free plug
in, interactive images can be viewed in PowerPoint, Word, and Internet Explorer.
The person viewing a Dynamic Image can pan, zoom, and rotate the model, to see
your results from every angle.
1-4
Getting Started
1.3
Documentation
Book
Description
Users Guide
The fundamentals. Discusses geometry requirements, the user interface, and analysis techniques
Examples Guide
Technical Reference
Description
Chapter 1: Introduction
Introductory information
Chapter 3: Geometry
Chapter 4: Loads
Chapter 6: Materials
Chapter 7: Motion
Chapter 8: Analysis
Options
Flow parameters
Chapter 9: Analyze
1-5
Getting Started
There are three books that make up the CFdesign documentation. They are:
Getting Started
Chapter
Description
Application-specific information
1.4
Product Configurations
Motion Features
Full compressible
Rotating machinery
Scalar models
(general scalar, steam/
water, moist air, volume filling)
Turbulent flow
Transient
Flow-induced Motion
Heat Transfer
Radiation
Joule Heating
Solar Heating
1-6
Getting Started
1.5
Starting CFdesign
Pro/Engineer
Click Applications_CFdesign
CATIA V5
Autodesk
Inventor
Solid Edge
Solid Works
UGNX
Analysis_Launch CFdesign
9.0:
Parasolid
(.x_t) or Acis
(.sat) file
Start CFdesign from the Desktop using the CFdesign shortcut icon:
1.5.1
New Analysis
1-7
Getting Started
Direct launchers for Pro/Engineer, Inventor, Solid Edge, and Solid Works are
included in the CFdesign installation. Additionally, a new analysis can be created
from a Parasolid or Acis file by launching CFdesign from the Desktop or Start Menu.
The details of how to use each launcher are discussed in the following table:
Getting Started
When CFdesign is launched from a CAD system, the following dialog will prompt for
an analysis name:
The analysis name can (and often should) be different from the CAD part or assembly name. The reason is to allow multiple analyses based on the same CAD model
to co-exist in the same directory and not overwrite each other, even though the
geometry has changed from one analysis to the next.
When CFdesign is launched from the Desktop to create a new analysis from
an existing Parasolid or Acis file, hit the New icon in the CFdesign Toolbar:
and the following dialog will come up:
Make sure the Analysis bullet is selected. Select the desired geometry file (its name
will appear in the File Name field after it is picked), and enter an analysis name in
the Analysis Name field. Hit OK.
1-8
Getting Started
1.5.2
Existing Analysis
Existing analyses are opened using the Open icon in the toolbar:
Getting Started
The file extension for an existing analysis is .cfd. Make sure the Analysis bullet is
selected near the bottom of the dialog box.
The only time it is required to open an existing analysis from the CAD system is if
the geometry is from Pro/Engineer, AND you intend to construct a new mesh. Otherwise, always open existing analyses by starting CFdesign from the Desktop or
Start menu, hitting the Open icon, and selecting the desired .cfd file. Note: if an
existing analysis is launched from the CAD system and run, a new mesh will be
generated, even if the mesh definition is not changed.
1.5.3
Projects
1-9
Getting Started
(2) Analysis
The opposite is also possible: an existing analysis can be imported into a project.
Analysis
Project
Additionally, a project can be created or opened outside of an analysis by starting
CFdesign and hitting the New or Open icon, respectively, and selecting Project.
More information is presented in the Projects chapter of this guide.
1.6
This section briefly summarizes the process of setting up, running, and visualizing
results with CFdesign. Starting CFdesign from various CAD systems with the direct
launchers and from the Desktop is discussed in a prior section. After the analysis is
named, the following general steps must be taken:
conditions.
3. In the Mesh Task Dialog, apply mesh sizes to volumes, and if required for local
refinement, to surfaces and edges.
1-10
Getting Started
4. Switch to the Materials Task Dialog, and apply materials to all parts in the
While this may seem like a lot of steps, the User Interface is designed to guide the
user through each, in the proper order. A separate icon controls each task dialog,
and these icons are arranged vertically on the side of the User Interface. By simply
starting at the top-most icon and working down, each task is performed easily and
logically.
1.7
1.7.1
CFdesign Client-Server
Introduction
CFdesign is built upon a client-server model. The user interacts with CFdesign
through the Interface Client (CFdesign.exe). When the command to start the analysis is given, a signal is sent to the Server (CFdserv9.exe) indicating that the analysis needs to begin. The Server in turn sends a signal to the Solver (cfdcalc.exe).
This last step initiates the transfer of the model data from the Interface to the
Solver and then instructs the Solver to commence with the calculation. While the
analysis is running, the visual results are transferred from the Solver back to the
1-11
Getting Started
model. If necessary, create custom materials and add them to the Materials Database.
5. If the analysis is to include moving solids, switch to the Motion task dialog, and
create and assign the motion to the intended parts.
6. Using the Options Task Dialog, select the physical model(s) to be used within
the analysis.
7. In the Analyze Task Dialog, input the number of iterations to run and the
Results Save Interval. Hit GO to start the analysis.
8. During the analysis, switch to the Results task dialog to view the results as they
are calculated. Use the Convergence Monitor to keep an eye on the solution
progress.
9. When the analysis is finished, use the Review task dialog to assess the final
convergence and to ensure that the solution is converged.
10. Switch to the Results task dialog to view the results.
11. Optional: add this analysis to a new or existing project. Return to the CAD system and modify the geometry. Launch back into CFdesign, and create a new analysis. Place this analysis into the project. Transfer the settings from the first analysis
to this one, and run it.
Getting Started
Interface to provide for the Run-Time Results Display. When the analysis is complete, the Server directs the Solver to send the final results back to the Interface.
On a stand-alone installation, this entire process is transparent to the user. After
hitting Go, the analysis runs, the analysis data files are kept in the users working
directory as the communication between the Server and the Interface and Solver
clients is managed automatically.
1.7.2
Fast Track
This client-server model allows CFdesign users to run analyses on a remote (networked) computer. This kind of implementation is called Fast Track. The analysis
model is constructed and meshed on the local computer (using the CFdesign Interface), but the actual calculation occurs on a remote computer. In this situation, the
Server directs the Interface to put the analysis model files physically on the remote
Solver computer for the calculation. When completed, the Server moves the files
back to the Interface (Users) computer.
1.7.3
Server Manager
For most installations, the Server is configured automatically during the installation
process. However, there is a dialog that controls the operation of the Server.
Located in the installation directory, this dialog is launched by clicking on servman.exe, and is shown:
1-12
Getting Started
If the Server must be stopped (such as when installing an update to the Server),
open this dialog, and click the Stop button. Be sure to start the service again after
the new file is in place.
1.7.4
1.7.4.1
CFdesign can be installed such that the installation files reside on a file server
machine, and the User Interface and Solver run on users local machines. The
server process called CFD Server 9 runs locally and manages the communication
between the User Interface and the Solver (this is true for a single node installation
as well). In this type of configuration, however, the service (running on the local
machine) must run under an account that has read-only access on the file server
machine. Otherwise, the service will not have the necessary privileges to send commands to the executable residing on the file server.
As part of every analysis, temporary files are written to an analyze directory
located on the users machine. Additionally, a small program (the Server Manager)
that configures and manages the server process must also be installed on each
users computer. A separate installation program (ClientofFileServer.exe) is
included on the installation CD that installs these items, and must be run on each
users machine. This is very quick, and installs the Server Manager, creates a local
Analyze directory, and creates the necessary environment variables.
1.7.4.2
Installation
As part of the software installation on the file server, be sure to check the Centralized File Server Install box in the Select Features dialog.
1-13
Getting Started
The Installation Directory is the CFdesign load point. The Analyze Directory, by
default, is a sub-directory within the CFdesign installation but can be any writable
directory on the local machine. This is where temporary files are written during the
analysis. The Install button registers the Server as a Windows service. This causes
the Server to start automatically every time the machine is started. The Installation
and Analyze Directory fields are set during the installation. They can be changed
manually, if necessary. Additionally, the Server is started for the first time during
the Installation.
Getting Started
After installing the software on the file server, create a domain user account for the
service. (This may require assistance from your Information Technology or Technical Support Group.) This can also be done between two machines within the same
workgroup by creating the same account on both machines. This account should
have read-write privileges in general, but can have read-only access on the file
server. Additionally, this account needs the Log On As A Service privilege.
On each users machine, as administrator, run the ClientofFileServer.exe found
on the Installation CD. This will prompt for:
A directory on the local machine where the analyze directory and the
Server Manager are to be installed.
The UNC path of the CFdesign network installation.
The account name and password of the service account.
If the service account is not automatically granted the Log On as a Service right,
then it may be necessary to manually perform the following steps on the client
machine:
1.8
1-14
Description
cfd
cts
Getting Started
Extension
Description
Report template information. Stores report layout and content
info for each analysis. (Reports are modified using the Report dialog on the Review task.)
res.s#
Results file. Binary file containing raw results data from iteration
#. This file does not have to be in the working directory to view
results, but is required to continue an analysis.
set
sol
Solver file. Contains convergence data for each degree of freedom for each iteration.
st
sum
smh
Summary history file. This contains all of the summary files from
all re-starts.
_client.log
_gcp.bmp
_mesh.log
_mi.vtf
Model Image file: Dynamic image of analysis model. Automatically created for use by the Report Generator.
_model.log
_s.cfd
1-15
Getting Started
dccrt
Getting Started
Extension
Description
_solver.log
_partname
_motion.cs
v
Description
Project file. This lists the analyses in a project.
Material database file. Can be modified and placed in a location of
choice. Use File_Preferences to indicate default location.
vtf
vus
1.9
Open your v8 analysis directly into v9. The settings should all migrate into the v9
format. Any settings that were lost due to changes in the Parasolid or Acis geometry kernels will be listed in the Lost List. This list is accessible by clicking the Show
Lost button on the appropriate dialog. If the Show Lost button is not visible, then
the migration to v8 did not incur any errors.
Note that for best results, the v8 analysis should be saved in the latest version of
v8. For Pro/E analyses, this means that the analysis should have been launched and
saved into the latest version of v8. Importing analyses from earlier builds of v8 may
result in a few lost settings.
1-16
Getting Started
1.10
Contact Information
Target
Number or Address
Phone Support
Fax Number
434.977.2714
Support e-mail
support@cfdesign.com
License Request
licensing@cfdesign.com
Sales e-mail
info@cfdesign.com
web site
http://www.cfdesign.com
ftp site
ftp://ftp.cfdesign.com
Getting Started
For those customers that have purchased CFdesign directly from Blue Ridge
Numerics in the United States and Canada, please contact us for support and
licensing using:
For those customers that have purchased CFdesign directly from Blue Ridge
Numerics in Europe, please contact us for support and licensing using:
Target
Number or Address
Phone Support
Fax Number
Support e-mail
eu.support@cfdesign.com
Password Request
eu.licensing@cfdesign.com
Sales e-mail
info@cfdesign.com
web site
http://www.cfdesign.com
ftp site
ftp://ftp.cfdesign.com
For those customers that have purchased CFdesign directly from Blue Ridge
Numerics in Asia, please contact us for support and license using:
Target
Number or Address
Phone Support
Fax Number
+1 434.977.2714
1-17
Getting Started
Target
Number or Address
Support e-mail
asia.support@cfdesign.com
Password Request
asia.licensing@cfdesign.com
Sales e-mail
info@cfdesign.com
web site
http://www.cfdesign.com
ftp site
ftp://ftp.cfdesign.com
Blue Ridge Numerics also has a strong reseller network throughout Europe and
Asia. If you purchased CFdesign through a reseller, please contact that reseller
directly for support and licensing.
1-18
CHAPTE R 2
2.1
Introduction
This chapter describes how to use the CFdesign User Interface without going into
the technical specifics of the fluid flow and heat transfer analysis process. (This is
discussed in later chapters.) Details about customization, the tool buttons, the feature tree and dialog regions as well as entity selection and groups are covered in
this chapter.
2.2
Menu
Region
Feature Tree
Task Tool Bar
Task Dialog
Status Bar
Graphics
Region
2-1
The model is shown in the Graphics Region. The background color can be changed
using the Background Color tool button (described in the next section).
The File Tool Bar at the top controls file manipulation activities--Creating, Opening,
and Saving files. The Display Tool Bar controls the display of the interface and the
model. The Task Tool Bar controls which task dialog shows in the Task Dialog
Region. The Feature Tree lists the applied parameters, and can be used to modify
applied conditions (loads and mesh sizes). Additionally, it is used to control the display of individual parts and materials in the model, and to control the display of
results quantities.
The Menu Region contains commands for file manipulation and for setting preferences. The main Help menu is also in the Menu Region. The Task Dialogs contain
commands for setting up the analysis.
The default arrangement of the interface is shown in the above graphic. The display
and location of the Horizontal Tool Bar, the Feature Tree, and the Task Dialog
Region is customizable. To hide any of the entities, single click on the top bar of the
Task Dialog Region (or left side of the tool bars):
Windows
2000
Windows
XP
To resume a hidden object, click on the double lines under the Menu region:
2-2
an object is released away from an edge, then that object will become separate,
and will have its own title bar. It can be moved to any desired location, and can
occlude the graphics window.
An object can also be hidden by clicking the X in the upper right corner. To
resume a closed object, right click anywhere on another object (Feature Tree, Task
Dialog Region, or Tool Bars), and a menu will appear:
2.3
Tool Buttons
This section describes the tool buttons on the File and Display Tool Bars. Some
additional buttons appear in Results Display mode, and are discussed in the Results
Visualization Chapter (11).
New
Open
Background Color
Coordinate Axis
Perspective View
Wireframe Nav
Center of Rotation
Transparent Image
Outline Image
Shaded Image
Add to Project
Save Analysis
Reset View
Save VTF
(dynamic image)
Z-Clip
Save Image
Incremental Rotation
Previous View
Zoom
Zoom to Fit
2-3
User Interface
Check the desired object to open it again. Additionally, an object can be hidden by
unchecking it on the list.
Select the file type from the Format field, and use the
Browse button to specify the destination path and the
name of the file. Click Ok to save the image.
2-4
Center of Rotation. This icon launches the following dialog: Use the slider bars to adjust the center of rotation of
2-5
User Interface
Use the slider bars to clip into the model. Parts of the
model that are between the plane and the user are made
invisible. The following is an example of a clipping plane:
2-6
Left: Zoom. After clicking this icon, hold down the left
mouse button and drag a box around the region to zoom.
Release the button when finished dragging. The icon
must be clicked again to zoom again.
Right: Previous View. Returns the model to the previous orientation and zoom.
Wireframe Navigation. When enabled (pressed in), the
model will navigate in outline mode. When disabled, the
model display does not change when navigated.
Perspective View Toggle. When enabled, model is
shown in Perspective View.
User Interface
2-7
2.4
2.4.1
File Menu
_New, _Open
These menu items serve the same function as the New and Open tool buttons.
2.4.2
These items perform the same function as the Save Analysis and Save Project tool
buttons.
2.4.3
_Save Analysis As
Saves a copy of the current analysis to a new name and/or location. Note that the
newly created cfd file is opened, and the originally opened cfd file is saved and
closed.
2.4.4
Output_Support
Outputs a version of the cfd file that contains just the settings and the geometry,
but no mesh or results. This is a very small file, and is suitable for e-mailing to our
CFdesign Technical Support Engineers. Such a file has an _s appended to its
name.
2.4.5
Output_Results Share
A .cfd file containing the settings and results, but not the mesh. This is useful for
sharing your entire results set with someone else in the organization because it is
significantly smaller than the original cfd file. If the user opens such a file, they will
be able to view results, but not run. Hitting Analyze_Go will result in the mesh
being generated, and the solution starting back at iteration 0. Results Share files
have an _r appended to the original analysis name.
2-8
2.4.6
Output_Archive
An Archive file contains the settings, mesh, and only the last saved results set.
This is useful for analyses in which numerous results or time steps were saved during the run, but only the last set needs to be saved. Also, the last results file (jobname.res.s# or jobname.res.t#) is saved. An _a file can be continued simply by
hitting Analyze_Go. This file is most suitable for archival purposes IF intermediate
result sets or time steps are not required.
2.4.7
_Export
_Universal Mesh
_Tecplot Results
_FieldView Results
_Nodal Results
2-9
User Interface
CFdesign can write out the model and results in several formats for use in other
tools. Prior to Version 8, data was saved in these formats by setting a flag entry in
the external flags file. This menu contains the following output file formats:
2.4.8
_Preferences_User Interface
This is a way to set preferred defaults and to customize the interface. The Preferences dialog is shown:
Modifiable Parameter
Description
Dialog Placement
2-10
Description
Material database
Report Settings
Background Color
The choices are the standard length units systems: meters, cm, mm, feet, inch-BTU/s, and
inch-Watt.
Perspective view
Navigate as wireframe
Navigation Mode
2-11
User Interface
Modifiable Parameter
All settings are invoked as soon as OK is hit. The exception is the Startup Length
Units, which is applied only when an analysis is created
2.4.9
_Preferences_Settings Rules
Many analysis models are based on assemblies having multiple instances of the
same part. Every instance of the part typically has the same settings, and are used
repeatedly in numerous analyses.
This feature allows the automatic assignment of a volumetric boundary condition
and a material based on the part name. For many analysis models this feature will
greatly simplify and streamline the set-up process because it automates application
of key volumetric settings to a large number of parts, eliminating the burden of
having to apply a large number of settings manually. This feature should greatly
impact electronics cooling analyses in particular due to the large number of
repeated parts in electronic devices.
Rules defined with this dialog are automatically applied when an analysis is created
if the Apply box is checked. Rules are not automatically applied when an existing
analysis is opened.
Settings that can be applied as rules include volumetric boundary conditions and
materials that do not require any directional inputs in their definitions.
Settings rules are stored with other preferences in the cfdesign90.usr file. This file
is contained in the Documents and Settings\account\.cfdesign folder, where
account is the name of login account.
2.4.9.1
Boundary Conditions
Heat generation and Total heat generation conditions can be applied as settings
rules. Conditions can be defined as steady state or transient, and can be assigned
as temperature dependent. Note that temperature dependent conditions use the
temperature of the local part (and not a remote location) as the sensing location.
2.4.9.2
Materials
2-12
Fluids
Solids
Compact Thermal Model component
Printed Circuit Boards
Note that materials must currently exist in the Materials database before they can
be used in a setting rule.
2.4.9.3
Usage
Step 4
Step 1
Step 5
Step 6
Step 2
Step 3
Step 7
2-13
User Interface
2.4.10
_Preferences_Results Units
Use this dialog to specify the default units of result scalars. In previous versions,
the units for any result scalar can be changed by right clicking on a scalar quantity,
selecting Units, and picking the desired unit system. Many companies have guidelines dictating how results are communicated internally, so in some cases, it was
necessary to always manually change the unit for displayed result quantities.
This dialog allows default units to be defined.
2-14
User Interface
The units for each quantity are listed in the adjacent combo menu.
The choice Default is the first item for every quantity, and is shown if no unit system is selected. Quantities with the Default selection are displayed using the
default units of the current units system.
The default units selected for a quantity will be applied to all related quantities as
well. For example, if the mm/h is selected as the default for velocity, then all velocity components as well as absolute velocity (and components) will be displayed in
mm/h. Related quantities are shown in the table:
Velocity
Velocity Magnitude
U-Velocity
V-Velocity
2-15
W-Velocity
Absolute Velocity Magnitude
Absolute Velocity in X-dir
Absolute Velocity in Y-dir
Absolute Velocity in Z-dir
Pressure
Static Pressure
Total Pressure
Absolute Static Pressure
Viscosity
Viscosity
Effective Viscosity
Conductivity
Conductivity
Effective Conductivity
Temperature
Temperature
Total Temperature
Shear Stress
Shear Stress
Wall Shear Stress
2.4.11
_Analysis Notes
When conducting design studies, keeping accurate records about each analysis is
very important, especially when comparing results from a large number of models.
Recording the specific conditions of an analysis, as well as any adjustments and
important findings, is key to repeatability and organization of a large project.
Every engineer has their own particular way of maintaining information about their
analysis models. Some use spreadsheets, some use notebooks, and some use
2-16
scraps of paper. The CFdesign Notes file is a useful addition to the engineers
record-keeping tool-kit for, and is kept within the analysis file itself:
User Interface
Located in File_Notes, the Notes text editor provides a convienent way of recording information about a particular analysis. The contents of the file are internal to
the analysis cfd file, so they can be easily accessed after the analysis is archived.
An external copy of the file can be saved by clicking the Save button.
Modifications made to the text file outside of CFdesign will not be accessible in the
CFdesign interface. This option is provided to save a copy of the notes to allow
quick access without having to open the cfd file.
2.4.12
_Print
A print utility has been added to the File menu to allow printing the image in the
Graphics window to either a file or to a printer. The background color is automatically set to white, and text is shown as black for visibility.
2-17
There are several options that allow printer selection, printing to a file, and the
number of copies. Click the Preferences button for additional options controlling
the page layout, size, and printer options.
Click the Print button to send the job to the printer.
2.4.13
_Recent Analyses
The last five most recently opened analyses are listed. Click on one to open the file.
This improves the work-flow by allowing quick selection of an analysis that was
recently opened.
2.4.14
_Recent Projects
The last five most recently opened projects are listed. Click on one to open the file.
This improves the work-flow by allowing quick selection of an analysis that was
recently opened.
2-18
2.4.15
_Exit
Closes the CFdesign User Interface. If the analysis is not running, it will be automatically saved. If an analysis is running, the Exit command shuts down only the
Interface--the analysis will continue to run.
2.5
Help
All manuals are packaged in Adobe pdf format. The Adobe Acrobat Reader is
included with the CFdesign interface, and is opened when Help buttons or items in
the Help menu are selected. The manuals can also be viewed outside of CFdesign
using Acrobat Reader. Note that the documentation is fully indexed, and includes a
table of contents. Acrobat Reader includes full search capability as well.
Most dialogs in the CFdesign User Interface contain a Help button. Pushing a Help
button opens the Users Guide to the appropriate location to describe the relevant
dialog or function.
2.5.1
Opens the Users Guide in Acrobat Reader. The Guide is fully indexed, and includes
a table of contents. Links within the document connect sections and chapters where
appropriate.
2.5.2
_On-Line Tutorial
Opens the CFdesign Examples Guide. Presented in Acrobat Reader, the Guide has
been formatted so that it can easily be positioned adjacent to the CFdesign interface while working through the examples. This is a convenient resource for learning
how to operate CFdesign.
CFdesign Users Guide
2-19
User Interface
The CFdesign Help System has been overhauled to make it much easier to use and
to provide a comprehensive set of information directly and conveniently to the user.
The complete documentation set has been integrated with the CFdesign product,
and is accessed on a context-sensitive basis using the Help button on every dialog
in the Interface. The complete manual set is also accessible from the Help menu
item from the Main Menu.
2.5.3
_Technical Reference
Opens the CFdesign Technical Reference. This manual contains the suite of Verification analyses as well as a detailed description of the theoretical foundation of CFdesign.
2.5.4
_Release Notes
Opens the Release Notes which contains detailed descriptions of new functionality
in the current version.
2.5.5
Connects to the Download site of the User Portal. This area contains the current
and all previous releases of CFdesign v9. This is a great place to check for the latest
build as updates are released.
A user account is required to access the User Portal. If you do not have an account,
please follow the instructions on the User Portal dialog.
2.5.6
_Knowledge Base
Connects to the on-line CFdesign Knowledge Base and User Portal. This highly useful resource contains up-to-date, topical information about using CFdesign as well
as the current bug list.
2.5.7
_About
Shows the build number of the current installation. You may be asked for this by a
CFdesign Technical Support Engineer.
2.5.8
_Licensing
This item brings up a dialog that shows the current license status. This is a very
useful tool for troubleshooting license problems. The dialog indicates which license
2-20
server the software is looking to for a license. It also indicates the number of Interface and Solver licenses available.
The Preferences button brings up a dialog that allows selection of a specific functionality level if the floating (network) license contains a combination of different
functional levels.
To provide a high level of flexibility in licensing for larger installations with network
licenses, CFdesign includes the ability to check out a specific funtionality tier from a
mixed pool of licenses.
For a heterogeneous CFdesign license (a license that contains seats with different
funtionality levels), the License Preferences dialog will pop up automatically when
CFdesign is started:
This dialog lists the licenses that are available, and prompts the user to select
which type of license they will use. If, for example, Advanced is selected, then the
Motion functionality will be unavailable in the CFdesign interface. If Motion is
selected, the Motion license is checked out, and the Motion functionality will be
available. (Note that Motion includes the advanced functionality set as well.)
CFdesign Users Guide
2-21
User Interface
For example, if a corporate site-license includes four Advanced licenses and one
Motion license, this function allows the user to select a Motion license only when the
Motion functionality is required. For analyses that do not include solid-body motion,
the user would select an Advanced license. This would leave the Motion licenses
available for other engineers that do need the Motion capability.
By default, this dialog will appear every time CFdesign is started. Uncheck the
check box to make the setting permanent (and to prevent the dialog from displaying every time). To change the setting simply click Help_Licensing_Preferences.
For node-locked licenses and homogeneous network license (meaning that all of
the seats are at the same functionality level) the License Preferences dialog does
not appear. No input is required for such a license installation.
2.6
Navigation
Navigation Mode 2
2-22
2.6.1
The mouse scroll wheel now acts as a zoom function. Scroll away to zoom out,
scroll toward the user to zoom in.
This new feature in CFdesign simplifies user/mouse interaction as well as improves
consistency with many CAD tools.
2-23
User Interface
2.7
Entity Selection
The selection mode (on the Loads and Mesh dialogs) controls which type of entity is
selectable: volume, surface, or edge.
Selection Mode
Selection Basis
The Selection Mode can be changed on the Loads and Mesh dialogs, but on Materials, it is set to only Volumes or Surfaces (3D or 2D models, respectively).
The Selection Basis allows for associative selection and the selection of groups.
Associativity is based on geometry, and provides a quick way to select multiple
entities that are related to the Selection Basis type (surfaces owned by a volume,
for example). Entities of the type shown in the Selection Basis menu will highlight
as the mouse is moved over them. When picked, all of the items of the current
selection mode that are associated with the picked item will be selected. Groups will
be discussed later in this chapter.
The Selection Basis modes for each selectable entity are:
Entity
Selection Basis
Volume
Surface
Edge
2-24
The four buttons adjacent to the Selection Basis drop menu simplify selection and
deselection of multiple entities:
items can be highlighted in the list using the Windows standard selection methods--hold down the control key while clicking on items to select multiple items;
hold down the shift key while clicking on items to select a range.
2-25
User Interface
When the mouse hovers over an entity, it turns green. When an entity is selected,
it turns red. When the mouse hovers over an already selected entity, it turns yellow.
2.8
2.8.1
Entity Visibility
Blanking
An entity can be blanked by right clicking the mouse on it. Only entities of the type
in the current selection mode will be blanked. To redisplay all blanked entities, right
click the mouse somewhere off of the model. Shown is a model with some surfaces
blanked. Note how the surface underneath is now visible, and therefore pickable.
Blanking entities is very useful when applying boundary conditions and mesh sizes
to allow easy access to objects in the background.
2.8.2
Blanking Undo
Clicking the middle mouse button in Mouse Mode 1 (which is also the scroll wheel
on some mouse devices) will undo blanking commands in the opposite order that
they were issued. Use the Ctrl+Middle mouse button in Mode 2. In Mouse Modes 3
and 4, undo blanking with the Ctrl+Right mouse button.
This action will also undo the redisplay of all hidden entities. If the user had blanked
several parts in an effort to gain access to an internal part, but accidently redisplays the entire assembly, they now can simply hit the middle mouse button, and
undo the redisplay command.
2-26
2.9
Feature Tree
The Feature Tree has several functions that assist in setting up and running a CFdesign analysis. Some of the branches allow certain analysis settings to be made.
2.9.1
Units
When an analysis is created, the default units system will be meters (unless the
default was changed using File_Preferences).
For Pro/Engineer and CATIA v5 geometries, changing the units system only
changes the analysis length unit--it DOES NOT convert any dimensions in the
model.
For geometries originating in other CAD systems that are Parasolid or Acis based,
the Units branch works slightly differently. Because most CAD systems output
geometry in meters (converted from the working units system), CFdesign will set
the analysis units to meters, when it reads in the geometry file. Unless the geometry was originally built in meters, the model will have different dimensions in CFdesign than in the CAD system. To convert the units system, simply select (left
2-27
User Interface
Other branches list existing settings, and allow them to be modified easily. Most of
the branches will be described with their relative chapters (the Boundary Conditions
and Initial Conditions branches will be discussed in the Loads chapter, for example). This section describes the branches that are specific to the Feature Tree, and
are not associated with a Dialog Task.
click on) the desired units system from the Length Units branch of the Feature Tree.
To make this process easier, it is recommended that you set the default units
system in File_Preferences to the working units system in your CAD system. When geometry is read into CFdesign for a new analysis, the analysis units
system will automatically be set, and the length dimensions of the model will be the
same as in the CAD system (they will be automatically converted from meters to
the default units system during the import).
When reading in a geometry file and the dimensions are correct but the unit
system is not, change just the units system (without changing any model dimensions) by right clicking on the desired unit system, and selecting Change Length
Unit Only. This is applicable if the CAD system does not convert the units to
meters when exporting geometry. Autodesk Inventor behaves this way.
2.9.2
Coordinate Systems
For three dimensional analyses, Cartesian (XYZ) is the only available coordinate
system.
For two dimensional analyses, the choices are Cartesian and Axisymmetric about
the X and Axisymmetric about the Y.
A two dimensional Cartesian geometry is always assumed to have a unit depth.
An axisymmetric geometry is a three dimensional geometry that is uniform in the
tangential direction. Because of this uniformity, a single slice through the geometry
can be simulated as a two dimensional model. The nice thing about axisymmetric
modelling is that a two dimensional analysis can give correct results for a three
dimensional model. An example of axisymmetric geometry is a straight pipe.
It is recommended that axisymmetric geometries be constructed in the first quadrant. Geometries that are axisymmetric about the x-axis cannot cross the x-axis
because the x-axis is the center-line. Likewise, geometries that are axisymmetric
about the y-axis cannot cross the y-axis. A unit radian depth is always assumed for
axisymmetric geometries.
2-28
2.9.3
Parts
Every part in the CAD model will be listed as a branch in the Parts section. The main
function of this branch is to set individual part view parameters and to allow selection of parts.
Left click on a part to highlight its display.
Right click on a part to bring up a menu with the following items: Select, Outline,
Transparent, and Add to Group.
In Analyze (during the run), Review, and Results modes, the Parts branch is not
displayed in the Feature Tree. Individual part display attributes are set using the
Materials branch.
2.9.4
Geometric entities with assigned conditions can be renamed in the Feature Tree.
This feature is applicable to surfaces and edges for 3d models and edges for 2d
models that have boundary conditions, initial conditions, or mesh sizes. (Note that
part names cannot be changed within the CFdesign interface.)
2-29
User Interface
Select a part from the Parts or Materials branch of the feature tree by right clicking
on its entity label and picking Select from the menu. Use the Windows standard
(shift or ctrl keys) to select multiple parts.
To change the name of an entity, right click on the current name in the feature
tree, and select Change Name. Enter the new name in the dialog that appears,
and hit OK. The entity will be renamed in the feature tree, and the name will persist
in other branches of the tree if other settings are applied to the entity.
2.10
2.10.1
Groups
Introduction
2-30
2.10.2
Creating Groups
User Interface
2-31
2.10.3
2.10.3.1
2.10.3.2
2-32
2.10.3.3
2.10.3.4
User Interface
When applying loads, mesh sizes, or materials, the currently selected entities can be
added to a group by right clicking in the
Selection window, and selecting Add to
Group.
2-33
2.10.4
2.10.5
Deleting Groups
2.10.6
2-34
2.10.7
Hiding Groups
A new menu item, Hide Group, has been added to the right-click group menu in
the feature tree. Click this menu item to blank (hide from view) all entities within a
certain group.
2.10.8
Selecting multiple groups allows an easy way to display, blank, or delete more than
one group at a time. Select multiple groups from the feature tree by using the Windows standard shift and control keys and clicking on the desired groups. Use the
right-click menu to execute the desired command.
2-35
User Interface
Right clicking anywhere on the Graphics window will restore the visibility of the
objects.
2.10.9
Combining Groups
Combine the contents of groups by right-clicking on a group, and selecting the Add
Group menu item:
The other groups containing the same entity type are listed. Click one of the groups
from the list to add its contents into the current group.
The group that is selected from the pop-out menu is not altered. (Only the group
that was right-clicked is modified.)
For example, to add the volumes of Group2 (as in the above graphic) into Group1,
right click on Group1, select Add Group, and then select Group2 from the list.
Group 1 will then contain all of its original entities plus those in Group2. Group2,
however, will not be changed.
2-36
2.10.10
Using Groups
2.11
Task Dialogs
The Task Dialogs shown in the Task Dialog Region are activated by clicking on one
of the tool buttons in the vertical tool bar. A good sequence to follow when setting
up an analysis is to work vertically through the tool buttons.
Loads
Mesh Sizes
Materials
Motion
Options
Analyze
Review
Results
Load Transfer
2-37
User Interface
Groups of surfaces can be selected for use with a Wall Results calculation. The
group must have existed during the last run (if it did not exist, simply run 0 iterations prior to examining wall results). To access a group of surfaces, right click in
the Wall Results dialog Selection list, and select the appropriate group. The surfaces in the group will be added to the Selection list, and wall results on those surfaces will be reported.
Below is a brief description of each task. The following chapters in this Guide discuss much more detail about the use and application of each of these dialogs.
Loads
Boundary conditions and initial conditions are applied with the Loads Command
Dialog.
Items such as velocity, pressure, and temperature are applied to the surfaces of a
model (to edges in 2D models).
Volumetric heat generation and total heat
generation are applied to volumes (to surfaces in 2D models).
Select the units for each boundary and initial
condition type.
Transient (time-dependent) boundary conditions are also applied and defined in the
Loads task.
Please see the Loads chapter for more information.
Mesh Sizes
A mesh has to be constructed which
divides the entire geometry into small
pieces, or elements.
Each element has four nodes, one at each
corner. The finite element equations are then
solved at each node in the model.
This dialog provides tools to automatically
define a mesh as well as identify potential
problem areas within the geometry.
The Mesh Enhancement parameters are
adjusted by clicking the Mesh Enhancement
button.
Please see the Meshing chapter for more
information.
2-38
Materials
User Interface
2-39
Motion
The definition and specification of solid
motion are controlled with this dialog. Several types of engineering motions are
supported: linear, angular, combined linearangular, orbital, nutating, sliding vane, and
free motion. All can be defined through userinput, and most can be flow-driven.
A Motion Editor is accessed by clicking the
Create/Edit Motion button. This dialog allows
specification of non-geometric-dependent
quantities such as velocity, displacement, or
driving or resistive forces.
Geometric-based parameters such as initial
position of the object, the direction of travel,
and the limits of the motion are defined on
the main Motion task dialog.
See the Motion chapter for more information.
Options
The physics to be solved in an analysis
are set in the Options dialog. The defaults are
good for many analyses--flow, incompressible, no heat transfer--but are easily changed
if necessary.
The Turbulence button allows the user to
change the turbulence model.
The Solar button opens the Solar Heating dialog which allows specification of solar loading.
The Scalars button allows the user to enable
one of the scalar models (general scalar,
steam, and humidity.)
Please see the Analysis Options chapter for
more infomation.
2-40
Analyze
User Interface
Review
This dialog contains numerous functions. Before the analysis, it is used to set up
Monitor Points (points in space on which convergence can be monitored).
After the analysis the Summary and Status
files are accessible from the Notes tab. These
files contain information about the results as
well as the analysis.
The Results tab lists all saved results (and
time) steps, and provides a way to include
them in an animation.
The Animate tab animates the results sets
made active in the Results tab.
Please see the Review chapter for more information.
2-41
Results
The Results dialog contains a great deal
of post-processing functionality.
The Cutting Plane, a 2D slice through the
model on which color results and/or vectors
are shown, is the primary tool, and is the basis
for particle traces, XY plots, and bulk data output.
The Iso Surface is a surface of constant value,
and is a great way of visualizing flow and temperature distributions.
Flow-induced forces, convection coefficients,
temperatures, and pressures on walls are calculated using the Wall tab.
Settings for cutting plane and vector display
are set with the Settings tab.
Please see the Viewing Results chapter for
more information.
Transfer
This dialog makes it easy to convert
CFdesign flow results (pressures and temperatures) to boundary conditions in several FEA
structural codes.
Ansys, Nastran, Abaqus, Mechanica, Cosmos,
and FEMAP, and I-DEAS are supported.
Please see the Results Transfer chapter for
more information.
2-42
2.12
There are some additional parameters that control output of optional files as well as
provide additional control to the way geometry is handled. These parameters must
be in a file called cfdesign_flags.txt, which is located in the installation directory.
The default location of the file is the CFdesign installation directory. An environment
variable called CFDESIGN90TEMP must point to the location of this file.
This file can be moved to a different location, but the environment variable must be
updated to point to the new location.
The variables in the flags file, their parameters, and their meanings are shown:
This entry enables support the
Spaceball navigation device.
There are no arguments--if the
entry is in the flags file, the Spaceball is supported.
protool fillvoids A
A = 0: off;
A = 1: on
(ON by
default)
CATIA fillvoids A
A = 0: off;
A = 1: on
(ON by
default)
PARASOLID
SET_DISP_TOLER A B C
A = 0: off; A =
1: on
B=0
C = tolerance
value
2-43
User Interface
use_spaceball
ACIS SET_DISP_TOLER A
BC
A = 0: off; A =
1 on
B=0
C = tolerance
value
DISCRETE
EDGEANGLE_THRESHOLD
ABC
A = 0: off; A =
1: on
B=0
C = tolerance
value
load_xfer_all_res A
A = 0: off;
A = 1: on
ViewFactorUpdate A
A = number
between 1 and
100
rad_model_1 A
A = 0: off;
A = 1: on
FORCED_EXTRA A
A = number of
iterations
2-44
enthalpy_humid A
A = 0: off;
A = 1: on
CFDESIGN
USE_VIZSERVER A
A = 0: off;
A = 1: on
User Interface
2-45
2-46
CHAPTE R 3
3.1
Geometry
Introduction
CFdesign has very strong ties to most of the CAD tools used in industry today. By
using the same geometry engines found in these CAD systems, CFdesign reads the
native model without the need for Step or IGES translations. Parametric changes to
the geometry are read directly into CFdesign, and model settings from similar analyses are automatically applied to the modified geometry.
This functionality allows two things to occur very easily: The first is that multiple
design alternatives can be analyzed very easily--without having to go to great
lengths to fix IGES or Step translations for each what if scenario. The second is
that corporate PLM/PDM initiatives are supported--geometry manipulation occurs
ONLY in the CAD system, where it can be tracked and archived. When geometry is
manipulated in a third party system (such as many of the other CFD tools),
changes often get lost, or simply have to be re-created in the CAD system--thereby
doubling the work. With CFdesign, such issues are not a problem.
This chapter describes the type of CAD geometry needed to successfully run a flow
analysis. Guidelines for what is needed, techniques for how to obtain it, and troubleshooting tips are presented. Guidelines specific to Pro/Engineer and to Parasolid/
Acis based CAD systems are discussed.
3.2
Geometry used for a typical fluid flow analysis is often different than that used in a
structural analysis. There are two broad classifications of flow geometry: internal
and external. Examples of internal flows include pipe flow, valve flow, and flow in
electronic enclosures. Examples of external flows, also called submerged flows,
include flow over a car, an airplane wing, or a missile.
3-1
Geometry
For internal flows, a flow core must be created from the existing surrounding
geometry. The outer walls of the volume are omitted (unless they are to be used as
part of a heat transfer calculation) and the interior volume of the pipe is modeled.
In contrast, in a structural analysis the walls of the pipe would be meshed and the
interior would be omitted from the calculation domain:
Another description of the interior volume is this: a pipe is filled with water and the
water is allowed to freeze. Now, imagine that the pipe walls are removed, and all
that remained was the solid volume of ice. This volume is where the fluid exists,
and is the geometry that would be created and meshed for a CFD analysis of flow
through that pipe.
For external flows, it is customary to invert the geometry, meaning that the
object will be made stationary and the flow will be blown over it at the equal and
opposite speed of the object. To implement this as analysis geometry, two pieces of
3-2
Geometry
geometry are needed: the object itself (missile, car, bullet, etc.) and a large calculation domain in which the object is positioned:
Geometry
The shape of the domain is usually not very critical, and can be a circle, semi-circle,
rectangle, sphere, or box. Because the flow all around the object is being modeled,
it is a good idea to make the computational domain substantially larger than the
object itself. More detail about the relative size of the calculation domain will be discussed in Chapter 12 of this Guide.
3-3
Geometry
3.3
Pro/Engineer
3.3.1
Many models constructed in Pro/E consist of just the physical solids (the pipe wall,
for example). In earlier versions of CFdesign, it was necessary to manually create
the flow volume in Pro/E. To reduce the amount of time and effort needed to prepare a Pro/E geometry for analysis, CFdesign has the ability to convert a fully
enclosed void into a meshable volume.
3.3.1.1
In the following example, the pipe wall and two internal parts were created in Pro/
Engineer:
3-4
Geometry
To prepare this for a flow analysis, simply add a cap to both ends of the pipe:
The Pro/E geometry shown above consists of five parts: the pipe wall, the two
internal components, and the two end caps. In this example, the caps are constructed using the inner diameter of the pipe wall, and extruded into the pipe.
Alternatively, the caps could have been extruded out of the pipe, or have been built
using the outer diameter of the pipe wall.
When brought into CFdesign, the internal volume is automatically created:
Geometry
The two internal parts are automatically cut from the newly created flow volume.
3-5
Geometry
3.3.1.2
Pro/E Void Filling is enabled by default. To deactivate it, make the following entry in
your cfdesign_flags.txt file. A value of 1 activates fill voids, a value of 0 disables it:
PROTOOL FILLVOIDS 0
The cfdesign_flags.txt file can be placed anywhere on your local computer. Be sure
to set an environment variable called CFDESIGN90TEMP to point to the location of
your flags file. Its default location is in the CFdesign installation directory.
3.3.1.3
Guidelines
Components built in Pro/E must not interfere, so care must still be taken to eliminate part interferences from the Pro/E model.
There are a few guidelines that should be observed or the automatic void creation
will not work:
Parts that are inside of the void must not protrude through the outer
wall of the geometry. If this occurs, the void filling will fail. This is shown:
3-6
Geometry
End caps must not extend beyond the geometry surrounding an opening. In this pipe example, the cap must not extend beyond the outer diameter of the pipe. An example that will fail is shown:
3.3.2
3-7
Geometry
There are situations in two and three dimensional geometry where it is advantageous to divide a surface or volume into smaller areas. This is especially useful for
boundary condition placement, and sometimes for greater control over mesh density. In Pro/E, create a surface region to divide a surface into smaller surfaces or a
volume region to divide a volume into smaller volumes. CFdesign will read in these
divisions, and allow boundary conditions and mesh definitions on the new surfaces
and edges.
Geometry
The procedure to create a surface region follows (volume region creation is similar):
1. Click on Applications_Mechanica.
2. On the Mechanica menu, select Structure.
3. Select Model_Features_Surf Region_Create. At this point, click either
Sketch to sketch the region, or Select if datum curves already exist which define
the region. Click Done.
4. If Sketch was selected, you will be prompted to select a sketch plane and to
orient it.
5. You will then be in Sketch mode. Draw and dimension the region.
6. After completing the section, you will be asked to select the surface(s) to be
split. Do so, then hit Done Sel and Done.
Note that your Pro/E license must allow access to the Mechanica FEM mode to use
Simuation Features.
When CFdesign is started, you will see the region as another surface.
3.3.3
3-8
Geometry
1. Click Feature_Create_Surface_Flat.
2. Position the drawing (the XY plane is the recommended orientation).
3. If the geometry is an axisymmetric model, be sure to position it relative to the
3.3.4
Interferences
3-9
Geometry
Any parts that interfere will be highlighted. To fix an interference, it may be necessary to move one or more parts, cut one part from another (see Section 3.3.2), or
to delete parts. Every model is different, so the solution will be dependent on the
goal of the analysis. Shown are a couple of examples of fixed geometry:
3.3.5
Accuracy
When working with assemblies, it is recommended that all the parts in the assembly (and the assembly itself) have the same absolute accuracy. In many cases, it
might not matter, but if you try to launch into CFdesign, and both Pro/E and CFdesign crash, you should adjust the accuracies of the parts and assemblies in your
model.
By default, absolute accuracy is not enabled in Pro/E. To turn it on, a configuration
setting called enable_absolute_accuracy needs to be set. To do this:
To set the absolute accuracy for the parts and assembly, first find out what the
absolute accuracy is for the smallest part, then change the absolute accuracy of the
other parts to that of the smallest:
1. Open the part, and click on Setup_Accuracy (from the Part or assembly
menu).
3-10
Geometry
2. Pro/E will prompt for a relative accuracy, so click the ESC key, and select Absolute Accuracy.
3. Select Absolute, and Enter Value, and enter the value for absolute accuracy.
4. Click the Check mark, and the part will regenerate.
Modifying the part and assembly accuracy to absolute is not always necessary, but
if there are parts with very small features and larger parts in the same assembly, it
can be very useful for preventing crashes.
Also, if automatic void filling is enabled but fails to create the internal volume
(assuming that the guidelines in the void filling section of this chapter are followed), it may be necessary to modify the accuracy on the parts and assembly to
be absolute. If the void filling still fails, using a smaller accuracy value might correct
the problem.
When using simulation volume regions (particularly in Wildfire), if they do not
appear as a separate volume from the surrounding part (in CFdesign), then setting
the accuracy to absolute (and then using a smaller value if necessary) will often
cause the volume region to be considered as a separate part.
3.3.6
1. Set the number of iterations to 0, so that after meshing and pre-processing, the
analysis does not proceed. Exit out of CFdesign, and then exit out of Pro/E. Start
CFdesign from the Desktop, open the analysis, and run it.
2. While the analysis is running shut down the CFdesign interface. (The analysis
will continue to run.) After the interface is shutdown, Pro/E can be accessed or shut
down as required.
3-11
Geometry
For a new analysis, CFdesign MUST be launched from Pro/E. When you do this, you
will see that Pro/E minimizes, and is in a sleep state. You will also notice that
when you hit the GO button on the Analyze window in CFdesign, Pro/E comes back,
but is working. The mesh is actually being generated by CFdesign by reading the
part geometry from the Pro/E database. It is accessing the part and assembly information in the same way that Pro/Mesh accesses it. For this reason, CFdesign must
be launched from Pro/E when the goal is to generate a mesh.
Geometry
3.3.7
When a three dimensional part is divided by another part into multiple volumes, the
result will be split surfaces. The problem with split surfaces is that they are considered by the Pro/E model to be a single surface (even though there are disconnected). When a boundary condition is applied to one of these surfaces, it may be
lost or will jump to the other surface when the analysis is saved. An example is
shown:
Original part
3.4
This section discusses geometry issues that are specific to the Parasolid and Acisbased CAD systems. Such systems include Inventor (Acis), Solid Edge (Parasolid),
Unigraphics (Parasolid), Solid Works (Parasolid), Solid Designer (Acis), and CADKey (Acis).
3-12
Geometry
3.4.1
The internal flow volume will be created by CFdesign provided that the internal volume is completely enclosed. This means that when the open ends of an internal
flow geometry are capped with either a surface or volume and then read into CFdesign, the internal core will be generated automatically. This is illustrated below:
Step 1: Pipe geometry--only the physical solids exist (pipe wall and poppet):
3-13
Geometry
Step 2: Pipe geometry with newly-created volumes at the ends (pipe wall, poppet,
and two end caps). The end caps were created by extruding the inner-radius curves
of the pipe. This extends the flow volume slightly, but they can be omitted from the
meshing if necessary.
Geometry
Note: For Acis geometries, it is recommended that the end caps be larger than the
ends. The following graphic shows this:
Step 3: Geometry read by CFdesign--the flow core has been created automatically,
and is shown as the highlighted volume. Notice that there are now five volumes
listed in the Materials branch of the Feature Tree--the pipe wall, the poppet, the
two end caps, and the flow volume.
If there are objects inside of the flow volume (like a poppet for example), they will
automatically be embedded into the flow volume. This means that it is not necessary to cut out submerged objects from their surrounding geometry.
For Solid Works-based analyses, if a geometric change is made to an existing analysis model such that the topology of an internal core volume is changed, the volume settings (volume mesh size and material definition) will be lost from that core
volume. Such a change would be the addition or removal of a part or features of a
part that are inside the void. The reason for this is that core volumes are not created in the CAD tool, they are created by CFdesign when the geometry is read in.
Because of this, there is no direct geometric link between the core volume and the
original CAD model. Settings on geometric entities created in the CAD tool will be
preserved for most topological changes, however.
If it is not necessary (or desirable) to mesh various solids in a model (the pipe wall
and poppet, for example), then a no-mesh condition can be applied to them during
the mesh definition step. (This is covered in more detail in the Meshing chapter). In
the preceding example, because the flow volume was created based on the solid
geometry, the poppet is cut out from the flow volume, and fluid will not pass
through this region even if the poppet is not meshed.
3-14
Geometry
3.4.2
Many analysis models are built have physical solids that are submerged in the flow.
Such objects are often involved in a heat transfer analysis, and may carry a heat
load. The method for dealing with submerged objects is very simple: Place them in
the desired location within the surrounding volume. It is not necessary to remove
interferences or to cut an internal part from the surrounding volume. CFdesign will
do this automatically. The following graphics illustrate this.
Step 1: An empty box representing the air in an electronics box.
Step 3: As the model is read into CFdesign, the components are automatically cut
from the air to remove all geometric interferences. Proper connectivity between all
contacting parts is automatically ensured.
CFdesign Users Guide
3-15
Geometry
Step 2: Components are simply placed inside the box in the appropriate locations.
Geometry
In our example, the air volume in the CAD system was only a box. As CFdesign
read the geometry, voids for the internal components were cut into the air. This is
why the internal curves highlight when the air volume is selected.
This applies to both internal flows with submerged objects (examples include valves
with poppets and electronic packages), and for external flows simulating the flow
over a moving object. To include the obstruction as a meshable volume in the analysis model, simply place it in the surrounding volume at the desired location.
3.4.3
3.4.4
Part Names
Part names assigned in Parasolid- and Acis-based CAD tools will now appear in the
CFdesign feature tree. Only part names are listed in the Parts branch of the feature
tree; assemblies are not listed.
From Solid Works, the naming convention of a part is based on the parent assembly
and any parts that surround that part. For example, a part called small-chip is a
member of a sub-assembly called left-board_asm. This part is also surrounded by
a part called test-box. The part name in the feature tree would then be:
TEST-BOX_U_SMALL-CHIP-4@LEFT-BOARD_ASM
The U indicates that the part SMALL-CHIP is surrounded by the part TEST-BOX.
If a part is used multiple times in an assembly, an instance number will be attached
to the part name. In the example above, this part was the fourth instance of the
part SMALL-CHIP.
3-16
Geometry
If the geometry was not launched from Solid Works, the part names will be a combination of the CAD part name and any part that completely surrounds it. The name
of the part listed above would be:
TEST-BOX_U_SMALL-CHIP^4
In some cases, the actual part name (without the surrounding part or assembly)
will be listed in the feature tree. This is typically because the part is surrounded by
an automatically-created flow volume.
Note that internal core parts that are created by CFdesign will be assigned the
generic name volume. This is because such parts were not created in the native
CAD tool, and hence did not have a name. Also, the name of internal core parts will
not be used within the names of other parts they completely surround.
3.5
CATIA V5
The CFdesign interface for CATIA is designed to work with V5R14, V5R15, and
V5R16. This is an associative interface that reads the geometry directly from the
CATIA database--it does not rely on file translations. Meshing is performed by
CFdesign directly on the CATIA geometry.
3.5.1
Part Names
The names assigned to CATParts remain with them when the model is brought into
CFdesign.
3-17
Geometry
After launching CFdesign from CATIA, the CATIA interface will minimize (but CATIA
will continue to run). The CFdesign interface will start, and will prompt for an analysis name. The analysis model is then set up according to standard practices outlined in the CFdesign documentation. When the analysis is started (by hitting the
GO button on the Analyze task) the CFdesign interface will minimize and the CATIA
interface will reappear. Meshing status messages are written to the Status bar in
the CATIA interface. After meshing is completed, the CFdesign interface will reappear, and the analysis will continue.
Geometry
3.5.2
Interferences
Interferences between CATIA geometry are not supported in the CFdesign interface. Please ensure that all interferences are removed before launching into CFdesign. The result of not removing them is likely a crash either when CFdesign is first
launched or when the mesh is generated.
3.5.2.1
Clash Detection
These are some general steps to detect for interferences between parts in CATIA:
Apply.
3. Interfering parts will highlight in orange, and will be listed in the Check Clash
dialog.
3.5.2.2
Removing Interferences
Select the desired part to be cut from, and move it from the Parts Possibly Affected
area to the Affected Parts area.
4. Click OK on the Remove dialog (to verify the cut out).
3.5.3
Many models constructed in CATIA consist of just the physical solids (the pipe wall,
for example). To analyze the flow, however, the volume comprising the flow volume must also exist in the analysis. To reduce the amount of time and effort
needed to prepare a solid-only geometry for analysis, CFdesign has the ability to
convert a fully enclosed void into a meshable volume automatically.
3-18
Geometry
In the following example, the pipe wall and two internal parts were created in
CATIA:
To prepare this for a flow analysis, simply add a cap to both ends of the pipe:
Geometry
The CATIA geometry shown above consists of five parts: the pipe wall, the two
internal components, and the two end caps. In this example, the caps are constructed using the inner diameter of the pipe wall, and extruded into the pipe.
Alternatively, the caps could have been extruded out of the pipe, or have been built
3-19
Geometry
using the outer diameter of the pipe wall. In many cases, it has been found that
extending the outer edges of the cap beyond the outer edge of the flow vessel is
the recommended method of automatically generating the flow volume.
When brought into CFdesign, the internal volume is automatically created:
The two internal parts are automatically cut from the newly created flow volume.
Automatic Flow Volume Creation is enabled by default. To disable it, add the following entry in your cfdesign_flags.txt file. A value of 1 enables volume creation, a
value of 0 disables it:
CATIA FILLVOIDS 0
The cfdesign_flags.txt file can be placed anywhere on your local computer. Be sure
to set an environment variable called CFDESIGN90TEMP to point to the location of
your flags file. Its default location is in the CFdesign installation directory.
3.5.4
Model Changes
An important capability that CFdesign provides to the product design process is the
ability to conduct analyses of multiple geometric configurations. Using the Projects
feature in CFdesign greatly facilitates the management of multiple analyses, each
of which can be based on a variation of the design geometry.
3-20
Geometry
The CFdesign interface to CATIA supports both parametric and topological changes
to the geometry. Parametric changes are modifications to dimensions that do not
result in a change in the number of parts, surfaces, or edges. Topological changes
are a broader scope of changes, and include the addition or removal of parts or features.
Specifically, if a change is made to the geometric model, settings from a similar
analysis can be mapped to the modified geometry. If the geometric change causes
a significant change to an area (such as the removal of a feature), then locally
those settings cannot be applied. Such settings are listed in the Lost List, and can
be re-applied manually.
3.5.5
Multi-Body Parts
The use of multiple-body parts is not supported. Only the geometry from the first
body will be read into CFdesign.
Geometry
3-21
Geometry
The following graphic shows a CATIA feature tree with both an empty part body and
multiple part bodies in the same part:
3-22
Geometry
3.5.6
The intersection of a face and only an edge is not supported. The following geometrical situation should be avoided:
In this case, only the edge of one volume contacts the surface of another volume.
This will cause an error in transferring the geometry from CATIA to CFdesign, and
should be corrected by the user prior to launching CFdesign.
The surfaces of two (or more) volumes can touch one another without error, however.:
Geometry
3-23
Geometry
In this example, a work-around would be to offset the cylinder slightly into the
block, and cut off the interfering piece.
3.5.7
Units
The default units system in CATIA is mm. Additionally, mm is the underlying units
system for the geometry engine in CATIA. Because of this, geometry read by CFdesign from the CATIA database is always in mm, even if the geometry was constructed in any other units system.
In the Units branch of the CFdesign feature tree, left click on mm to set the units
system to mm. Doing this will not convert any dimensions in the model, however.
A future enhancement to the CATIA CFdesign launcher will be to allow units conversions of geometry constructed in other units systems.
3.6
Outlets
More information about boundary conditions will be supplied in the Loads chapter,
but it is worth pointing out some important geometric considerations regarding outlets. CFdesign assumes that flow is normal to the outlet and that there are no gradients in the normal direction.
For this reason, it is important to create flow outlets away from sudden turns or
contractions. If the outlet is too close, the flow cannot reach a fully developed
state, which is the condition assumed by CFdesign. Also, if the outlet is too close to
an expansion area, reversed flow could result (flow re-entering).
3-24
Geometry
NO
3.7
YES
Lost List
If the geometric change was parametric in nature (dimensional change), then settings will be applied to the new geometry. If the change was topological in nature
(added or deleted geometric features), then some settings may not be applied
automatically, and will have to be applied manually. An example is if a part with an
assigned heat generation load was removed from the model. The heat generation
boundary condition would be lost from the model.
In this case and for the case in which an analysis is re-opened after geometric
changes, any settings that are lost are now listed in a small dialog. The user can
3-25
Geometry
When changes are made to a geometry (often as the next design alternative), a
new analysis is created and added to a project containing previous analyses of similar geometry. The settings (boundary conditions, mesh sizes, materials, options)
can be read from an existing analysis and applied to a new analysis with a simple
command on the feature tree. (See the Projects chapter of this Guide for more
details.)
Geometry
reassociate these settings to the model by selecting the geometric entity and then
the setting from the list.
If settings are lost (either because a topological change eliminated some geometry
or because the topology was changed too much), a Show Lost button will appear
on the appropriate dialog (based on the type of settings that were lost):
The Show Lost button will only appear on a dialog if settings of the dialog type are
lost.
When the Show Lost button is hit, a window will come up listing the lost settings:
The number to the right of the setting indicates how many instances of the condition were lost. Lost conditions can be applied to as many entities as desired, however.
For lost mesh sizes, the type of entity the condition was applied to (volume, surface, or edge) will be indicated in the list.
To reassign a lost setting, first select the entity (or entities) in the model. Select the
desired setting from the list of lost settings. Hit Apply on the task dialog.
All lost lists will be cleared from the analysis when the analysis is saved.
3-26
Geometry
3.8
Suppressed Components
Components that are suppressed when starting the CFdesign analysis will not be
read by CFdesign.
3.9
This feature allows the import of a mesh generated in a tool other than CFdesign.
Meshes in the I-DEAS .unv format and the Nastran .nas and .dat formats can
be read in by clicking File_New, and changing the File Type to CAD Mesh Files.
The model will come into CFdesign and appear as it did in the meshing tool. Separate parts in an assembly must be meshed with unique material IDs in the third
party meshing tool. Otherwise, parts will not be differentiated from one another.
In CFdesign, set up of the model is standard, with the exception that the Mesh task
dialog is not available. Mesh Enhancement is allowed, however. When the analysis
is started, the meshing step will be omitted.
Geometry
3-27
Geometry
3-28
CHAPTE R 4
4.1
Loads
Introduction
This chapter describes both the physical significance of loads as well as how to the
correctly assign them in the CFdesign user interface. Loads can be classified into
two categories: boundary conditions and initial conditions. The former can be a
known velocity or flow rate at an inlet, a specified temperature, or a heat flux, for
example.
Boundary conditions are enforced through the entire course of an analysis. Initial
conditions, however, are often applied to larger regions of a geometry, but are only
enforced at the beginning of an analysis. Initial conditions are often the starting
point for a transient analysis.
4.2
The Loads dialog is broken into two tabbed sections: Boundary Conditions and Initial Conditions. Boundary conditions are the most commonly used, and define the
condition at a location on the model throughout the entire analysis. Initial conditions, conversely, only enforce a condition at the beginning of the analysis, and are
mostly used for transient (time-dependent) analyses.
4-1
Loads
Shown is the Boundary Condition tab, and instructions for its use:
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
button will remove the boundary condition of the type shown in the Type
drop menu from the selected entity
or entities. The Delete All button
removes all boundary conditions from
the model.
4-2
Loads
4.3
4.3.1
Velocity
4.3.2
Rotational Velocity
A volume flow rate is applied to an inlet (or an outlet, if the applied direction is out
of the model). This condition can only be applied planar entities. When applying
flow rate to multiple openings at the same time, the flow direction (in or out of the
model) must be the same.
CFdesign Users Guide
4-3
Loads
4.3.3
Loads
4.3.4
Mass flow rate can be applied at an inlet or an outlet (by specifying the correct flow
direction). When mass flow rate is applied to multiple openings concurrently, the
flow direction (in or out of the model) will be the same for all applied openings.
Modifications to individual openings can be made as necessary. Mass flow rate
boundary conditions can only be assigned to planar surfaces.
4.3.5
Pressure
4.3.6
Temperature
Select either Static or Total. Static is the recommended temperature for most
analyses. Total temperature should only be used as an inlet for compressible analyses with heat transfer.
Enter the value and hit Apply.
A temperature condition constrains the applied region to that temperature throughout the entire analysis. It can also constrain the temperature of incoming flow.
4.3.7
Slip/Symmetry
Hit the Apply button to set a slip condition on selected surfaces. There is no value
associated with the slip condition.
4-4
Loads
The slip condition allows fluid to flow along a wall (as opposed to stopping at the
wall as in a non-slip condition). The fluid is prevented from flowing through the
wall, however.
This boundary condition can be used with a very low viscosity to simulate Euler or
inviscid flow.
Slip walls are also useful for defining a symmetry plane. The symmetry region does
not have to be parallel to a coordinate axis.
For axisymmetric analyses, the symmetry condition along the axis is automatically
set, and does not need to be applied manually.
4.3.8
Unknown
Hit the Apply button to set an unknown condition on selected surfaces. There is no
value associated with the unknown condition.
This is a natural condition meaning that boundary is open, but no other constraints are applied.
This is most used for supersonic outlets where the outlet pressure or velocity is not
known, and applying either condition would result in shock waves or expansion
waves at the outlet.
4.3.9
Scalar
This is a unitless quantity ranging between 0 and 1 that represents the concentration of the tracking (scalar) quantity.
4.3.10
Humidity
4-5
Loads
This is a unitless quantity ranging between 0 and 1 that represents relative humidity (1 corresponds to a humidity level of 100%).
Loads
4.3.11
Steam Quality
This is a unitless quantity ranging between 0 and 1 that represents the steam quality (1 corresponds to a quality of 100%--pure steam).
4.3.12
Heat Flux
Heat flux is a surface condition that imposes a given amount of heat directly to the
applied surface.
Select the desired units, and enter a heat value divided by area. For example, if the
heat input is 10W, and the area is 5 sq. inches, then the applied value will be 10W/
5 sq. inches = 2 W/sq. inch.
Heat flux can be applied to outer walls, to solid-solid interfaces, and to fluid-solid
interfaces.
4.3.13
This is a heat flux condition that is applied directly without having to divide by the
surface area. This is very important because it allows the user to make parametric
changes that might change the area, and not have to worry about recalculating the
heat flux boundary condition.
To use, select the surface or surfaces, select the units, enter the value of the heat
(not divided by area) in the Total Heat Flux field, and hit Apply.
Total heat flux can be applied to outer walls, to solid-solid interfaces, and to fluidsolid interfaces.
4.3.14
Film Coefficient
Select the desired units, and specify a film coefficient (convection coefficient). Also,
enter the reference temperature in the desired units.
This condition is most often used to simulate a cooling effect.
4-6
Loads
4.3.15
Radiation
This condition simulates the radiative heat transfer between the selected surface(s)
and a source external to the model. The surface emissivity and the background
temperature are the required inputs.
This is a sort of radiation film coefficient in that it exposes a surface to a given
heat load using a source temperature and a surface condition.
4.3.16
External Fan
Click the Edit Flow Rate/Pressure Curve button to specify the values of the
known fan curve. Click Insert Row to add rows between defined rows. Click the Plot
button to view the plot--to check your work. The Import button imports a comma
separated variable (CSV) file, and the Save button saves the curve information to a
CSV file. To enter a fan that pulls flow (at an outlet), enter all flow rate and pressure values as negative.
A Slip Factor can also be specified. The slip factor is the ratio of the true rotational
speed of the flow to the rotational speed of the fan blades. Due to inefficiencies in
the fan, slip can result in a slower flow tangential flow velocity than expected.
CFdesign determines the flow tangential velocity component by multiplying the slip
factor by the user-supplied fan rotational speed.
CFdesign Users Guide
4-7
Loads
Loads
The default slip factor is 1.0. This means that the rotational speed of the flow is the
same as the rotational speed of the fan. The permitted range of slip factor values is
between 0 and 1. Values outside of this range are not allowed by the User Interface.
4.3.17
Current
Used only to define a Joule heating analysis, apply the current to one end of the
solid through which Joule heating is occurring. The current condition to apply is a
total current, not a current density.
Joule heating is the generation of heat by passing an electric current through a
metal. Also known as resistance heating, this feature allows the user to simulate
stove-top burner elements as well as electrical resistance heaters.
4.3.18
Voltage
Another condition used only for a Joule heating analysis. Apply a voltage to the
other end of the heated solid. A value of 0 Volts is often used. Alternatively, a voltage difference can be applied to the solid: a higher voltage on one side and a lower
voltage on the other. In this case, omit the applied current condition.
4.3.19
Periodic
The periodic boundary condition values are the Pair ID and the Side ID. Use the
same Pair ID for both members of a pair, and use different Side IDs for each member of a pair. On the inlet periodic pair, for example, use a Pair ID of 1 on both
sides, and assign one side a Side ID of 1 and the other a Side ID of 2. On the outlet,
assign a pair ID of 2 to both members of the pair, but use a Side ID of 1 for one
side and a Side ID of 2 for the other. Do not use the same pair ID for surfaces that
are not periodic with one another.
Periodic boundary conditions (cyclic symmetry) enable users to model a single passage of an axial or centrifugal turbomachine or of a non-rotating device with
repeating features (passages).
4-8
Loads
Periodic boundaries are always applied in pairs; the two members of a periodic pair
have identical flow distributions. The two members of a periodic pair must be geometrically similar.
Periodic pairs are used at the inlet and outlets of repeating devices:
Periodic Pair 1
Periodic Pair 2
Periodic boundary conditions are a convenient way to include the effect of multiple
repeating features in a simplified model. Because of the repeating geometry, the
flow upstream and downstream of a device will be the same for each passage.
4.3.20
Transparent
The radiation model introduced in CFdesign v9 allows for the computation of radiative heat transfer through transparent media. The level of transmissivity of such
media is defined as a material property on the Materials Task dialog. To simulate
transparent media that is completely immersed in the working fluid, only the material transmissivity needs to be specified. To simulate transparency through surfaces
on an exterior solid, the Transparent boundary condition is also required.
The only parameter associated with the Transparent condition is the Background
Temperature. This is the temperature of the environment outside of the analysis
domain.
4-9
Loads
Loads
An example of the application of this condition is to simulate a room heated by sunlight coming in through a window on an external wall of the model:
Room Temperature = 20 C
""
= ( T background )
Transparent BCs should only be applied to external boundaries so that the incoming
flux is external to the analysis domain. This boundary condition can only be used
with transparent parts--parts that have a non-zero value of transmissivity.
Solar heating problems should not use transparent BCs because the set up of the
solar heating problem requires a sky dome and ground structure that define the
entire external boundaries. If windows are modeled in these cases, these transparent materials would be internal to the analysis domain which would make transparent boundary conditions inappropriate.
If an external transparent part is not assigned a transparent boundary condition,
the emissivity and transmissivity will automatically be set to 0 because the following relation is observed:
reflection = 1 - emissivity - transmissivity.
In such a case, the external boundary will be perfectly reflective (like a silver backing on a mirror) with the exterior of the model. This is done to conserve energy;
because no background temperature is defined, the heat loss or gain cannot be
computed.
Note that radiation must be enabled (on the Options dialog) for the Transparent
boundary condition to work.
4-10
Loads
The Background Temperature can be varied with time by clicking the Transient bullet, and specifying the time function.
4.4
Heat generation is a volume condition that applies an amount of heat to a geometric volume. This is most often used to simulate the presence of heat-dissipating
components in electronics assemblies.
4.4.1
4.4.2
4.4.3
4-11
Loads
This allows the heat generation to vary with temperature. Physically, such a condition is a thermostat, and allows for the simulation of a heating device that shuts off
(or greatly de-powers) once a target temperature is reached. Temperature-dependent heat generation is available for both volumetric and total heat generation
boundary conditions. The location of the sensing temperature can be set to be
either the centroid of the part or at some other user-selected location.
Loads
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 6
Pick on Surface uses the average temperature at the selected surface as the
driving temperature.
4-12
Loads
4.5
Transient Conditions
variation.
There are seven variational methods, each
described below:
4.5.1
Constant
Ramp Step
Periodic
Harmonic
Polynomial
Inverse Polynomial
Power Law
Piecewise Linear
Step 1
Step 3
Step 2
Constant
The Constant variation method causes the boundary condition to remain static
throughout the calculation. The condition does not change, unless the value is
changed by the user.
Loads
4-13
Loads
4.5.2
Ramp Step
The Ramp-Step function combines a linear ramp function with a flat step function.
Refer to the sketch below for the parameter meanings. The T# values are the
times that inflections occur. The F# values are the min and max of the variables. One cycle of this function goes
from T4 to T4.
The ramp step function should be specified such that the maximum value (F1)
occurs first at time T1. At time T2, the
value starts to ramp down. At time T3,
the function hits its minimum value (F2).
At time T4, the value starts to ramp up.
4.5.3
Periodic
4-14
Loads
4.5.4
Harmonic
The Harmonic type of boundary condition is similar to the Periodic except that
the variable is a function of sine and
cosine functions. As in Periodic, only one
set of values need to be specified: either
the cos or the sin values. Note that the
cos and sin functions do change sign, so
negative values of the variable can
result if improper parameters are
entered on this dialog.
4.5.5
Power Law
Loads
4-15
Loads
4.5.6
4.5.7
Piecewise Linear
4-16
Loads
4.6
This section describes the different kinds of physical boundaries and relates them to
the boundary condition types available in CFdesign.
4.6.1
Inlets
Inlets are most often defined with either non-zero velocity components
or a gage static pressure, or...
An inlet can be a fan. The inlet flow rate will vary with the pressure
drop through the device, or...
Volumetric flow rate can be assigned as an inlet condition, or...
Mass flow rate can be assigned as an inlet condition, or...
Total Pressure can be used at the inlet of supersonic flow models if that
is the only quantity known.
For heat transfer analyses, specify the temperature at all inlets.
For subsonic conditions at the inlet, specify velocity OR pressure, not
both.
For supersonic inlet conditions, specify both the velocity and the static
pressure. This is necessary only if the inlet is nearly sonic or faster. For
more information about Compressible analyses, please see the Analysis
Guidelines chapter of this manual.
For compressible flow analyses that include heat transfer, specify a
total temperature as well as a velocity and pressure.
When using a general scalar, specify the scalar at all inlets, even if the
value is zero.
To include swirl (an out of plane velocity component) in a 2D axisymmetric analysis, specify the third component of velocity (usually the z-component).
It is not necessary to specify turbulence quantities at any inlet. The
inlet turbulence intensity used to calculate the turbulent kinetic energy and
turbulent energy dissipation is set in the Turbulence menu launched from
the Options dialog.
4-17
Loads
Loads
4.6.2
Outlets
YES
NO
4.6.3
Walls
AutoWall sets wall conditions automatically on all surfaces that are not
defined as inlets, outlets, symmetry, slip, or unknown.
It is not necessary to set a zero velocity (no-flow) condition at any
fluid/solid interface.
4-18
Loads
4.7
Initial Conditions
Unlike boundary conditions, initial conditions are only enforced at the beginning of
an analysis. They are primarily used for transient analyses, but sometimes they are
useful for steady state analyses (temperature, in particular).
It is generally not recommended to apply a velocity initial condition to a steadystate flow analysis. Studies have shown that the best initial velocity for most
steady-state flow calculations is the default of 0.
Shown is the Initial Condition dialog (accessible by selecting the Initial tab at the
top of the Loads dialog) and instructions for its use:
Loads
4-19
Loads
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
There are six quantities that can be applied as initial conditions: Velocity, Pressure,
Temperature, Scalar, Humidity, and Steam Quality. An additional initial condition,
Height of Fluid, can be applied only to volumes. Applying a Height of Fluid condition
marks a region as containing fluid, and activates the Height of Fluid function in the
Solver. See Chapter 12 for more details about Height of Fluid analyses. Details for
the other quantities are described in the preceding Boundary Condition sections.
This Re-Initialize check box allows the user to reset a result quantity in all or part
of an analysis model. This box is accessible only after the analysis has been run at
least once.
4-20
Loads
Normally, initial conditions only take effect on a model when the analysis is first
started (either from iteration 0 or from time 0). When the Re-initialize box is
checked, however, all of the applied initial conditions will take effect again. This
allows the user to discard a result quantity on an analysis while preserving other
results fields. It also allows the user to apply an initial condition to all or part of the
model mid-run--even though some iterations have already been completed.
An example of the use of this feature is if a flow solution is run to completion, and
then the user realizes that an initial temperature condition is necessary for the subsequent transient thermal portion of the analysis. To accomplish this, simply apply
the desired temperature initial condition, check the Re-initialize box, and run the
thermal portion of the analysis. The initial condition will be applied to the model,
and the analysis will proceed.
The Re-initialize check box will be cleared automatically after the analysis is
started. This is to prevent unwanted re-initialization in subsequent re-starts of the
analysis.
4.8
Graphical Indications
Unlike most other analysis packages that use vectors or some number of symbols
to indicate the presence of a boundary condition, CFdesign uses colored stripes to
Loads
4-21
Loads
mark boundary conditions. The colors are defined in a legend that appears in the
top left corner of the Graphics Window. Shown is an example:
In this case, a white stripe on the inlet face means that a Velocity Normal is
applied. The yellow stripe on the outlet means that a pressure is applied. The green
stripes along the outer surfaces mean that a film coefficient is applied.
There is no need to memorize the meaning of the colors because they are always
defined in the legend. This legend only shows boundary condition types that have
been applied to the current model.
4-22
Loads
4.9
Feature Tree
These listings are very helpful for checking, editing, and deleting loads.
Loads
4-23
Loads
4-24
CHAPTE R 5
5.1
Mesh Sizes
Introduction
Prior to running a CFdesign analysis, the geometry has to be broken up into small,
manageable pieces called elements. The corner of each element is called a node,
and it is at each node that a calculation is performed. All together these elements
and nodes comprise the mesh (also known as the finite element mesh).
In three dimensional models, each element is a tetrahedral: a four sided, triangular-faced element. In two dimensional models, each element is a triangle. Both are
shown:
Constructing these elements into the geometry is done automatically by the software, so that step does not require any work on the part of the user. What the user
needs to do, however, is tell the software what element size(s) to use, and where
to use them. There is a lot of flexibility to this, and the following sections help to
define what sort of mesh size is required and how to apply it.
To help identify and locate problem areas in CAD geometry, CFdesign incorporates
a new Geometry Diagnostics utility into the analysis process. This function interrogates the geometry in a very detailed manner to determine the location of potential
problem areas. These areas may cause difficulty in the determination of mesh
sizes, the mesh generation, and even in the solution stability of the analysis.
One of the questions most often asked by new (and experienced) users of CAE tools
(including CFdesign), is what mesh sizes should they apply to their analysis models.
CFdesign Users Guide
5-1
Mesh Sizes
5.2
Geometry Diagnostics
The Diagnostics function searches for surfaces that are extremely thin and edges
that are extremely small relative to the rest of the model. In many cases, these
entities are caused by poor geometry creation practices, a lack of design intent, or
are the result of multiple format conversions throughout the life of the design
model.
Diagnostics is a tab on the Meshing task. The controls for each selection mode perform different actions, but all are designed to help identify problems and/or simplify
the analysis model.
5-2
Mesh Sizes
5.2.1
Suppressed parts will appear with the word Suppressed in the Mesh branch of the
feature tree.
They will also be colored light blue to differentiate them from active parts.
When parts are suppressed or resumed after mesh sizes are assigned, a recalculation of the mesh distribution will automatically occur on the modified model. If the
suppressed or resumed parts do not appreciably change the Minimum Refinement
Length, then the mesh distribution will automatically be recalculated after leaving
the Part mode of the Diagnostics tab.
If the Minimum Refinement Length is affected, then a message will come up indicating this, and the mesh distribution will not be recalculated until another task is
opened or the analysis is saved. This allows modification of the Minimum RefineCFdesign Users Guide
5-3
Mesh Sizes
Mesh Sizes
ment Length on the Edge mode. The mesh distribution can be rebuilt by opening
the Automatic tab, and clicking either the Automatic Size or Play Macro button or by
changing tasks.
5.2.2
Surface mode Diagnostics identifies potentially problematic surfaces that may lead
to meshing difficulties. Examples of such surfaces include slivers, very thin annular
surfaces, and surfaces with a cusp or tangency region.
Annulus
Sliver
5.2.2.1
Cusp
Problematic Surfaces
5-4
Mesh Sizes
5.2.2.2
Identification
Keep in mind that the principal objective of Surface Diagnostics is to locate the
smallest surfaces in the model. Such surfaces are often unintentional surfaces that
will make meshing difficult or impossible. However, there are situations in which
small surfaces are intentional, and cannot be removed. In some cases, surfaces
may be identified that are simply the smallest surface in the model, without having
any inherent flaw. In this case, they will likely be ignored by the Automatic Refinement. In other cases, very small surfaces are identified that are truly high aspectratio slivers, and will be refined automatically to ensure the successful creation of a
quality mesh.
5.2.2.3
Automatic Refinement
5-5
Mesh Sizes
Mesh Sizes
Automatic Mesh Sizing facility. This is used primarily for surfaces that fit the following criteria:
This function is fully automatic, and only affects high aspect-ratio surfaces. Its purpose is to ensure that such surfaces are meshed finely enough so that the specified
mesh sizes do not significantly exceed the dimensions of the surface. These
reduced length scales are then propagated to the surrounding entities, resulting in
a smooth transition.
After Automatic Mesh sizing has occurred, surfaces that will be automatically
refined are shaded in an olive color.
Extreme transitions have been found to have a detrimental effect on both the generation of the mesh as well as the solution accuracy.
5-6
Mesh Sizes
5.2.2.4
The Status group indicates if any problem surfaces are found. Only problem
surfaces are then displayed, and are colored orange for clarity. The Arrows
check box toggles arrows that point to
the small surfaces. (Note: the surfaces
highlighted by default are considered for
automatic refinement.) See Note 1
below.
Use the Highlight Surfaces slider to
vary the edge separation distance. Moving to the left reduces the separation
distance, and shows the smallest surfaces.
Change the displayed maximum edge
separation by keying a new value in the
Max Size field. This is useful for showing more surfaces. Restore the default
value with the Restore Default Max
button.
Save the displayed surfaces to an external text file with the Save to a Text
File button. See Note 2 below.
Add surfaces identified as problematic to
a group with the Save to a Group button.
5-7
Mesh Sizes
When the CAD model is first read into CFdesign, the geometry is scanned and problematic surfaces are identified. If found, the controls in the dialog are available to
identify and store them to a text file or group:
Mesh Sizes
Note 1: All surfaces are blanked except the problem surfaces, right clicking in the
Graphics window will redisplay all surfaces; clicking on the slider will blank all but
the problem surfaces again.
Note 2: The filename of the text file containing small surfaces is the analysis name
followed by the word surface. If the analysis name is run1, then the text file will
be run1-surface.txt.
5.2.3
Edge Mode Diagnostics locates edges that are extremely small relative to other
edges in the geometry. Variations in edge length greater than several orders of
magnitude are often indicative of a geometric problem which may cause difficulty
for the mesher. The distribution of edge length values throughout the model is also
calculated, and is then used to determine the Minimum Refinement Length as
used by the mesher.
The Minimum Refinement Length is the threshold edge size that will be allowed to
influence the mesh in neighboring features. Edges that are below this size will be
meshed, but will only have a node at each end. Such small edges are meshed with
a single small element, but that small element size will not propagate to other features in the model.
The Edge Mode dialog provides two mechanisms for dealing with extremely small
edges: Identification of small edges and Adjustment of the Minimum Refinement
Length.
5.2.3.1
When the model is first opened, all edges that are three orders of magnitude or
more smaller than the largest edge in the model are identified, and the slider can
be used to vary the highlighted size.
A default Minimum Refinement Length is automatically determined based on
relative edge lengths throughout the model. This value is shown in the Min Refinement Length field in the dialog, and is the default slider position. When the slider is
at this position, all highlighted edges fall below this value, and will only be meshed
with two nodes.
5-8
Mesh Sizes
Edges that are the current size indicated by the slider and smaller are highlighted.
If no edges are less than three orders of magnitude smaller, then the slider will be
grayed out.
5.2.3.2
The Minimum Refinement Length provides control over whether (and to what
extent) smaller length scales propagate throughout the mesh. This feature does not
remove small features, but can limit their effect upon local length and mesh scales.
5-9
Mesh Sizes
Note: If a large number of edges are smaller than the Minimum Refinement
Length, it may be necessary to reduce its value. In such cases, the Mesh
task dialog will open directly to the Edge Diagnostic panel, and many
edges will be marked with arrows. Reducing the Minimum Refinement
Length will improve the chances of successfully generating a mesh.
Mesh Sizes
As an example, the model shown has four very small edges at the corners of the
cut-out. Each edge is highlighted, and is identified with an arrow:
Edges that are shorter than the default Minimum Refinement Length are meshed
coarsely, and do not affect neighboring geometry
To increase the refinement on
small edges, and hence
INCLUDE their effect in the
model:
This will improve the mesh on very small features, but may increase the number of
nodes and elements in your analysis model. This is necessary if significant edges
fall below the default Minimum Refinement Length. In the image below, the Minimum Refinement Length is set to be smaller than the length of the four small
edges. Notice their effect on the mesh:
5-10
Mesh Sizes
Edges that are longer than the default Minimum Refinement Length are meshed
finer, and do affect neighboring geometry.
Increase the Minimum Refinement Length to a value
GREATER than the length of the
particular edge.
In the image below, the Minimum Refinement Length is set to be larger than the
small edges. The mesh distribution will be considerably more coarse. The edges will
be meshed, but will not strongly affect the mesh on surrounding geometry:
Changes to the Minimum Refinement Length affect the model globally, and are not
isolated to a particular location. Care must be taken so that the Minimum Refinement Length is not accidently made larger than other important edges elsewhere in
the model. Doing so will effectively remove their influence on the mesh, and may
lead to accuracy issues.
Note that if the Minimum Refinement Length is changed after applying Automatic
Mesh Sizing, the mesh distribution must be reapplied by clicking the Automatic Size
button. Otherwise, the new Minimum Refinement Length will not affect the mesh
distribution.
5-11
Mesh Sizes
Mesh Sizes
5.2.3.3
When the CAD model is first loaded, all edges are scanned and a Minimum Refinement Length is determined. If any edges are shorter than this length, the controls
in the dialog are active, and the edges are highlighted.
The Status group indicates that edges three
orders of magnitude smaller than the longest
edge exist with the message Potential Problems Found. The Arrows check box toggles
arrows that point to all small edges to help
locate them.
Use the Highlight Edges slider to vary the
edge length. Move to the left to reduce the
length; the far left position shows the smallest edge in the model.
Change the maximum displayed edge length
by keying a new value in the Max Size field.
This is useful for showing more edges.
Restore the default value with the Restore
Default Max button.
Save the displayed edges to an external text
file with the Save to a Text File button. The
text file containing edges will be automatically named: analysisname-edges.txt.
Add the displayed edges to a group with the
Save to a Group button.
If necessary, change the Minimum Refinement Length by either keying in a new value
or by clicking the Use Highlight Length button. The default value can be restored with
the Restore Minimum Length Scale button.
5-12
Mesh Sizes
5.3
Specifically, the Interface detects that the Automatic Size button has not been
pressed, and that no mesh sizes were assigned manually. The default Minimum
Refinement Length will be used, and all critically small surfaces will automatically
be compensated for in the mesh (using the Surface Refinement scheme described
in Surface Diagnostics).
5.4
The controls in the Automatic tab of the Mesh task dialog allow automatic mesh size
assignment, local user-controlled refinement (or coarsening), and mesh extrusion
for linear, uniform cross section parts.
The benefits to this facility are numerous:
Greatly simplified set-up of analysis models resulting in less time spent
assigning mesh sizes.
More efficient mesh distributions--the mesh is fine where required, and
coarse where it can be.
Improved solution accuracy due to better mesh quality and mesh transitions.
Improved solution robustness--good mesh transitions lead to a wellposed mathematical model.
5-13
Mesh Sizes
Mesh Sizes
Assigning mesh sizes is now a one step process (with two optional steps):
5-14
Mesh Sizes
Mesh Sizes
5-15
Mesh Sizes
The mesh distributions on each of these cases were computed automatically simply
by clicking the Automatic Size button. Note that surfaces and edges with high curvature are meshed finer, and those with little or no curvature are meshed coarser.
Edges that are close to other edges are assigned smaller element sizes which can
even vary along the span of the edge.
Note that if the Minimum Refinement Length (on the Edge Diagnostics panel) is
changed after applying Automatic Sizing, a message will prompt the user to reapply
Automatic Sizing. If Auto Sizing is not invoked again, the mesh distribution will not
be affected by the modified Minimum Refinement Length.
The cyan dots drawn on the model indicate how the actual mesh will appear on the
model. The location and spacing of the dots does not change if the Selection Mode
is changed. If there are edges in a model that do not have cyan dots, this is a sign
that the surfaces are not meshable. This is usually caused by extremely thin surfaces or some other geometric flaw. This should be corrected in the CAD model
prior to running the analysis.
After sizing is invoked, there are two optional steps available:
Select entities for refinement by switching the selection mode, and
graphically selecting them. Use the Size Adjustment slider.
Select volumes for extrusion meshing. The Extrusion controls are available only when volumes eligible for extrusion are selected.
5.5
The underlying criteria for the Automatic Mesh Sizing facility is the geometry. Mesh
is automatically concentrated in regions of high curvature and rapid size variation.
In certain situations, however, significant flow gradients in a simple geometric
region may require a finer mesh than assigned by the Facility.
An example is a volume constructed in the wake region in an aerodynamics model.
The volume is quite simple, so its automatically-defined mesh will be coarse.
5-16
Mesh Sizes
Because the flow will be quite energetic, and will have high gradients, a finer mesh
is required:
Mesh Sizes
1. Set the selection mode (Volume, Surface, or Edge), then select the desired
entities.
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 5
Step 4
Step 6
the Spread Changes button. This function recalculates the mesh distributions
throughout the model to reconcile applied
changes with the mesh on neighboring
geometry.
5-17
Mesh Sizes
5.5.1
Slider
The slider uses a parametric scale that extends between 0.2 and 5, with a default
position of 1.0. This allows the mesh size to be reduced to 1/5th or increased to as
much as 5 times the original size. To apply a value that exceeds the minimum or
maximum range, (smaller than 0.2 or larger than 5), type the scaling value into the
field to the right of the slider.
As the slider is moved, the modified distribution updates dynamically. After deciding on a desired slider position, click the Apply button. This ensures that the setting will be available in the replay Macro file (used for rebuilding the mesh
distribution and when settings are applied to modified geometry).
The Cancel button will return the slider position to 1--effectively undoing any
adjustments made to an entity after either the automatic size specification or since
the last Spread Changes command.
Note that the mesh quality constraints embedded in this system may override
adjustments that excessively coarsen the mesh. This is done to prevent a mesh
definition that will result in a poor-quality or failed mesh.
5.5.2
Spread Changes
When the Spread Changes button is pushed, all modified settings are resolved
with neighboring settings to ensure proper element transitions. The slider position
for each adjusted entity resets to 1--the middle of the slider range. This means that
5-18
Mesh Sizes
the newly assigned size becomes the default size for subsequent adjustments. Note
that the slider does not reset when the Apply button is pressed.
5.5.3
Uniform Sizing
A uniform mesh distribution can be applied to an entity by selecting it, and clicking
the Use Uniform button. This command modifies the underlying length scales
throughout the entity to be the same, based on the smallest length scale on the
object. It is not necessarily persistent, however, and subsequent changes to neighboring entities can cause the mesh to again vary. For this reason, we recommend
that Uniformity is applied after other adjustments have been made.
After the Use Uniform button is clicked, the slider will reset to 1. This allows subsequent modification of the size on the entity.
Uniformity can be removed from an entity by selecting it and clicking the Cancel
button IF this is done prior to hitting the Spread Changes button. After Spread
Changes is clicked, Uniformity cannot be removed directly from the model.
5.5.4
Play Macro
The relationship between size adjustment on entities and the recalculation of neighboring length scales when the Spread Changes button is selected is quite complex.
This makes it potentially difficult to exactly recreate a mesh distribution on a complicated model if multiple adjustments occurred.
To facilitate this process, a log file containing all size adjustment commands is
automatically recorded when Automatic Sizing is invoked. Every size adjustment
and instance of the Spread Changes button is recorded, and can be played back to
exactly reproduce a mesh distribution on a given model.
The file is first created when the Apply button is clicked after adjusting a size, and
commands are automatically appended as they are issued. When the Delete All
5-19
Mesh Sizes
In general, however, the Spread Changes button should be used sparingly because
pushing it initiates a complete recalculation of the mesh distribution. If Spread
Changes is not pressed prior to leaving the Meshing dialog, the function will be
invoked automatically when the analysis is started or when the analysis is saved.
Mesh Sizes
button is hit, the mesh distribution is removed from the model, and the Play Macro
button becomes active. Click it to re-assign the mesh distribution to the model.
Invoke the file by clicking the Play Macro button. The button is available when a
mesh distribution containing adjustments did exist, but was deleted. It is also available if the distribution is deleted, and the Automatic Size button is pressed, and will
overlay saved adjustments over the default mesh distribution.
This assigns the exact mesh distribution that was previously saved. Note that a
specific macro should only be applied to the same geometry. Applying this file to a
different geometry will lead to unexpected results.
The file is named with the analysis name with the extension .meshlog. To use a
mesh log with another analysis based on the same geometry, copy the meshlog file
to the new analysis name, and click the Play Macro button.
The macro file is stored with the analysis file, and a copy is extracted to the working
directory when the analysis is opened. If a macro file exists for that analysis, it will
be overwritten by the one extracted from the analysis file. When an analysis is
closed, the macro file in the working directory is copied into the analysis file. If
there is no macro file in the working directory, then any macro file in the analysis
file will be deleted. If the analysis is closed but not saved, the external copy of the
macro file is not packed into the analysis file.
A macro file can be deleted through the CFdesign interface in these three ways:
1. Click the Automatic Size button when the model has a distribution that
has been adjusted with the Size Adjustment slider. This resets the distribution throughout the model to the default, deleting the macro file.
2. After deleting the mesh distribution, click the Automatic Size button,
and adjust sizes. The first click of the Automatic Size button can be followed by
clicking the Play Macro button to overlay it on the model. If, however, sizes are
adjusted after hitting the Automatic Size button but prior to hitting the Play Macro
button, the macro will be removed because a new adjustment strategy is assumed.
3. After deleting the mesh distribution, click the Automatic Size button
twice. As mentioned in step 2, the first click of the Automatic Size button can be
followed by clicking the Play Macro button. If the Automatic Size button is clicked
again, however, the macro is removed.
5-20
Mesh Sizes
5.5.5
General Guidelines
Wake Regions: Illustrated above, geometry constructed in highvelocity or high-gradient regions should be refined to ensure adequate representation of the flow physics. In some models, a uniform mesh distribution is useful, especially if the default distribution has a lot of variation. Use
the Use Uniform button to apply a uniform mesh.
Motion Path: The mesh distribution in the path of a moving object
should be refined as described in the Motion Chapter of the Users Guide.
This will allow the velocity and pressure distributions to be calculated properly and prevents mesh bleed-through. A uniform mesh is often recommended for the motion path, and is prescribed using the Use Uniform
button.
Rotating Regions: A uniform mesh should be used when possible on a
rotating region. This is recommended because the default automatic sizing
5-21
Mesh Sizes
Mesh Sizes
will often cause the initial position of the impeller to influence the mesh on
the rotating region, potentially causing problems as the impeller rotates.
With a uniform mesh on the region, the mesh will not skew the results.
5.6
5.6.1
5-22
Mesh Sizes
5.6.2
Examples
Mesh Sizes
5-23
Mesh Sizes
5.6.3
Assigning Extrusion
In its most automatic form, the Extrusion capability computes both the end mesh
distribution and layer growth based on the geometry. Manual controls are also provided that enable control of layer growth, end biasing, and the number of extrusion
layers.
Available after Automatic Mesh Sizing has been invoked, select one or more volumes for extrusion, and click the Extrude Mesh button:
The Extrude Mesh button is active only when at least one volume eligible for extrusion has been selected. A set of guidelines describing extrusion eligibility are given
below.
Clicking the Extrude Mesh button opens the Extrusion dialog.
The Automatic check box controls the operation of the dialog: when it is enabled,
the Automatic Sizing controls the number of layers and the end layer sizes. When
disabled, additional controls are available.
5-24
Mesh Sizes
5.6.3.1
Automatic Enabled
5-25
Mesh Sizes
In this mode, the Automatic Sizing feature matches the layer sizes originating at
each end of the part with the length scales used in the surface mesh at each
respective end.
Mesh Sizes
5.6.3.2
Automatic Disabled
5.6.3.3
Extrusion Preview
A Preview Line is drawn through the part to indicate the layers. This is interactive,
and updates as settings in the Extrusion dialog are adjusted. While this dialog is
open, surfaces will blank on the active parts by right clicking on them to allow visibility of the preview. The Preview line below shows the extrusion for a Growth setting of 1:
5-26
Mesh Sizes
5.6.3.4
Growth
At the default growth (1.3), the layers will be approximately 30% larger in the part
center:
The amount of growth from one layer to the next can be described with this equation:
( y ) ( g ) ( x )
x = amount of growth of a layer
y = amount of growth of next layer
g = growth parameter
5-27
Mesh Sizes
The Growth slider controls the degree of layer stretching through the part. When
Automatic is enabled, the amount of acceptable growth also determines the number of layers. The growth value is a constraint which governs the maximum rate
which the element layers can grow from one element to the next. The range of this
slider is from 1.0 to 2, with a default of 1.3. At the minimum setting (1.0), the layers will be nearly the same size:
Mesh Sizes
At the maximum setting (2), the layers will be quite large relative to the ends:
When Automatic is unchecked, the number of layers is controlled with the Layers
slider. The Growth parameter behaves differently than when Automatic is enabled,
and does not represent a constraint. Growth values in the range of 20-50 are not
considered extreme in many cases.
5.6.3.5
Extrusion Direction
If multiple parts with more than one potential extrusion direction are selected,
CFdesign will automatically select the extrusion direction that is most closely
aligned with the longest dimension of the part bounding box. If the variation in part
bounding box dimensions is minimal, then the direction most closely aligned with
the maximum dimension of the assembly bounding box is used.
5-28
Mesh Sizes
The Extrusion Direction menu lists each possible direction, and the preview line
updates to correspond to the selected direction:
Mesh Sizes
5.6.3.6
End Layering
Available only when Automatic is unchecked, the End Layering menu controls the
biasing of layers through the extrusion path. When a single part is selected, the
options are:
Uniform
Small at
Small at
Small at
Large at
End
Start
Both
Both
The determination of the Start and the End of the part is based on the internal
topological direction of the part, and is not user-controllable. The Preview line
graphically indicates on which end the layers will be smaller.
When multiple parts are selected, only the Small at Both and Large at Both options
are available.
5-29
Mesh Sizes
5.6.3.7
Layers
Available only when Automatic is unchecked, the Layer slider controls the number
of extrusion layers. The slider range is between 10 and 100, but it is possible to
key-in a value as small as 2, or as large as 500.
5.6.4
The Extrusion button on the Mesh task dialog is active only when the following conditions are met:
5-30
Mesh Sizes
5.6.4.1
Uniform Cross-Section
Not Extrudable
In this example, because all three regions are in the same part, the part is not
extrudable. The pipe and channel protruding out from the box would be extrudable
if they were separate parts forming an assembly.
5.6.4.2
Linear Path
Only parts that have a linear extrusion path are eligible for extrusion. Parts that
bend, even if the cross section is uniform, are not extrudable:
Not Extrudable
5-31
Mesh Sizes
For a part to be extrudable, it must have the same cross-section in at least one
direction. If a part consists of an extrudable region connected to another region
with a different cross section, the part is not extrudable:
Mesh Sizes
5.6.4.3
Only three dimensional parts are supported by extrusion. Two dimensional surfaces
in 2D analyses must be free meshed.
5.6.4.4
No
No
Yes
The edge on the top surface of this box prevents extrusion in the two directions
marked No because the surface is not uniform in those directions. The other
direction is fine because the edge is uniform through the entire extrusion direction.
5-32
Mesh Sizes
5.6.4.5
Not Extrudable
5.6.4.6
Rotating Regions
Objects within a rotating region that have a uniform cross-section that satisfy the
requirements for mesh extrusion can be extruded. The mesh inside of the rotating
region, however, cannot be extruded because the interface between the rotating
region and the adjacent stator must be a conformal (matching) mesh.
5.6.4.7
Radiation
Extruded meshes are not compatible with radiation calculations. An error will be
issued if objects are extrusion meshed and Radiation is enabled.
5.6.4.8
Surface Parts
Surface parts cannot touch parts that are extrusion meshed. This limitation applies
to surface parts used as obstructions (solids), contact resistance, and distributed
resistances.
5-33
Mesh Sizes
The surfaces at the ends of an extrudable part must be parallel to each other. This
is an extension of the uniform cross-section rule, and explicitly applies the rule to
the ends of the volume:
Mesh Sizes
5.7
Geometric Changes
When geometry is changed in the CAD tool and launched back into an analysis or
when settings are transferred between analyses in a project, the entire model will
be Automatically Sized, and any customizations to the mesh distributions will be
applied back to the model.
This process is performed by automatically sizing the modified geometry, and then
replaying the Macro mesh file. Automatically sizing the model accounts for dimensional changes and ensures that newly introduced parts will have a mesh distribution. Replaying the macro ensures that adjustments to the mesh distribution on any
parts, surfaces, or edges are also preserved.
Additionally, when transferring settings in a project, the minimum refinement
length is adjusted proportionally based on the modified geometry and the value set
in the source analysis.
The entire process is automatic, and is designed to ensure that the mesh distribution is preserved as much as possible when modifications are made to the model.
There are three potential status messages that can occur:
Model entity map was complete. Full Macro played. This means that a complete one-to-one correspondence existed between the original and the modified
geometry. All adjustments to the original model were transferred to the modified
model.
Model entity map was partially complete. Partial macro played. This means
that the number of components differs between the original and the modified
geometries. Mesh distribution adjustments are transferred, but there are either
new parts that have the default mesh distribution or parts were removed.
Model entity map failed. Macro deleted. This means that none of the original
components were found in the model after updating the geometry. The result of
this is that the model will be auto-sized, but no size adjustments from the original
model will be transferred to the new one.
The following mesh attributes are also transferred between analyses in a project:
The Minimum Refinement Length, but may be scaled from the source
value based on the geometry modifications in the target model
5-34
Mesh Sizes
The fact that the mesh was defined using Automatic Sizing.
Extrusion data if the corresponding source surfaces can be determined.
Advanced Parameters
These define constraints that affect the behavior of the Automatic Mesh Sizing facility globally. These parameters should be used with caution as they may have a significant impact on the resulting mesh.
5.8.1
Resolution Factor
The Resolution Factor controls the relative fineness of the mesh in response to the
curvature detected on the model entities. Though this parameter has global scope,
the effects are localized to regions of high curvature. Smaller values result in a finer
mesh on model entities with curvature. Regions with no curvature are not affected
by this parameter.
The default value is 1.0, and the acceptable range is between 0.1 and 3.0. Values
outside of this range are rejected.
5-35
Mesh Sizes
5.8
Mesh Sizes
5.8.2
Local Stretching
This parameter controls the quality of the distribution computed by Automatic Sizing. It is a constraint on the rate at which point distributions may expand or contract along an edge. Smaller values cause slower variation in the distribution from
regions of high to low curvature. A value of 1.1 represents a permissible growth
rate of 10% between adjacent elements within a distribution on a model edge. A
value of 1.5 represents a growth rate of 50%.
This parameter influences distributions along individual edges as well as distributions between edges. The net effect is that controlled blending is introduced along
and across model entities.
The default Local Stretching value is 1.1, and the acceptable range is 1.01 to 2.0.
5.8.3
5.8.4
This parameter controls the minimum number of points on the longest edge in the
model. It is most relevant for geometry with no curvature such as the surrounding
box for an external flow model. This setting may be superseded by the influence of
length scales on other model edges in conjunction with how the local stretching
constraint dictates a smaller length scale. This may cause more points on the longest edge than the value specified by the Points on Longest Edge parameter.
5.8.5
5-36
Mesh Sizes
With this parameter, the user can introduce a further constraint on length scales
ensuring that they are not larger than a specified factor of the dimensions of the
surface. This can significantly enhance the robustness of the meshing operation.
Any value greater than or equal to 1 is permitted for this parameter.
5.9
5.9.1
Leaning how to create a good mesh definition can sometimes be the most intimidating part of the analysis process. It does not need to be. There are two fundamental rules that should always be considered when defining the mesh on any
model.
The first rule is that the geometric shapes must be adequately defined. It is
very important that the mesh sizes that you define on a model be such that none of
the geometric features are mis-represented. An example is the mesh definition on a
round tube. Too few elements (too large an element size) and that round tube will
be approximated as a square duct:
5-37
Mesh Sizes
nostics facility are examined to ensure that the distributions generated for the
bounding edges reflect length scales whose size is no greater than the product of
the computed separation distance and the Surface Limiting Aspect Ratio. This limiting length scale may be smaller than that derived from the local curvature, and if
so, the distributions are based on this constraint.
Mesh Sizes
5.9.2
Basic Strategy
To ensure that a mesh definition is fine enough without being so fine that computational resources are wasted, the following steps are recommended when performing any CFD analysis:
First, determine if there are any symmetries, and divide the geometry
in the CAD system as appropriate. Look for geometric symmetries, but be
sure that the flow will be symmetric as well.
Determine if the analysis can be modeled as a 2D or an axisymmetric
geometry. A 2D approximation may be a good place to start, especially if
you are unsure of how to solve a particular type of flow problem.
Examine the geometry, identifying probable high and low gradient
regions for all solution variables (u, v, w, P, T, k and ).
Identify solid material zones and fluid zones and keep them as separate
geometric entities or parts.
If there are areas with small, repeating geometric details (such as perforated plates or baffles), try using distributed resistances to model these
zones, instead of meshing the detail.
Assign mesh sizes to all volumes in the model, and then apply finer
sizes to surfaces and edges where necessary in order to capture strong flow
gradients or to represent complicated geometric features.
Perform an analysis on a coarse mesh (no more than 25,000 nodes)
to qualitatively assess the flow features present and identify meshing needs
in high gradient regions without a severe time penalty.
Looking at the results on the coarse mesh, refine the mesh in the high
gradient regions.
To ensure that the final solution is not mesh-dependent, compare the
two solutions from the coarse and fine meshes. If they are substantially different, then it is a good idea to construct a mesh that has at least 10%
fewer nodes than the fine mesh, obtain a solution and compare. The idea is
to have two meshes that vary in number of nodes by 10% or more and that
give the same solution. This solution is then said to be mesh-independent.
In any finite element analysis, more elements are required in areas where spatial
gradients of the solution variables are high. In CFD, an additional physical phenomenon called velocity-pressure coupling must also be accurately represented on the
mesh to ensure continuity of fluid mass over the entire solution domain. This distinction elicits the following two requirements:
5-38
Mesh Sizes
Many more elements must occupy the domain than in a typical structural analysis.
Transitions in element size must be relatively smooth so that the area
or volume of adjacent elements does not vary substantially.
5.9.3
This section contains information about where you should pay close attention to
your mesh definitions. The underlying theme of this discussion is that the mesh
should be fine enough to capture gradients and changes in the flow. Gradients may
be due to geometric features, boundary conditions, or distributed resistance areas.
Solid Boundaries
Spatial gradients for velocity, pressure, turbulent kinetic energy and turbulent
energy dissipation will generally be highest near a solid boundary, typically a containment wall or the surface of an immersed body. This is particularly true if the
flow is constrained by a tight clearance, forced to turn around a sharp corner or
suddenly brought to rest at a stagnation point. Accordingly, mesh density must be
greatest in these regions.
When analyzing turbulent flow, the element size adjacent to a solid boundary is
particularly important for accurate prediction of shear stress. This ultimately affects
the calculation of pressure drop across the solution domain. The k- and RNG turbulence models in CFdesign compute a non-dimensional distance from the wall, y+,
at all nodes adjacent to a solid boundary. This value is useful in determining
whether the elements adjacent to solid boundaries are sufficiently sized.
The y+ values may be viewed as a results quantity. In general, they should be kept
within the range 35<y+<350. It is impractical and unnecessary for all y+ values to
be within this range, but it is a good general guideline. This range is most critical
for flows that experience a great deal of pressure drop due to shear. Examples of
such situations are the flow through long pipes and flow over aerodynamic bodies.
5-39
Mesh Sizes
Mesh Sizes
In flows where form drag dominates the pressure drop, the y+ criteria is not nearly
as important. The use of Boundary Mesh Enhancement and Boundary Mesh
Adaptation is strongly recommended to ensure that the mesh is fine enough near
all walls of the domain.
See Section 5.3.4 for more information about Mesh Enhancement, and to learn how
CFdesign automatically takes care of the considerations discussed above.
Inlet/Outlet Passages
In general, elements should be concentrated at inlet openings to allow solution gradients to develop. In some situations (compressible flows, for example), the
regions near outlets should also have a fine mesh. If the outlet has been placed far
enough out from the solution domain, no refinement is necessary. The goal is that
the outlet should not strongly affect the solution.
Thermal Boundaries
Similar to the inlet passages, elements should be concentrated near walls with
thermal boundary conditions. Usually near these boundaries, the heat transfer rate
(which is the temperature gradient) is the highest. You should also try to concentrate nodes at the edges of these boundaries so the discontinuity in heat transfer
can be captured accurately.
Sudden Change in Boundary Conditions
The area surrounding the separation point between two boundary condition types
must have a refined mesh to adequately resolve the discontinuity. An example is
the point at the intersection of an insulated wall and a specified heat flux boundary
in a convection analysis.
Near Distributed Resistances/Porous Media Elements
Because of the extra pressure drop across distributed resistance/porous media elements, you should refine the mesh in and around these regions to resolve the
velocity and pressure gradients.
Rotating Regions
5-40
Mesh Sizes
It is good practice to concentrate the mesh on rotating regions and solids enclosed
within a rotating region. The flow gradients are typically quite high within rotating
regions, and the geometric shapes are often very intricate.
The fluid region surrounding a moving solid (and in the intended path of the solid)
are areas in which the mesh should be focused. The fluid gradients that occur as a
result of a moving solid can be quite severe, and the mesh must be fine enough to
capture them. Please see the Motion chapter of this manual for more detail about
the meshing requirements of motion analyses.
5.9.4
1. Set the Selection Mode, and select only the Surfaces or Volumes to which the
intended mesh size will be applied. (Chapter 2 contains more information about
entity selection.)
(Note: it is always good practice to assign volume sizes to ALL volumes in the
model. Use surface and edge sizes to refine the mesh as necessary.)
2. Enter the Element Size (in the length units of the analysis).
3. As mesh sizes are applied to the geometry, the approximate number of elements to be generated is shown.
This estimate updates automatically as element sizes are added, removed, and
modified. Note that the estimated mesh size is only available for manual mesh sizing.
5.9.5
Set Edge as the selection type, and select the edges in your model.
5-41
Mesh Sizes
Moving Solids
Mesh Sizes
5.9.6
Because an edge can have so many different element sizes, it is critical to know
which size will actually be used by the mesher:
The smallest size on an entity will be used by the mesher.
5.10
Graphical Indications
Once a mesh size is applied, reference points appear along all the edges of the part.
These points indicate nodal locations, once the mesh is generated. (They do not
5-42
Mesh Sizes
If Automatic Sizing was used, the reference points will appear where the nodes will
be generated, independent of the selection mode.
These listings are very helpful for checking, editing, and deleting mesh sizes. To
highlight an entity with an applied condition, left click your mouse on it--it will
appear green in the Graphics window. To edit an applied condition, right click it,
and select Edit. To delete an applied condition, right click it and select Delete.
To delete all applied mesh sizes, right click on the top-level Mesh Size branch,
and select Delete All. To disable the visibility of mesh reference points, right click
on the Mesh Size branch and un-check Show Sizes.
5.11
Mesh Enhancement
Mesh Enhancement is a powerful feature that considerably simplifies the mesh definition process. Mesh Enhancement automatically constructs layers of prismatic elements (extruded triangles) along all walls and all fluid-solid interfaces in the model,
based on the tetrahedral mesh that you define. These additional elements serve
two primary purposes:
5-43
Mesh Sizes
If sizes were assigned manually, reference points for each selection mode will
appear independently. For example, if a certain size is applied to the volumes of a
model, there will be corresponding reference points on all the curves of those volumes. If a smaller size is then applied to some of the surfaces, then when in Surface Selection mode, only the reference points for those surface definitions will
appear. Likewise, if some other size is applied to some of the edges, then when in
Edge Selection mode, only the reference points for those edge definitions will
appear.
Mesh Sizes
The first is that elements are concentrated in the boundary layer region, where high
velocity, pressure, and turbulence gradients most often occur.
The second benefit is that enough nodes are automatically placed in all gaps (area
between walls) in the model. Recall that the two principal guidelines were to define
the shapes and to allow/account for flow activity. Adequately meshing all of the
small gaps and crevices in a complicated geometry is not an issue the user must be
concerned with, thanks to Mesh Enhancement.
The graphic on the left shows a mesh without Mesh Enhancement, and the graphic
on the right shows the enhanced mesh:
Mesh Enhancement parameters are controlled with the Mesh Enhancement dialog,
launched from the Mesh Enhancement button on the Meshing dialog:
The default settings are appropriate for the vast majority of analysis models. An
explanation of the settings follows:
5-44
Mesh Sizes
5.11.1
5.11.2
The Boundary Layer Thickness Factor controls the total height of the inflation layer
relative to the original near-wall elements. A value of 0.45 allows the total height of
the inflation layer to be one half the size of the original elements. A value of 0.2, for
example, allows the total height of the inflation layer to be one fifth the size of the
original elements. This is shown in the following graphic:
Factor = 0.45
Factor = 0.2
If an error occurs during model processing due to Mesh Enhancement, it can often
be fixed by adjusting the Boundary Layer Thickness Factor. Try 0.4 and successively smaller values until it does work.
5.11.3
This feature works in conjunction with Boundary Mesh Enhancement, and is useful
for high speed aerodynamic flows where the distance between the near-wall node
and the wall-node is critical for accuracy. To use this, click on both Enhance
Boundary Mesh On Input, and Automatic Layer Adaptation. A minimum of
three Enhancement layers is required.
This feature is ideal for external flows such as vehicle aerodynamics and hydrodynamics. It is not so useful for slower speed internal flows. The way it works is that
starting at iteration 37 (after the flow has had a chance to become established), the
y+ values throughout the domain are inspected. The near wall node positions are
then moved closer or away from the walls in order to make the y+ value fall within
CFdesign Users Guide
5-45
Mesh Sizes
As mentioned, three layers is satisfactory for most analyses. However, when working with turbulent flows that are in the lower Reynolds number range (less than
10,000), it may be necessary to reduce the number of layers to one. The reason is
that the generation of three layers creates nodes that are too close to the wall,
resulting in y+ values that are too low due to the low overall Reynolds numbers.
Mesh Sizes
the optimum range for turbulent flow. The near-wall nodal positions are adjusted
with every successive iteration. There is only a slight time penalty for this adjustment scheme.
If you have run an inflated mesh analysis but did not activate Boundary Mesh Adaptation at the beginning, it can be turned on any time during the analysis. If Adaptation is activated mid-run, be sure to run the analysis for at least another 50
iterations.
5.12
Meshing by Parts
5-46
Mesh Sizes
The dialog discussed in this chapter is used only for mesh size definition on the
geometry. The generation of the mesh is part of the analysis, and is not a separate
step. When the GO button on the Analyze dialog is hit, CFdesign will construct the
mesh according to the element sizes prescribed using this dialog. If a mesh already
exists (and you are simply continuing the analysis), then a new mesh will not be
created.
To view the mesh prior to running the analysis, simply set the number of iterations
to 0, and hit GO. After the mesh is generated, the Solver will stop, and the mesh
can be examined carefully.
To help diagnose meshing problems, please consult the Analysis Guidelines chapter
of this manual.
5-47
Mesh Sizes
5.13
Mesh Sizes
5-48
CHAPTE R 6
6.1
Materials
Introduction
Materials are physical substances, and are key to the CFdesign analysis. There are
eight distinct material types available in an analysis: fluids, solids, internal fans,
centrifugal fans, resistances, check valves, rotating regions, and moving solids.
Each material type will be discussed in this chapter.
The work flow for assigning materials is very similar to the other model set-up
tasks (Loads and Mesh Definition): pick a part (volumes for three dimensional models and surfaces for two dimensional models), make selections on the dialog, and
hit Apply. Visual indication is given by coloring parts by material (a legend defines
the color-material correspondence). Also assigned materials are listed on the feature tree for additional reference.
The Material Editor makes creating and editing materials very convenient. Numerous property variations are available, allowing for great flexibility when creating
materials.
As part of the installed CFdesign package, the Material Database includes several
variations of air, water, and numerous solid materials. Additional materials can be
added to the database at the push of a button. The materials database file can be
placed anywhere in a companys network to allow easy standardization for all CFdesign users to company-specific materials.
6.2
To store a new material to the Materials Database, click the Save button in the Database group on the Materials dialog.
Materials that are not saved to the database will have a * prepended
to their names. They will be saved in the cfd file, but will not be available
for other analyses unless they are saved to the Materials Database.
6-1
Materials
6-2
Materials
6.3
6.3.1
Fluids
Assigning Fluid Materials
Step 1
Materials
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
material.
6.3.2
Several variations of air and water are included with the software. As mentioned,
6-3
Materials
these materials cannot be edited, but each can be selected as the Read From
material when creating a similar new material.
Material
Description
Air Constant
Water Constant
Air Buoyancy
H2O Buoyancy
Air Moist
Useful for humidity (moist air) calculations. These properties are only of the gas, not the gas/liquid mixture. (The
liquid properties are determined using the steam tables.)
If a new material is created based on moist air, pay special attention to the gas constant, the reference properties, and the specific heat.
H2O Steam/Liquid
Steam Buoyancy
Steam Constant
Sets the properties of steam, but does not allow for any
property variation. This is useful if the temperature and
pressure variations are small.
Ammonia
Constant
Blood
non-Newtonian
CO2
Buoyancy
CO2
Constant
Ethylene Glycol
Constant
Freon
Constant
Glycerin
Constant
Helium
Buoyancy
6-4
Materials
Helium
Constant
Hydrogen
Buoyancy
Hydrogen
Constant
Mercury
Constant
Nitrogen
Buoyancy
Nitrogen
Constant
Oxygen
Buoyancy
Oxygen
Constant
6.3.3
Step 1
Step 2
Step 4
Step 3
Step 5
Step 6
1. The Type is set on the main Materials dialog. To create or edit a fluid, select
6-5
Materials
Note that it is possible to select a similar material from the Read From drop menu.
This is a convenient starting-point for creating new materials.
6.3.3.1
Fluid Properties
The Material Editor is used to create materials different from those supplied with
the software. There are six basic properties that are needed to define a fluid. Most
of these properties can be made to vary with temperature, pressure or scalar, in
several different ways. The following table lists the properties and the available
variational methods.
Property
Variational Methods
Density:
Conductivity:
the thermal conductivity
Specific Heat
6-6
Materials
Property
Variational Methods
Compressibility
Choice of:
Cp/Cv (gamma, the ratio of specific heats) -useful only for compressible gas analyses or
Bulk Modulus -- useful only for compressible
liquid analyses. See note below about Bulk
Modulus.
Constant.
Bulk Modulus
The bulk modulus and the density of a liquid are key to determining the speed of
sound through that liquid:
Given that the speed of sound, a, is defined as: a = ------ , this works out to be:
a =
K
---
Source: White, F. M., Fluid Mechanics, McGraw Hill, New York, New York, 1986.
The bulk modulus is used only for compressible liquid (water hammer) analyses.
The value of bulk modulus is automatically set for the liquid materials included in
the Material Data Base. For user-defined materials, the correct value of bulk modulus is only required if liquid compressibility is to be analyzed. An example of a liquid
compressibility, water hammer, is described:
6-7
Materials
Materials
Water is flowing through a straight pipe at 10 in/s. At a certain time, a valve at the
end of the pipe is suddenly closed. A pressure pulse will move through the water at
the speed of sound through water. This phenomena is called a water hammer,
and is analyzed with a transient analysis to predict the movement of the pressure
wave through the water. Instead of using the Ideal Gas Law and the ratio of specific
heats to determine the sound speed, we will use the density and the bulk modulus
of the water.
Wall Roughness
Enter a physical dimension (in the units available in the drop menu) of the roughness height. Such heights are typically very small--cast iron pipes, for example,
have a typical wall roughness height of 0.0102 inches.
A value of wall roughness height specified on a fluid is automatically applied by the
Solver to the wetted walls touching that fluid. A value of wall roughness height
specified on a solid is applied to all wetted surfaces (surfaces contacting a fluid) of
the part. A non-zero wall roughness height applied to a solid will prevail over a wall
roughness applied to a fluid that touches it.
Wall roughness heights are implemented into the turbulence wall model, and do not
affect the geometry. The flow must be turbulent for wall roughness heights to take
effect. They will be ignored for laminar flows.
Specified wall roughness heights work best when closely adhered to the Turbulent
Law of the Wall. This means that the non-dimensional distance (y+) from the wall
node to its near-wall node must be between 35 and 350. The easiest way to enforce
this constraint is by checking the Automatic Layer Adaptation box on the Mesh
Enhancement dialog (found on the Meshing task). This will allow the Solver to
adjust this near wall node distance along all walls in the model, based on the local
flow conditions.
6-8
Materials
6.3.3.2
Property variation methods used for both fluid and some solid properties are
described here:
Constant
Enter the value and units as appropriate.
Materials
Power Law
T n
------ -----
o T o
enter a Reference Value (of the
property) = o ,
the Power Law Exponent = n
and a Reference Temperature (in
the Reference Properties group).
(Note: The Reference Temperature
is only used at start up to calculate an
initial reference density. The field
value of temperature is used during
the calculation to determine density.)
6-9
Materials
Equation of State
P
= ------RT
6-10
Materials
Arrhenius
E
------RT
------- = e
Materials
Sutherland
- ---T 1.5 T o + S
------------------ -
o T o
T+S
Enter a property Reference Value =
o ,
the Sutherland constant=S
and a Reference Temperature in
the Reference group)
6-11
Materials
----- = p
o
----- = k p
o
6-12
Materials
Herschel-Buckley (viscosity
variation)
= y + km
nm
Materials
---------------
2
----------------- = [ 1 + ( ) 2 ]
o
6-13
Materials
= A exp ( CT )
Enter the Viscosity factor = A,
the Shear factor = B,
and the Temperature factor = C.
= shear rate calculated during the
analysis
T = temperature calculated during the
analysis
Note: the coefficients must be entered
in SI units, regardless of the analysis
length units system.
6-14
Materials
Materials
6-15
Materials
Piecewise Linear
The Piece Wise Linear variation uses a
linear interpolation between entered
data points. Data points are entered
into the table in the same manner as
polynomial and inverse polynomial
data (see above).
Density, specific heat, and conductivity can be varied with temperature,
pressure, or scalar.
Viscosity can vary with temperature,
pressure, scalar, and strain rate.
The choice of independent variable is
made using the drop menu (showing
Temperature in the above example).
Use the Plot button to check the data.
Data in .csv format can be imported
using the Import button. Data is saved
to a .csv file using the Save button.
6.3.3.3
Reference Properties
The Reference Temperature is only used at start up to calculate an initial reference density. The field value of temperature is used during the calculation to determine density.
The Reference Pressure is used both to calculate an initial reference density and
also throughout the calculation to determine the absolute pressure. See the Technical Reference Guide for more information.
For adiabatic compressible analyses, the static temperature used to calculate density is determined from both the local stagnation and dynamic temperatures. See
the Technical Reference for a discussion of Adiabatic Compressible Flow.
6-16
Materials
6.4
6.4.1
Solids
Assigning Solid Materials
Step 1
Materials
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
6.4.2
Several solid materials are included with the software. As mentioned, these materials cannot be edited, but each can be the Read From material when creating a
CFdesign Users Guide
6-17
Materials
Material
Description
Aluminum Constant
Copper Variable
Glass Constant
Iron Constant
PCB 12 Layer X, Y,
or Z
Steel Variable
Brick
Constant
Glass Wool
Constant
Gold
Constant
Gold
Variable
Gypsum-Board
Constant
Hardwood
Constant
Lead
Constant
Magnesium
Constant
Mercury
Constant
Nickel
Constant
Particle Board
Constant
Platinum
Constant
Plywood
Constant
Polystyrene
Constant
Silicon
Constant
Silicon
Variable
Silver
Constant
6-18
Materials
Tin
Constant
Titanium
Constant
Tungsten
Constant
Wood (soft)
Constant
Zinc
Constant
6.4.3
Materials
Step 1
Step 2
Step 4
Step 3
Step 5
1. The Type is set on the main Materials dialog. To create or edit a solid, select
6-19
Materials
Note that it is possible to select a similar material from the Read From drop menu.
This is a convenient starting-point for creating new materials.
6.4.3.1
Solid Properties
The Material Editor is used to create additional materials not supplied with the software. There are four basic properties that are necessary to define a solid for use
with CFdesign. Most of these properties can vary with temperature, pressure or
scalar, in several different variational methods; these properties and methods are
listed in the following table:
Property
Variational Methods
6-20
Materials
Property
Variational Methods
Transmissivity
Two variation methods are available for transmissivity: Constant and as a Piecewise
Linear table varying with temperature. Transmissivity is a unitless parameter. The
default value is 0.
The sum of Transmissivity and Emissivity must be less than or equal to 1.
+1
If the sum of these two values exceeds 1, an error message will be displayed when
the analysis is started.
Transmissivity can only be assigned to solids. The radiation model considers fluids
to be non-participating, so it is not possible to simulate radiative heat transfer
through dark or muddy fluids.
To simulate a transparent object completely immersed within a fluid:
Model the object as a solid and mesh it (it cannot be a suppressed
part).
Assign a transmissivity value between 0 and 1 to the solid material to
allow radiation to pass through the object.
To simulate radiative heat exchange between a transparent solid and the environment, such as a window:
CFdesign Users Guide
6-21
Materials
Materials
Electrical Resistivity
The resistance per area multiplied by the length of the device. A value for resistivity
is required for any solid that is heated by the Joule effect.
rL
A
The relationship between resistivity and resistance is: R = ----------R = resistance (ohms)
r = resistivity (ohms-length unit)
L = length of the device
A = cross sectional area
For more information, please consult the Joule Heating section of the Analysis
Guidelines chapter of this manual.
6.4.3.2
Variational methods are described in the Fluid Property Variation section: 6.3.3.2.
6.5
6.5.1
Surface Parts are two dimensional surfaces incorporated into three dimensional
geometry. They are typically used to simulate very thin objects such as guide vanes
6-22
Materials
or sheet metal that the flow must pass around. They are useful because they eliminate the need to model very thin geometry with three dimensional volumes. Meshing such volumes can be very difficult and can result in very large meshes. The
reason is that an element that is small enough to represent the thickness will be so
small that a huge number of them are required across the other dimensions of the
object. By representing such objects only with surfaces, the elements only need to
be small enough to represent the shape of the object, eliminating the thickness
from the model.
6.5.2
Surface Parts can be used to conduct heat as well as obstruct flow. They will exhibit
the same heat transfer characteristics as three dimensional volumes in that they
will conduct heat in all directions. For this reason, a thickness value is required
6-23
Materials
This is shown in the following graphics. The model on the left contains a thin-walled
obstruction that is modeled as a volume. The element size needed to represent this
volume is quite small (because the part is so thin), so the element count is large
(about 158,000 elements in this example). The model on the right, however, uses a
Surface Part to represent the thin obstruction. The element size on the surface part
is not vastly different from that of the surrounding air, and the overall element
count (model size) is considerably smaller (about 38,000 elements for this example):
Materials
when defining Surface Parts. This is discussed in the Specifying Surface Parts section.
In addition to obstructions, Surface Parts can be used to simulate the contact resistance in thin layers of material between or within chip packages. Layers of epoxy or
other substances are commonly used between thermal components, and the effect
of their contact resistance must be included. A Surface Part material can be applied
to a surface that represents an epoxy layer, eliminating the need to model the substance with a thin three dimensional volume. This approach will still account for the
thermal conduction between the chip components, but will greatly simplify the
modeling process and reduce the size of the mesh (analysis model size).
The Solid Material Editor dialog allows specification of thermal conductivity or resistance. If the conductivity of the layer is known, select Conductivity in the dialog,
6-24
Materials
and enter the appropriate value. Alternatively, if the resistance is known, select
Resistance, and enter the value:
Materials
6.5.3
Rotating Machinery
6.5.4
Surface parts can be constructed in two different ways in the CAD model: as features or separate parts or by using surfaces on existing volumes. Assigning a Surface Part material in CFdesign is very easy using the Materials task dialog. This is
discussed later in this section.
6.5.4.1
Surface parts are always assigned to surfaces. In many cases, it is practical to construct floating surfaces within the three dimensional model. Some CAD tools allow
such surfaces to be separate components in an assembly. Others require that these
6-25
Materials
The surface is not part of a closed region, but if a solid material is assigned to it (as
described above), it will obstruct the flow:
6.5.4.2
6-26
Materials
When assigning Surface Parts to represent an epoxy layer in an electronic chip set,
it is not necessary to create a separate surface in the CAD model. Simply select an
appropriate surface on one of the chips, and assign a solid material to it. The thermal resistance and the physical thickness are then included in the analysis, without
having to complicate the geometry with very thin volumes or creating a huge finite
element mesh.
An example of a surface that is part of a volume is shown:
Materials
The volume is assigned a fluid material, but because the two front surfaces are
assigned a solid material, they are considered to be Surface Parts, and will obstruct
the flow:
6-27
Materials
6.5.4.3
Additional Guidelines
Surface Part
Boundary
Condition 1
Boundary
Condition 2
If such a situation is required, then the two boundary conditions should either be
the same value OR they should both be mass flow or volume flow conditions. If
other conditions are applied, there will be bleed through from one side to the
6-28
Materials
other within the Mesh Enhancement layers contacting the surface part, which will
cause unexpected results.
It is not possible to change the mesh on a model containing surface
parts and continue the analysis from a saved iteration. When the mesh is
changed, the analysis must be started back at the beginning (iteration 0).
Surface parts must not contact parts that are extrusion meshed.
6.5.4.4
The Material task dialog has been modified to include the option to select surfaces
for material assignment.
Step 1
Materials
type.
2. Select the surfaces from the model.
3. Select Solid as the Type. Select or
create a solid material.
4. Specify a Shell Thickness and select
the desired units.
5. Click Apply.
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
6.5.4.5
Shell Thickness
The Shell Thickness value is required, but is only used in the calculation of conduction heat transfer. The thickness value will not modify the geometry in any way,
and there will be no graphical representation of the thickness value.
6-29
Materials
6.5.5
The standard visualization tools in CFdesign work with Surface Parts. Cutting planes
and iso surfaces will display results caused by the presence of Surface Parts. Using
shift+ctrl, results on Surface Parts can be probed by hovering the mouse.
The displayed value of pressure on Surface Parts depends on which side of the Surface Part is viewed. The leading side of a Surface Part will show high pressure, and
the wake side will show lower pressure:
When visualizing results, Surface Parts are listed in the Feature Tree under the
Materials branch. They are listed separately from volume parts--even those with
the same material. Additionally, every Surface Part is listed twice--this is because
each surface part is duplicated within the model to allow results to vary from the
leading to the trailing side.
Surface Parts can be used as the source surfaces for non-planar cutting surfaces.
This is discussed in more detail in the Results Visualization chapter of this manual.
6-30
Materials
Wall results are assessed on Surface Parts by selecting the appropriate side of the
surface. In the example above, selecting the leading side would show a higher wall
force than selecting the drag side.
6.5.6
CAD Guidelines
Different behavior regarding the inclusion of Surface Parts as surfaces that are not
connected to volumes has been observed in several CAD tools. These guidelines are
described below.
6.5.6.1
Pro/E Wildfire
Surface Parts that are not connected (completely disjointed) must be created as
separate parts, and included as components in the assembly.
6.5.6.2
Solid Works
6.5.6.3
We have found that the most convenient way to include Surface Parts is to create a
3D part with the surface shape of the desired Surface Part. Mesh the volume as a
fluid, and assign a Surface Part material to the surface, as described in the preceding section called Surface Parts on Surfaces of Volumes.
6.5.6.4
CATIA v5
We have found that the most convenient way to include Surface Parts in CATIA
models is to create a 3D part with the surface shape of the desired shell. Mesh the
CFdesign Users Guide
6-31
Materials
Surfaces that are to be Surface Parts should be created as separate parts and
added to an assembly consisting of the surrounding flow volume part and any other
Surface Part and 3D parts. If a Surface Part is included as a quilt feature in a part,
the part may either not come into CFdesign correctly or it will incur meshing difficulties. Also, Surface Parts must not interfere, and must not cross one another.
Multiple Surface Parts can meet along an edge, however.
Materials
volume as a fluid, and assign a Surface Part material to the surface, as described in
the preceding section called Surface Parts on Surfaces of Volumes.
6.6
Resistances
In some analyses, the actual flow geometry may contain a large number of holes or
obstructions. For example, baffles are used in many electronics packages, and
often have hundreds of holes through which the air must pass. To model each and
every hole would be tedious, expensive and unnecessary.
The alternative is to simulate the presence of such holes or obstructions with a distributed resistance region. In this method, the mesh elements in this region are
assigned a resistance parameter usually using either the free area ratio (proportion
of free to total area) or a loss coefficient based on the known pressure drop. This
resistance simulates the effect of the obstructions without using an inordinate number of elements. Other examples of porous media include radiators, vents, screens,
filters and packed beds.
6-32
Materials
6.6.1
Assigning Resistances
Step 1
Step 2
the resistance. Select the two directions normal to the flow direction. See
below for further detail.
Step 3
Materials
Step 4
Step 5
There are three different methods of assigning the flow direction through a resistance region: aligned with a Cartesian direction, not aligned with a Cartesian direction, through a cylindrically shaped region.
Note: distributed resistance regions should not contact an external boundary condition. Likewise, it is not recommended to apply boundary conditions to any surface
of a distributed resistance material. Doing so may cause convergence difficulties
and will affect the flow rate reported in the summary file. If a distributed resistance
6-33
Materials
6.6.1.1
Use one of the Cartesian directions (Global X, Global Y, or Global Z) if the flow
direction through the resistance region is aligned with a Cartesian direction. Select
the remaining directions for the other two directions.
6.6.1.2
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Resistance values for the normal directions specified on the Resistance Material Editor will be used by the Solver. The following image shows flow passing through a
resistance object that is inclined at an angle to the flow. In this example, the Flow
6-34
Materials
and Normal Direction 1 resistances were set to the same value. Obviously, the values can be different if desired:
Flow Direction
Select this surface
as the normal surface
for the Flow Direction.
Normal Direction 1
The flow is turned slightly, but is not completely realigned to be normal to the resistance object.
To force the flow to be normal to a resistance (to produce a vent resistance), set
the Normal Direction resistances to be at least three orders of magnitude greater
6-35
Materials
Materials
than the Through Flow K. This will cause the flow to turn so that its direction is normal to the resistance object.
6.6.1.3
Use Radial for the Flow Direction to simulate a cylindrically-shaped resistance. The
other two directions will automatically be set to Axial and Tangential. A prompt will
come up to select a surface normal to the axial direction. The code requires this for
correct calculation of the orientation of the material object.
Flow enters axially, but
must pass through radial
resistance region
Surface normal to
axial direction
Resistance Region
(annulus)
Flow Inlet
Another application for the Radial flow direction resistance is for a bank of resistive
cylinders over which the flow must pass. In this case, the flow direction is again
6-36
Materials
Radial, and an axial direction (select a surface normal to the axis of the cylinder)
must be selected:
6.6.1.4
6-37
Materials
Materials
On the Materials task, the Resistance material type is available when Surface selection mode is invoked:
Step 1
model.
3. Change the Type to Resistance.
4. Select a resistance material from
the Name menu or click the Create/
Edit Material button to create one.
5. Specify a Shell Thickness.
6. The flow direction through a surface
part will automatically be normal to the
part, so no further directional assignments are necessary.
7. Click Apply.
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 7
Unlike volumes, Surface parts cannot be used to simulate pressure drop within the
plane of the object (secondary losses). All pressure loss will be in the direction normal to the plane, and the flow will be constrained to be normal to the surface. To
allow for secondary-direction flow through a resistance, a volume must be used for
the resistance region.
A nodal reorganization is performed during startup processing to ensure connectivity between the distributed resistance region and the surrounding mesh. This
means that it is not possible to change the mesh and continue the analysis from a
saved iteration. If the mesh is changed in a model containing a distributed resistance surface part, the analysis must be started back at the beginning (iteration 0).
6-38
Materials
Distributed resistance surface parts are very flexible, and can contact the surrounding wall on one or more edges and even be completely submerged within the fluid:
Distributed resistance surface parts can be planar or arbitrarily shaped. The flow
direction will always be locally normal to the surface part. Note that there are limitations to the shape of a surface part. Very high curvature surfaces are not suitable
6-39
Materials
It is very important that the fluid mesh between the edge of a floating resistance
surface and the neighboring wall have at least a single row of nodes between them.
If no nodes exist in this region, an error will be issued:
Materials
The recommended shapes for resistance surface parts are planes and hemispheres:
6-40
Materials
6.6.2
Step 1
Step 2
Step 4
Step5
Materials
Step 3
Step 6
Step 7
The Variation Method and Value for each component is entered separately, but it is
recommended that the same variation be used for all three components.
Creating Resistance Materials is similar to creating fluid and solid materials:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
The Type must be set to Resistance (this is set on the Main Materials dialog).
Enter a material name. Note: spaces are not permitted in material names.
Hit the button of the component to define (Properties group).
Select the Variation Method.
Enter the Value(s).
Hit the Apply button.
Hit OK when all information is entered.
6-41
Materials
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.6.2.1
u
p
------- = K i -----i x i
2
where Ki is the loss coefficient in the global i coordinate direction. Each global coordinate direction can have its own unique loss coefficient.
Loss coefficients in CFdesign are expressed without units, and are independent
of the length of the resistance in the model. The equation describing these losses is
written in terms of a pressure drop instead of a pressure gradient:
u2
p = i ----i2
Values for can be found in many fluids texts and the hydraulic resistance reference, Handbook of Hydraulic Resistance, 3rd Edition by I.E. Idelchik, published by
CRC Press, 1994 (ISBN 0-8493-9908-4).
Alternatively, this is a good method to use if measured data for pressure drop versus flow rate is available. Use the equation for Delta P shown above: substitute in
6-42
Materials
the known values of pressure and velocity to determine a value. Enter this value
for the Through-Flow K.
To input a loss coefficient, select the desired direction and choose Constant as the
Variation Method. Enter the appropriate value of (as described above) in the
Through-Flow K Value field.
Often the normal direction coefficients will be 50-100 times larger than the through
flow loss value. This simulates a flow straightener.
The Permeability value can be specified in conjunction with the Constant resistance
method as well as the Friction Factor method. This allows a resistance to be specified in the form:
2
1
= --
where is the value of permeability. The unit of permeability is the Darcy, and is
expressed in terms of length squared.
The term (in the above equation) is the standard loss coefficient.
The combined pressure drop equation is then:
2
1
V
P 1 P 2 = --- VL + -----------
2
Where:
6-43
Materials
V
P 1 P 2 = VL + -----------2
Materials
6.6.2.2
An easy way to represent a perforated plate or a baffle that has a known open
(free) area is to use a free area ratio.
The free area ratio is the ratio of the open area to the total area of an obstruction:
A open
f = ------------A total
To input a free area ratio, select the desired direction and choose Free Area Ratio
as the Variation Method. Enter the appropriate ratio in the Value field. A value of 1
indicates that the region is completely open, and the flow will encounter low resistance. The two normal directions are typically closed, so use a value of 0 to indicated a completely closed--high resistance condition.
6.6.2.3
Friction Factor
The friction factor method can be used to simulate a long length of tube or pipe. In
this method, the excess pressure drop is written as:
2
u
p
f
------- = ------- L -----i x i
DH
2
6-44
Materials
where f is the friction factor and DH is the hydraulic diameter. On the Material Editor, select the desired direction, and choose Friction Factor as the Variation
Method:
Select the friction factor calculation method: Moody or the equation f = aRe ,
where Re is the Reynolds number based on the hydraulic diameter of the pipe.
In the Moody method, the Moody formula is used to calculate the friction factor.
The obstruction Roughness height must be entered in the correct length units.
In the equation method, enter the coefficients a and b, as shown in the equation
above.
6.6.2.4
A head capacity table controls the flow rate based on the calculated pressure drop.
6-45
Materials
Enter the Hydraulic Diameter and the simulated Pipe Length (as well as the desired
units).
Materials
To input a head capacity curve, select the desired direction and choose Head
Capacity Curve as the Variation Method. Enter the pressure and flow rate values
in the following table:
Click the Insert button to create a new line between two existing lines. Use the
Import button to bring in data in Excel .csv format. Save a table of data to a
.csv file using the Save button.
A set of controls on the dialog allows the selection of the driving (independent)
variable: pressure or flow rate. For the other distributed resistance methods, the
pressure is determined as a function of the velocity. However, because in previous
versions of CFdesign, the flow rate was a function of the pressure when using the
Head Capacity curve, this toggle has been added.
By default, this toggle is set so that the pressure is a function of the flow rate (making flow rate the independent variable). This variation method is more consistent
with the other resistance variation methods, and will produce pressure drop results
that are consistent with expected values.
Analyses that are converted from previous versions of CFdesign will have this toggle set to Pressure as the independent variable when opened into CFdesign 8.0.
6-46
Materials
6.6.2.5
Permeability
A permeability can be input using the Darcy equation. Unlike loss coefficients which
have different resistance values in the three directions, a permeability provides a
constant resistance in all directions. An example is a packed bed of stones.
The governing equation for pressure drop as a function of permeability is:
p
------- = Cu i
x i
where C is the viscosity coefficient, is the viscosity (of the surrounding fluid) and
ui is the velocity in the global i coordinate direction.
1
P 1 P 2 = --- VL
6.7
Internal Fans
Internal fans simulate an axial momentum source within the interior of the geometry. Fans can have a constant flow rate, or the flow rate can vary with a headcapacity curve so that the fan operating point depends on the pressure drop
through the device.
6-47
Materials
Materials
6.7.1
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Note: internal axial fans should not be placed on an external boundary. Likewise, it
is not good practice to apply boundary conditions to any surface of an internal fan
material. Doing so may cause convergence difficulties and will affect the flow rate
reported in the summary file. If an internal fan contacts an external boundary, it is
better to either create an extension onto the fan inlet (so that the boundary condition is not applied directly to the fan) or simply use an external fan boundary condition instead of an internal fan material.
6-48
Materials
6.7.2
Thermostatic Controls
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
The average temperature on the surface is used as the sensing temperature. (Any
surface in the model can be used.) While this dialog is open, the interface allows for
the selection of a surface. Only one surface can be used as a sensing surface, so
selecting a new surface will update the selection list. The surface ID is written in the
space called Surface ID, and the surface in the model is highlighted.
6-49
Materials
Materials
6.7.3
Step 1
Step 2
Step 4
Step 5
Step 3
Step 6
Step 7
1. The Type must be set to Internal Fan/Pump (this is set on the Main Materials
dialog).
2. Enter a material name. Note: spaces are not permitted in material names.
3. Hit the button of the Property to define.
4. Select the Variation Method.
5. Enter the appropriate Value(s).
6. Click the Apply button.
7. Click OK when all information is entered.
A Fan material definition does not reference specific Cartesian components.
Instead, the Through-Flow-Rate is entered. The specific Cartesian orientation of the
fan is specified when a fan material is applied to a part.
No other fluid property information is required to define an internal fan. The Solver
automatically applies the fluid property information from the surrounding fluid to
6-50
Materials
the fan. For this reason it is very important that a fan part contact only one fluid
material type. If, for example, a fan contacts air on one side and water on the
other, an error will result, and the analysis will not run.
6.7.3.1
Flow
There are three ways to specify the flow: as a constant value, a head-capacity (PQ)
curve, or as a specified velocity profile:
Constant
Enter the Flow Rate Value and
appropriate units.
Materials
Fan Curve
Enter the Flow Rate and Pressure
into the table. This information often
comes from fan manufacturer data.
Data in .csv format can be
imported using the Import button.
Data is saved to a .csv file using
the Save button.
6-51
Materials
Velocity Profile
The table allows input of radius,
axial velocity, swirl velocity (circumferential), and radial velocity.
Enter velocity profile data in the
table. Values for Radius and Axial
Velocity are required. Values for
Swirl Velocity and Radial Velocity are
optional. Alternatively, data can be
read in from a comma-separated file
(.csv). Data can be prepared in an
Excel spreadsheet and saved to a
.csv format.
More information is given below.
In some instances, certain fans such as large industrial units deliver a non-standard
velocity distribution. When several such fans are present, the default uniform
velocity distribution provided by the internal fan material does not adequately predict the flow profiles and the interaction between the fans. This information, however, is required for a complete understanding of the overall flow distribution
throughout the enclosure.
The Velocity Profile flow variation method allows the specification of the velocity
profile for an internal fan. It provides a mechanism to apply the velocity distribution
computed from a detailed rotating region fan analysis to a simple geometric representation of that fan in a subsequent system-level analysis.
A velocity profile distribution can be computed from a separate rotating region
analysis by creating a radial line of monitor points from the center to the outer edge
6-52
Materials
of the fan. These monitor points should be created prior to running the analysis so
that a time history of velocity is generated.
Materials
y
z
x
Create the line of monitor points along a Cartesian axis, if possible. This will greatly
facilitate determining the radial position of each point. In the example shown
above, the points all have the same y and z coordinates, and the origin is at the
center of the fan. The radial position of each point is its x coordinate.
If the points are aligned along a Cartesian axis, then each velocity component will
directly correspond to a component needed for the fan profile: axial, radial, and
swirl. In the example above:
x coordinate = radius
x velocity component = radial velocity
y velocity component = swirl
z velocity component = axial
After the analysis is complete (so that the velocity values are converged on a time
averaged basis), save the velocity components for each monitor point from the
Convergence Motor table into an Excel spreadsheet, and save as a .csv file.
6-53
Materials
6.7.3.2
Rotational Speed
The rotational speed is an optional parameter, and can only be entered as a constant value.
6.7.3.3
Slip Factor
The slip factor is the ratio of the flow rotational speed to the fan blade rotational
speed. Due to inefficiencies in the fan, slip can cause the tangential velocity of the
flow to be slower than that of the fan blades. CFdesign will determine the tangential
velocity of the flow by multiplying the slip factor by the specified fan rotational
speed.
The default slip factor is 1.0. This will cause the rotational speed of the flow to be
the same as the rotational speed of the fan. The permitted range of slip factor values is between 0 and 1. Values outside of this range are not allowed by the User
Interface.
6.8
Centrifugal Pump/Blower
A complement to the axial fan device, this is a material type that changes the flow
direction from axial to radial. The user specifies a flow rate (constant or a fan
curve) as well as an optional rotational speed.
This device models the flow through the impeller of a centrifugal device, so the
volute geometry is required. Flow can also be made to enter radially/tangentially
and exit axially (as in a radial in-flow turbine).
6-54
Materials
6.8.1
Step 1
4. Select the Axis of Rotation by clicking the Axis of Rotation button. This
opens a dialog prompting for a surface
that is normal to the axis of rotation.
Select the surface, and reverse the
direction if necessary, using the right
hand rule convention.
Step 2
Step 3
Materials
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Step 7
Step 8
6-55
Materials
For a pump or blower-type device, the inlet is typically the axial surface. Care
should be taken when constructing the geometry that the inlet surface does not
touch the outlet surface.
This is shown
Surrounding
Flow Volume
Centrifugal Blower
Inlet Surface
Outlet Surfaces
Alternatively, the device may be an annulus, like a squirrel cage. In this case, the
inlet would be the interior annular surfaces, and the outlet would be the exterior
cylindrical surfaces (as shown above).
6-56
Materials
6.8.2
Step 1
Step 2
Step 4
Step 5
Step 3
Materials
Step 6
Step 7
1. The type must be set to Centrifugal Pump/Blower (this is set on the main Materials dialog).
2. Enter a material Name. (Note: no spaces.)
3. Hit the button of the Property to define.
4. Select the Variation Method.
5. Enter the appropriate Values.
6. Click the Apply button.
7. Click OK when all information is entered.
The Flow Rate and the Rotational Speed are necessary inputs. The specific direction
of flow and rotational direction are not part of the material definition. These settings are entered on the Material task dialog, making them particular to the
assigned geometry.
No other fluid property information is required to define a centrifugal pump. The
Solver automatically applies the fluid property information from the surrounding
fluid to the pump. For this reason, it is very important that a pump contact only one
fluid material type.
6-57
Materials
There are two ways to input flow rate: as a constant value or as a head-capacity
(PQ) curve.
6.8.2.1
Flow Rate
Constant
Enter the Flow Rate Value and the
appropriate units.
Fan Curve
Enter the Flow Rate and Pressure
Head data into the table. This information often comes from fan manufacturer data. Data in .csv format
can be imported using the Import
button. Data is saved to a .csv file
using the Save button.
6.8.2.2
Rotational Speed
The rotational speed is an optional parameter, and can only be entered as a constant value.
6-58
Materials
6.9
Check Valves
Check valves shut when the flow rate reaches a user-specified minimum value, and
are often used to prevent back flow. Check valves can be represented using a resistance parameter, reducing the need to model the geometry.
6.9.1
Materials
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
If Pick on Surface is selected, you will be prompted to pick a planar surface on the
part. This surface will be normal to the flow direction.
Use the Reverse button to change the flow direction.
6-59
Materials
6.9.2
Step 1
Step 4
Step 2
Step 5
Step 6
Step 3
Step 7
Creating Check Valve Materials is similar to creating fluid and solid materials:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
The Type must be set to Check Valve (this is set on the Main Materials dialog).
Enter a material name. Note: spaces are not permitted in material names.
Hit the button of the Property to define.
Select the Variation Method.
Enter the appropriate Value(s).
Click the Apply button.
Click OK when all information is entered.
A Check Valve material definition does not reference specific Cartesian components. Instead, the flow direction is specified when a check valve material is applied
to a part.
No other fluid property information is required to define a check valve. The Solver
automatically applies the fluid property information from the surrounding fluid to
the check valve material. For this reason it is very important that a check valve
material contact only one fluid material type. If, for example, a check valve contacts air on one side and water on the other, an error will result, and the analysis
will not run.
6-60
Materials
Two parameters are required to define a check valve: the Full Open K Factor and
the Cutoff Flow Rate.
The Full Open K factor is used to simulate the fact that even a wide open valve
causes loss to the flow. This value can be very small, but it is not recommended to
use a value of 0.
The Cutoff flow rate is the flow rate at which the valve begins to close.
6.10
Rotating Regions
There are numerous ways to define the rotation using a rotating region. Such
methods include a user-defined rotational speed, a driving torque, and a fluiddriven approach that spins because of the hydrodynamic (or aerodynamic) forces
imparted by the flow.
Please consult the Guidelines chapter of this Guide for more information about
Rotating Machinery analyses.
6.10.1
A new material type has been added to the Material Task Dialog: Rotating Region.
When defining a rotating region, select this type from the Type drop down of the
6-61
Materials
Part of the CFdesign Motion Module, the Rotating Region allows for the analysis of
rotating machinery such as pumps, turbines, and mixers. The rotating region is an
envelope that surrounds a spinning device. Throughout the analysis, the rotating
region rotates about its center-line, and any solids within the region will rotate as
well.
Materials
Material Task dialog. To create or edit a Rotating Region, hit the Create/Edit Material button to bring up the Material Editor.
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 5
The center of rotation will be calculated automatically based on the geometry of the
rotating region. For this reason, it is important that the rotating region and the solid
(or cut-out) rotor have the same center.
Note: Solids embedded in a rotating region should be assigned a solid material.
CFdesign will rotate such a solid because it is embedded in a rotating region.
6-62
Materials
6.10.2
Step 5
Step 1
Step 2
Step 6
Step 3
Step 4
Materials
Step 7
Step 8
1. The Type must be set to Rotating Region on the Main Materials dialog.
2. Enter a material name. Note: spaces are not permitted in material names.
3. Select the Analysis type: Known Rotational Speed, Known Driving Torque, or
Free Spinning.
4. Click the Property button to define.
5. Select the Variation Method.
6. Enter the appropriate Values.
7. Click the Apply button.
8. Click OK when all information is entered to close the dialog.
The parameters that define a Rotating Region are based on the type of analysis to
be run. There are three different scenarios: Known Rotational Speed, Known Driving Torque, and Free Spinning. The type is selected from the drop menu as
described in Step 3, above.
6-63
Materials
6.10.2.1
6-64
Materials
6.10.2.2
Materials
6-65
Materials
6.10.2.3
In this case, the rotor starts with no rotational speed, and will spin up based on the
applied fluid loading. Specify the inertia of
the mechanical components and the rotor.
The steady rotational speed will occur when
the net hydraulic torque is zero.
If the device is free spinning, but a known
resistive torque exists:
Torque,
2. Apply the resistive torque as a negative
value.
This will cause the device to spin up due to
the surrounding flow, and will find a steady
rotational speed when the net hydraulic
torque is zero.
6.11
6.11.1
Introduction
A new material type, Compact Thermal Model, has been added that allows the
simulation of integrated circuits using a two resistor compact thermal model. Compact models provide a geometrically simple way to simulate the performance of
electronic components using a resistor network.
This modeling method uses very simple geometry to represent a very complicated
device. A more rigorous method uses the entire geometry of the device, and is
often referred to as a detailed model. Detailed models typically produce the highest degree of accuracy, but due to their complexity, require a large mesh and hence
require long analysis times.
The following chip configurations are supported by this type of modeling:
6-66
Materials
Note that vertical chips such as the TO200 are not supported by this model. It is
recommended to model such chips using a detailed model.
Theta jc
Junction
Theta jb
Board
In the two resistor compact model, heat transfer is only computed at the three
nodes (case, junction, and board). The sides of a two resistor compact model are
considered adiabatic. Only the case and board sides allow heat transfer to their surroundings. The case and board sides of the device are isothermal, and are modeled
with a high conductivity in the in-plane direction.
Note that the two resistor compact model is a simplified representation of an actual
device, and the literature indicates that they are typically accurate to about 1030%. This model is a simplification, but one that is acceptable for many designlevel what if analyses.
6-67
Materials
The typical two resistor compact thermal model consists of just three nodes: the
junction, the case, and the board. The junction is also referred to as the die or the
chip. The case is the top surface of the package, and is where a heat sink may be
mounted to the package. The board node is a single point of contact between the
board and the package. The nodes are connected by a thermal resistance between
the case and junction (Theta jc), and a resistance between the junction and the
board (Theta jb). The resistor network is shown:
Case
Materials
The resultant quantities of a two resistor compact model analysis are the temperatures at the board, junction, and case. In addition, the heat flux to the case and the
board are provided.
Unlike a detailed component model, the two resistor compact model is modeled as
a simple six-sided shape. The device must contact a PCB part, and a heat sink may
be attached to the case side of the component.
An example is shown:
Compact Thermal
Model Component
PCB
Heat loading on a two resistor compact model is typically applied as a total heat
generation boundary condition. Note that a transient heat generation condition can
be applied, but because the specific heat and density of the component are not
included in the material definition, a time-accurate solution will not be available.
Because the heat transfer computation is only performed on the three nodes of the
network, a finite element mesh is not constructed through the device. The outside
surfaces are meshed to provide connectivity between the two resistor device and
the surrounding geometry.
6-68
Materials
6.11.2
Step 2
Materials
Step 1
Step 3
board side
PCB
6-69
Materials
An error is given if a 2-Resistor Electronic Material does not contact a PCB material
(or a solid material with PCB in its name) when the user leaves the Materials task
dialog.
6.11.3
Only two parameters are required to define a two resistor Compact Thermal Model
on the Material Editor: the resistance between the junction and the board Theta
JB and theresistance between the junction and the case, Theta JC.
Step 1
Step 2
Step 4
Step 5
Step 3
Step 6
1. Select Compact Thermal Model as the Type on the Material Task dialog.
2. Enter a name for the material in the Name field on the Material Editor. (Spaces
are not allowed for material names.)
3. Click either the Theta JB or Theta JC button.
4. Enter a value and appropriate units. (Note that the only available variation
method is Constant.)
5. Click Apply.
6. After specifying both values, click OK to close the dialog.
Values for the resistances (Theta JB and Theta JC) can often be obtained from the
component manufacturers specifications.
6-70
Materials
6.11.4
For visualization purposes, the device is divided into two regions--the junction and
the case. Each region of the component has its own temperature which is governed
by the resistance values and the surrounding conditions. A single rectangular element comprises each layer, and is shown:
Materials
Board Temperature
Junction Temperature
Case Temperature
Heat transfer between the junction and the board
Heat transfer between the junction and the case
6-71
Materials
Left click on the component name in the Materials branch of the feature
tree. This will show a pop-up window on the component listing the data:
6.12
Printed circuit boards (PCB) are used in a wide variety of electronics applications.
Because PCBs play an important role in the temperature and heat flux distribution
within a device, it is important to accurately represent their thermal characteristics
accurately.
6-72
Materials
PCBs are typically constructed of multiple layers of copper foil and a dielectric
material (a glass-reinforced polymer called FR4):
Component Trace
20% Copper
thickness, t = 0.07 mm
Component Planes
95% Copper
thickness, t = 0.035 mm
Component Trace
20% Copper
thickness, t = 0.07 mm
Dielectric layers
t k C
i
k in plane =
i-------------------------------=1
N
i=1
k normal =
i=1
---------------------N
ti
k------------C
i
i=1
A new material type, Printed Circuit Board, has been added to the Materials dialog
of the CFdesign interface. The PCB is represented as a simple geometric volume
(even though physically PCBs can be quite complicated). The geometric physical
specifications of the PCB such as the layer thickness and the amount of metal per
6-73
Materials
Materials
layer are specified as material attributes, and the effective conductivities are then
computed automatically and applied to the geometry throughout the analysis.
This material type provides a convenient way to include the thermal effects of a
PCB in a simple, homogeneous geometry without having to include the geometric
details of the various layers, traces, and planes:
6-74
Materials
6.12.1
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Materials
Step 4
6.12.2
1. Specify the Total PCB Thickness. In this step, the total physical thickness of the
circuit board is specified.
6-75
Materials
2. Define the trace layers. In this step, the solid material that makes up the traces
is selected from the Solid Material library. This material is typically copper, and is
available by default in the Solid Material library. Additionally, the thickness and percentage of metal of each layer are specified.
3. Define the dielectric material. The solid material that makes up the dielectric is
selected from the Solid Material database. This material is listed in the Solid Material database under the name: PCB_Plastic_for_Laminate
Each step is described in detail below:
Step 2
Step 3
Step 1
6-76
Materials
Step 2
Step 4
Step 1
Step 3
Step 6
Step 7
all of the solid materials stored in the material database. Copper is the most commonly used material for PCB trace layers. If a material that has variable properties
is selected, a median value will be used for the PCB material. This property value
will be constant throughout the analysis.
Note: To use a material that is not in the list, close this dialog, and switch to Solid
Materials on the Material task dialog. Create the desired solid material using the
Solid Material Editor. This material will then be available on the PCB Material dropdown menu.
3. Enter a line for each layer, and specify the thickness and the percent metal content. For example, if the 35% of the layer is copper, enter 35 in the % Metal
column.
4. Add additional rows by clicking the Insert button; remove rows with the Delete
button.
6-77
Materials
Step 5
Materials
Import button. Likewise, input data can be saved to a .csv file by clicking the
Save button.
6. The Coverage Exponent is a weighting function used to account for the effect of
the configuration and concentration of copper within the board on the in-plane conductance. The default value is 2. A value of 1 is most applicable for strips or grids;
a value of 2 is applicable for spots or islands.
7. Click Apply to save the values and to activate them with the equivalent properties calculation.
Step 3: Dielectric
The dielectric layer is typically a glass-reinforced polymer that gives the PCB its
rigidity, and surrounds the copper layers. In this step, the solid material that makes
up the dielectric layer is selected from the Solid Material database:
Step 2
Step 3
Step 1
Step 4
menu lists all of the solid materials stored in the material database. FR4 is the most
commonly used material for PCB trace layers.
If a material that has variable properties is selected, only the value for the x-direction conductivity will be used for the PCB dielectric material. This property value will
6-78
Materials
6.13
Graphical Indications
Parts are colored by their applied materials. The legend in the upper left corner
defines the color for each material. All parts with the same material are colored the
same except for parts contained within rotating regions. Parts that are enclosed
within rotating regions will be colored differently from other parts of the same
material.
6.14
Feature Tree
All applied materials are listed on the feature tree. These listings are for informational and for view attribute control only. All material definition is controlled
through the task dialog:
6-79
Materials
These listings are very helpful for checking materials and for changing the visibility
of materials. To highlight all parts of a material, left click on the material name
branch--the parts will highlight in the Graphics window. To change the appearance
of materials and parts, right click on either a material or a part branch; the part
can be displayed in Outline mode or as Transparent. In the Results task, further
visibility choices are available on the Materials branch and sub-branches of the feature tree.
6-80
CHAPTE R 7
7.1
Motion
Introduction
The CFdesign Motion Module provides the ability to analyze the interaction between
solid objects in motion and the surrounding fluid. The effect of the motion on the
fluid medium as well as the flow-induced forces on the object can both be analyzed
efficiently and quickly.
The Motion Module was first introduced in CFdesign version 7, with the introduction
of user-prescribed Linear motion. Since then, six motion types have been added,
resulting in support for seven varieties of motion:
Linear
Angular
Combined Linear/Angular
Combined Orbital/Rotational
Nutating
Sliding Vane
Free Motion
For all but two of the motion types, movement is either prescribed using input
parameters or is driven by the flow. (Sliding Vane is user-prescribed only, and Free
Motion is flow-driven only.) Each motion type is defined by specifying only the
applicable properties and directions, but does not require definition of all six
degrees of freedom. The displacement, velocity, or location of objects in motion is
either explicitly prescribed by the user or is driven by the forces imparted from the
surrounding flow. In the case of the latter, externally applied driving and resistive
forces (such as springs) can be defined that influence the motion of the object.
A new task dialog just for Motion has been added to the CFdesign interface. This
was done to reduce the complexity of the Materials task. However, as in Materials,
color coding of objects with motion and Feature Tree listings allows easy identification of applied settings.
7-1
Motion
7.2
7.2.1
Guidelines
Basic Process
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Note that a moving solid cannot pass through more than one fluid type.
7-2
Motion
The following topics are discussed in the Guidelines chapter of this manual:
Geometry
Meshing
Surface Parts in Motion
Solid Motion Solution Strategy
Radiation for Moving Parts
Time Step Determination
Continuing after making changes
7.2.2
Previewing Motion
The path of motion is verified prior to the analysis by clicking the Preview button.
The Preview function is available as soon as the motion is defined, and can be used
prior to clicking the Apply button on the task dialog. To preview the motion of all
defined moving solids in a model, click the Preview button when no parts are
selected.
The Preview button will bring up the dialog shown below:
7.2.3
In many devices, two or more objects that are driven by the flow are physically
connected in some manner so that their motions are related. Examples include
Hydraulic rams that slide linearly together through multiple cylinders
Gears in a gear pump rotate in opposite directions at the same rotational speed
7-3
Motion
Use the slider bar to step the object through the defined path to ensure that the
specified parameters satisfy the analysis intent. The time span is given based on
the defined motion. A pseudo-time span is used for flow-driven motion so that the
defined path can be examined.
Motion
Because of a mechanical linkage between the object, the motion of one is dependent on the motion of the others.
To link the motion of two or more objects, use the Group functionality available in
the Feature Tree. Add the parts whose motions are to be linked. When creating the
group, select Motion as the type on the Group Creation dialog:
Grouping is only applicable to flow-driven motions that are assigned the same
motion type. If a linear and an angular motion are grouped together, for example,
the linking is not possible, and will hence be ignored.
The linking functionality depends on the direction(s) of motion for the relevant
parts being fully defined. Objects with linked motions can move in different directions or even rotate in opposite directions. In the case of a gear pump, for example,
the two gears rotate in opposite directions from one another. Assign the directions
for both objects as appropriate, and add the two motions to the same group. As the
flow moves them, they will move with the same rotational velocity, but in the
assigned directions.
Note: objects with linked motions do not have to physically touch one another in
the CFdesign analysis.
7.2.4
Visual Dominance
When visualizing results for some motion analyses, the moving solid will appear
behind another part as it is animated through it. This other volume is often the
7-4
Motion
flow volume, so this situation makes it very difficult to see the moving part. An
example of this is shown:
A new visualization setting has been introduced in v9 that causes moving solids to
appear over non-moving solids. This allows a clear view of the moving solid and the
flow surrounding it:
7-5
Motion
Enabled by default for Moving Solids, the setting is controlled through the Materials
branch of the feature tree when displaying results:
Motion
7.3
7.3.1
Linear Motion
Description
Linear motion is the motion of a solid in a straight line. Examples include a piston
moving in a cylinder, a hydraulic ram in a chamber, and objects on a conveyor belt
moving through a curing process. The linear motion of solids can be fully prescribed, or it can be driven by the flow. If flow-driven, additional parameters are
required including the bounds of motion and relevant resistive or driving forces.
Examples of flow-driven linear motion include the above items, as well as the simulation of valves opening and closing.
7.3.2
7-6
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Motion
7.3.2.1
Direction Vector
This sets the direction of travel of the object. The pull-down menu contains the
three Cartesian directions: Global X, Global Y, and Global Z, Key-in Location,
as well as a Pick option. If Pick is chosen, a dialog will prompt for the graphical
selection of a surface normal to the direction of motion. Only planar surfaces may
be selected.
Y
Direction of Travel
An arrow will indicate the direction of travel; click the Reverse button to switch the
direction.
The specified direction of travel is the reference direction, and all directional-dependent parameters are relative to it. Specified positive displacements will move the
object in the reference direction. Negative displacements will move the object in
the opposite direction.
7.3.2.2
Initial Position
This slider is used to modify the initial position of the object from the as-built location in the CAD model. This is very useful for fine-tuning the model if the position of
the object in the CAD is different from the true starting position.
The positive direction of adjustment is in the Direction of Travel. Use the slider to
move the object in the Direction of Travel in both the positive and negative directions.
7-7
Motion
Flow-driven parameters such as driving forces and resistive forces reference this
direction as well. Positive values of a driving force will act in the direction of the
Direction Vector; negative values will act in the opposite direction. In contrast, positive resistance forces will act in the opposite direction of the Direction Vector; negative resistance forces will act in same direction as the Direction Vector.
Motion
7.3.2.3
Use the Minimum and Maximum pull-down menus to set the bounds of motion for
flow-driven motion. (This is only required (and available) for flow-driven motion.)
The choices available for each menu are: Unbounded, Key-In Location, and Slider.
Unbounded does not stop the object from moving along its path.
Key-In Location brings up a dialog for the input of a distance the
object can travel. For example, if 1.5 inches is entered as a minimum value,
then the object can not go beyond 1.5 inches in the negative direction of
travel. This distance is relative to the initial position of the object.
Slider brings up a dialog and a graphical plane normal to the direction
of travel. Use the slider to position the plane at the desired boundary. All
locations are relative to the initial position.
The Min and Max boundaries can be specified using different methods.
Note that the bounds are relative to the initial position specified with the Initial
Position Slider.
7.3.3
In this section, methods to define linear motion are described. When an object
moves according to a fully-prescribed linear motion, it does not react to the flow.
7-8
Motion
The object will move in the direction and across distances that are explicitly specified.
Step 1
Step 3
Step 4
Step 2
Step 5
Step 6
7-9
Motion
1. On the Motion task dialog, set the Type to Linear, and be sure Flow-Driven is
unchecked.
2. The only property for user-prescribed linear motion is the Distance.
3. Select the Variation Method (described below).
4. Enter the appropriate values.
5. Click the Apply button.
6. Click OK when all information is entered to close the dialog.
Motion
7.3.3.1
Reciprocating
This method causes the object to oscillate
linearly along a prescribed distance, in a
specified time.
The Half Period Time is the time it takes
the object to move from the start position
to the end of the stroke.
The Distance is the length of the stroke.
Start
End
Distance
Table
The Distance is relative to the Initial Position prescribed on the Motion task Dialog.
Enter Distance and Time data into the
table.
The Cyclical box defines the motion by
repeating only forward passes through the
distance table.
The Reciprocating box defines the motion
by alternating forward and reverse passes
through the distance table.
7.3.4
In this section, methods to describe objects in motion that respond to the surrounding fluid flow are described. The motion of such objects is influenced by the
flow as well as user specified driving and resistive forces. The origins of such forces
7-10
Motion
do not have to be included in the analysis model--the forces act on the object in a
user-prescribed manner to either push the object in its prevailing direction or to
impede its progress.
In several places in this section, the Direction Vector of the object is referenced.
This is the direction specified on the Motion task dialog. Because the true direction
of flow-driven motion is not always known prior to the analysis, this direction is
really the Reference Positive Direction. Directions of driving and resistance forces
are then relative to this direction.
Flow-driven objects may start off moving at a known velocity, and either speed up
or slow down based on their interaction with the surrounding fluid (and applied
forces).
Step 1
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 2
Motion
Step 6
1. On the Motion task dialog, set the Type to Linear, and be sure Flow-Driven is
checked.
2. Three properties are available, but entries are not required: Initial Velocity,
Driving Force, and Resistive Force.
3. For each property, select the Variation Method...
4. ...and enter the appropriate values, as necessary. The Variation Methods are
described below.
5. Click the Apply button.
6. Click OK when all information is entered to close the dialog.
7-11
Motion
7.3.4.1
Constant
If the object is in motion at the beginning
of the calculation (and not starting from a
dead-stop), the initial velocity should be
specified. The object will travel at this
velocity at the on-set of the calculation,
and will react to the flow forces appropriately.
7.3.4.2
Driving forces are forces that are positive when acting in the direction of motion
specified on the Motion task dialog. A negative driving force will act in the opposite
direction.
Examples of driving forces include electromagnetic and other body forces as well as
forces imposed by objects omitted from the analysis geometry. The force will act in
the same direction as the direction of motion (as specified on the Motion task dialog).
F
Direction Vector:
(Reference Direction)
A driving force can be used to represent the force of gravity on an object by specifying the weight of the object as the driving force, if gravity is acting in the direction of travel.
7-12
Motion
Constant
Enter a constant force value to apply an
unchanging force to the object throughout
the entire analysis.
Table
If a driving force is to vary with time,
enter the time history as a table of driving
force and time.
7.3.4.3
Motion
Applied resistive forces affect the motion of the object by acting against its specified direction of travel, impeding its progress. A positive value of a resistive force
acts in the opposite direction of travel; a negative value acts in the direction of
travel.
CFdesign Users Guide
7-13
Motion
F
Direction Vector:
(Reference Direction)
A resistive force can be used to represent the force of gravity on an object by specifying the weight of the object as the resistive force, if gravity is acting opposite the
direction of travel.
Constant
Enter a constant force value to apply an
unchanging resistive force to the object
throughout the entire analysis.
7-14
Motion
Table
If a resistive force is to vary with time,
enter the time history as a table of resistive force and time.
As with all table entries, the values can be
retrieved from an Excel .csv file or likewise saved to one.
Spring
Four parameters are required to specify a
spring:
Motion
7-15
Motion
Recall that the Direction Vector specified for flow-induced motion is the reference
positive direction. Depending on the flow, the true direction of the object may
change. However the Direction Vector specified on the Motion task dialog is really a
Reference Direction for the signs of applied forces and displacements.
Because springs are typically a resistive force, a positive spring force will act in the
direction opposite of travel of the objects reference direction; a negative spring
force acts in the reference direction.
Likewise, a positive displacement is in the reference direction; a negative displacement value is opposite to the reference direction.
Note that all spring displacements are relative to the initial position defined using
the Initial Position slider on the Motion task dialog.
The following diagrams describe setting up several scenarios involving springs.
If the object is not touching the spring at time = 0, then the configuration may
appear as:
Starting Point
Engagement
spring
Displacement
Compression
Displacement
spring
7-16
Reference
Direction
Direction of
Spring Force
Motion
If the object is touching the spring at time=0, then the engagement displacement is
0:
spring
Starting Point
spring
Compression
Displacement
Reference
Direction
Direction of
Spring Force
spring
Reference
Direction
spring
Direction of
Spring Force
Motion
Engagement
Displacement
Spring forces are negative because they act in the Reference Direction.
7-17
Motion
If the object has to travel in a direction opposite of its Reference Direction to contact a spring, then the displacements should be applied as negative values:
Starting Point
spring
spring
Engagement
Displacement
Compression
Displacement
Reference
Direction
Direction of
Spring Force
F compression F engagement
------------------------------------------------------------- = K
D compression D engagement
7.4
7.4.1
Angular Motion
Description
Angular motion is the rotation of an object about a centerline. Examples of applications that should be solved with this functionality are positive displacement pumps
(such as gear pumps and trichodal pumps), check or reed valves, and other devices
with an angular movement. Unlike rotating regions (applied as a material type in
the Materials task dialog), objects with an angular motion can have paths that
7-18
Motion
Motion
Assign Angular Motion to devices that move fluid (liquid or gas) using a volume displacement or that simply move through fluid. Conversely, surround a rotating
7-19
Motion
device with a rotating region that moves fluid through an energy transfer. Such
devices rely on the Coriolis effect and centripetal acceleration.
Rotating regions will produce a more accurate answer, and typically require less
computational resources. Moving solids (specified angular motion) are more versatile, and can solve a wider variety of applications.
The following table lists several devices, and how the rotational motion should be
specified:
7-20
Pump
Rotating Region
Turbine
Rotating Region
Compressor
Rotating Region
Fan
Rotating Region
Blower
Rotating Region
Gear Pump
Angular Motion
Positive-Displacement Pump
Angular Motion
Cammed Lobes
Angular Motion
Egg-beater
Angular Motion
Check Valve
Angular Motion
Motion
7.4.2
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Motion
7.4.2.1
Axis of Rotation
The rotational direction about the axis of rotation is determined by the right hand
rule. Click the Reverse button to reverse the direction of rotation.
The pull-down menu contains the three Cartesian directions: Global X, Global Y,
Global Z, Key-in Location, and Pick.
If Pick is chosen, a dialog will prompt for the graphical selection of a surface normal
to the axis of rotation. (Only planar surfaces may be selected.) The object will
7-21
Motion
rotate about the specified axis that passes through the Center of Rotation (discussed in the next section).
Global Z is the desired axis of rotation, and
the direction is positive.
X
Z
7.4.2.2
Center of Rotation
The center of rotation is the point through which the axis of rotation passes. There
are two ways to specify it: as the centroid of a selected surface or by keying-in
coordinates. Select the desired method from the Center of Rotation pull-down
menu.
Centroid of Surface: The axis of rotation will pass through the centroid of the selected surface. If the axis does not pass through the centroid,
specify an offset distance and direction:
Select surface to
set centroid as
center of rotation
Axis of rotation
7-22
y
x
a
Axis of rotation
Motion
7.4.2.3
Initial Position
This slider is used to modify the initial angular position of the object from the asbuilt location in the CAD model. This is very useful for fine-tuning the model in case
the initial position of the object in the model is not quite correct.
The positive direction of adjustment is in the direction defined by the Axis of Rotation. Use the slider to rotate the object about the axis of rotation in both the positive and negative directions.
7.4.2.4
Use the Minimum and Maximum pull-down menus to set the bounds of rotation for
flow-driven angular motion. (This is only required (and available) for flow-driven
rotation.) The choices available for each menu are: Unbounded and Key-In Location.
Unbounded does not stop the object from moving along its path.
Key-In Location allows specification of an angular limit. Multiple revolutions can be defined by entering the total angular sweep that is permitted.
Note that the bounds are relative to the initial position specified with the Initial
Position Slider.
7-23
Motion
Motion
7.4.3
In this section, methods to define angular motion are described. When an object
moves according to a fully-prescribed angular motion, it does not react to the flow.
The object will rotate in the specified direction at the prescribed angular velocity.
Step 1
Step 3
Step 4
Step 2
Step 5
Step 6
1. On the Motion task dialog, set the Type to Angular, and be sure Flow-Driven
is unchecked.
2. The only property for user-prescribed angular motion is the Angle through
which the object will sweep.
3. Select the Variation Method (described below).
4. Enter the appropriate values.
5. Click the Apply button.
6. Click OK when all information is entered to close the dialog.
7-24
Motion
7.4.3.1
Constant
Enter the angular speed at which the
object will rotate throughout the analysis.
The units pull-down menu allows selection
of either radians per second or RPM.
Oscillating
This method causes the object to oscillate
angularly through a prescribed angle, in a
specified time.
Motion
Angular
Displacement
Start
7-25
Motion
Table
The table allows for specification of an
angular position at specific times.
The angle is relative to the Initial Position
prescribed on the Motion task dialog.
Enter Angle and Time data into the table.
The Cyclical box defines the motion by
repeating only forward sweeps through the
angle table.
The Reciprocating box defines the motion
by alternating forward and reverse sweeps
through the angle table.
7.4.4
In this section, methods to define rotating objects that respond to the surrounding
fluid flow are described. The motion of such objects is influenced by the flow as well
as user-specified driving and resistive torques. The origins of such torques do not
have to be included in the analysis model--they act on the object in a user-prescribed manner to either accelerate the rotation of the object or to slow it down.
In several places in this section, the direction of rotation of the object is referenced. This is the rotational direction specified as part of the axis of rotation on the
Motion task dialog. Because the true rotational direction of flow-driven motion is
not always known prior to the analysis, this direction is really the reference positive
direction. Directions of driving and resistance forces are then relative to this direction.
7-26
Motion
Flow-driven objects may start off rotating at a known velocity, and either speed up
or slow down based on their interaction with the surrounding fluid (and applied
forces).
Step 1
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 2
Step6
7-27
Motion
1. On the Motion task dialog, set the Type to Angular, and be sure Flow-Driven
is checked.
2. Three properties are available for specification, but entries are not required:
Initial Angular Velocity, Driving Torque, and Resistive Torque.
3. For each property, select the Variation Method...
4. ...and enter the appropriate values, as necessary. The Variation Methods are
described below.
5. Click the Apply button.
6. Click OK when all information is entered to close the dialog.
Motion
7.4.4.1
Constant
If the object is rotating at the beginning of
the calculation (and not starting from a
dead-stop), the initial velocity can be
specified.
The object will rotate at this velocity at the
on-set of the calculation, and will react to
the flow forces appropriately.
7.4.4.2
A driving torque is positive when applied in the reference direction of motion (as
specified on the Motion task dialog). A negative driving torque will act in the opposite direction.
Examples of driving torque include electromagnetic and other body torque as well
as torque imposed by objects omitted from the analysis geometry. The torque will
act in the same direction as the direction of motion (as specified on the Motion task
dialog).
Driving Torque
Direction of Rotation
(as defined on the
Motion task dialog)
A driving torque can be used to represent the force of gravity on an object if gravity
is acting in the direction of travel. Specify a driving torque that is the product of the
weight of the object and the length of the moment arm connecting the centroid to
the center of rotation.
7-28
Motion
Constant
Enter a constant torque value to apply an
unchanging torque to the object throughout the entire analysis.
Table
If a driving torque is to vary with time,
enter the time history as a table of driving
torque and time.
7.4.4.3
Motion
Applied resistive torque affects the rotation of the object by acting against its specified rotational direction, impeding its progress. A positive value of a resistive
torque acts in the opposite direction of rotation; a negative value acts in the direction of rotation.
CFdesign Users Guide
7-29
Motion
A resistive torque can be used to represent the force of gravity on an object if gravity is acting opposite the direction of travel. Specify a resistive torque that is the
product of the weight of the object and the length of the moment arm connecting
the centroid to the center of rotation.
Constant
Enter a constant torque value to apply an
unchanging resistive torque to the object
throughout the entire analysis.
7-30
Motion
Table
If a resistive torque is to vary with time,
enter the time history as a table of resistive torque and time.
As with all table entries, the values can be
retrieved from an Excel .csv file or likewise saved to one.
Spring
Four parameters are required to specify a
torsional spring:
Motion
7-31
Motion
change. Note, however that the signs of applied torque and angular displacement
values are defined by this rotational direction.
Because torsion springs are considered a resistive force, a spring force with a positive value will act in the direction opposite to the objects reference rotational direction (it is impeding the forward progress of the object, therefore it is a resistance).
Likewise, a negative spring torque acts in the objects reference rotational direction. (The spring is aiding the forward progress of the object, and is hence acting
not as a resistance but as a driver, so its sign is negative).
A positive spring angle is in the reference direction; a negative angle value is opposite to the reference direction.
The following diagrams describe setting up several scenarios involving torsional
springs.
Note that all specified displacements will act relative to the initial position specified
with the Initial Position slider on the Motion task dialog.
If the object is not touching the spring at time = 0, then the configuration may
appear as:
Reference
Rotational
Direction
Engagement
Angle
Compression
Angle
Direction of
Spring Torque
Reference
Rotational
Direction
Engagement
Angle = 0
Compression
Angle
Direction of
Spring Torque
7-32
Motion
If at time = 0 the spring is fully compressed by the object, then the compression
angle is zero, and the engagement angle is the angle to where the spring is no
longer compressed:
Starting Point
Compression
Angle = 0
Engagement
Angle
Reference
Rotational
Direction
Direction of
Spring Torque
If the flow is such that the object rotates in an angle opposite of its reference angle
to contact the spring, then the engagement and compression angles should be
applied as negative values:
Engagement
Angle
Compression
Angle
Reference
Rotational
Direction
Direction of
Spring Torque
The relationship between the required parameters and the spring constant is given
as:
T compression T engagement
------------------------------------------------------------ = K
compression engagement
7-33
Motion
Note that only one torsional spring is allowed on a moving part. Because of this,
multiple torsional springs acting in different directions cannot be applied to the
same part.
Motion
7.5
7.5.1
In Combined Linear/Angular motion, the object translates linearly along the path
specified on the Motion task dialog. The instantaneous linear position of the object
is determined either by user-specification or as a result of flow-induced forces.
As the object translates, it will also rotate about a user-specified axis. The direction
of rotation is either determined by the user or is a result of flow-induced forces. For
flow-induced rotation, developed torque is used to compute angular accelerations.
If both motions are flow induced, it is assumed that the two motions are uncoupled
and work independently. The linear translation equations update the center of rotation over time and the rotation equations update the directional cosines over time,
thus yielding a combined motion.
The location of the axis of rotation is determined by the translation of the object.
Conversely, the direction of translation is not affected by the rotation. (This kind of
motion is implemented using the Sliding Vane motion type, described later in this
chapter.)
Examples of combined motion include an object sliding along a path and rotating
about its center axis. The center of rotation is translating with the object:
Direction of Translation
Time A
Time A+1
7-34
Motion
7.5.2
7.5.2.1
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Step 7
Motion
Direction Vector
This sets the direction of travel of the object. The pull-down menu contains the
three Cartesian directions: Global X, Global Y, and Global Z, Key-in Location,
as well as a Pick option. If Pick is chosen, a dialog will prompt for the graphical
CFdesign Users Guide
7-35
Motion
selection of a surface normal to the direction of motion. Only planar surfaces may
be selected.
Y
Direction of Travel
An arrow will indicate the direction of travel; click the Reverse button to switch the
direction.
The specified direction of travel is the reference direction, and all directional-dependent parameters are relative to it. Specified positive displacements will move the
object in the reference direction. Negative displacements will move the object in
the opposite direction.
Flow-driven parameters such as driving forces and resistive forces reference this
direction as well. Positive values of a driving force will act in the direction of the
Direction Vector; negative values will act in the opposite direction. In contrast, positive resistance forces will act in the opposite direction of the Direction Vector; negative resistance forces will act in same direction as the Direction Vector.
Initial Position
This slider is used to modify the initial position of the object from the as-built location in the CAD model. This is very useful for fine-tuning the model if the position of
the object in the CAD is different from the true starting position.
The positive direction of adjustment is in the Direction of Travel. Use the slider to
move the object in the Direction of Travel in both the positive and negative directions.
7-36
Motion
7.5.2.2
The rotational direction about the axis of rotation is determined by the right hand
rule. Click the Reverse button to reverse the direction of rotation.
The pull-down menu contains the three Cartesian directions: Global X, Global Y,
Global Z, Key-in Location, and Pick.
If Pick is chosen, a dialog will prompt for the graphical selection of a surface normal
to the axis of rotation. (Only planar surfaces may be selected.) The object will
7-37
Motion
Axis of Rotation
Motion
rotate about the specified axis that passes through the Center of Rotation (discussed in the next section).
Y
X
Z
Center of Rotation
The center of rotation is the point through which the axis of rotation passes. There
are two ways to specify it: as the centroid of a selected surface or by keying-in
coordinates. Select the desired method from the Center of Rotation pull-down
menu.
Centroid of Surface: The axis of rotation will pass through the centroid of the selected surface. If the axis does not pass through the centroid,
specify an offset distance and direction:
Select surface to
set centroid as
center of rotation
Axis of rotation
y
x
a
Axis of rotation
7-38
Motion
Initial Position
This slider is used to modify the initial position of the object from the as-built location in the CAD model. This is very useful for fine-tuning the model if the angular
position of the object in the CAD model is different from the true starting position.
The positive direction of adjustment is the positive Direction of Rotation. Use the
slider to rotate the object about the axis of rotation in both the positive and negative directions.
7.5.3
The two elements of Combined motion, Linear and Angular, are defined independently as User-prescribed or Flow-driven. The Flow-Driven check boxes on the
Motion task dialog govern how each element is defined on the Material Editor. The
possible combinations of user-prescribed and flow-driven are listed:
User-Linear/User-Angular
Flow-Linear/User-Angular
User-Linear/Flow-Angular
Flow-Linear/Flow-Angular
7-39
Motion
Note that the bounds are relative to the initial position specified with the Initial
Position Slider.
Motion
7.5.3.1
In this section, methods to prescribe linear and angular motions are described.
When an object moves according to a fully-prescribed motion, it does not react to
the flow. The object will move and rotate only in the specified directions, across distances that are explicitly specified, and at prescribed angular velocities.
If one of the two motion elements is to be user-prescribed, then only that one will
be defined using the User-prescribed properties (as shown below). The other will be
defined using the Flow-Driven properties (as shown in the next section).
The Material Editor for User-Prescribed-Linear/User-Prescribed-Angular is shown:
Step 1
Step 3
Step 4
Step 2
Step 5
1. On the Motion task dialog, set the Type to Combined Linear/Angular. (If
Flow-Driven is unchecked for both types of motion, then both types will be Userprescribed.)
2. Click the Distance property button for Linear Properties.
3. Select the Variation Method for Distance.
4. Enter the appropriate values.
5. Hit Apply.
7-40
Motion
Step 7
Step 8
Step 6
Step 9
Step 10
6. Click the Angle property button for Angular Properties. (This defines the angle
through which the object will sweep.)
7. Select the Variation Method for Angle.
8. Enter the appropriate values.
9. Hit Apply.
10. Hit OK when all information is entered to close the dialog.
7.5.3.2
Linear
Motion
Distance
Linear
Motion
Distance
Angular
Angle
Reciprocating
Please see section 7.3.3.1 for a detailed description.
Table
Please see section 7.3.3.1 for a detailed description.
Motion
Constant
Please see section 7.4.3.1 for a detailed description.
7-41
Motion
The following table lists the variation methods for User-Prescribed properties for
Linear and Angular motion. More details and illustrations for both types of motions
are contained in the preceding Linear and Angular sections, respectively.
Motion
Angular
Angle
Motion
Oscillating
Please see section 7.4.3.1 for a detailed description.
Angular
Angle
Motion
Table
Please see section 7.4.3.1 for a detailed description.
7.5.3.3
In this section, methods to describe objects in linear and angular motion that
respond to the surrounding fluid flow are described. The motion of such objects is
influenced by the flow as well as user-specified driving and resistive forces and
torque. The origins of such forces do not have to be included in the analysis model-they act on the object in a user-prescribed manner to either accelerate the object
in its direction and angle travel or to slow it down.
In several places in this section, the Direction Vector and the Direction of Rotation of the object are referenced. These are the directions specified on the Motion
task dialog. Because the true direction of flow-driven motion is not always known
prior to the analysis, this direction is really the Reference Positive Direction. Directions of driving and resistance forces are then relative to this direction.
Flow-driven objects may start off moving at a known velocity, and either speed up
or slow down based on their interaction with the surrounding fluid (and applied
forces).
The Material Editor for Flow-Driven-Linear/Flow-Driven-Angular is shown:
Step 1
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 2
7-42
Motion
1. On the Motion task dialog, set the Type to Combined Linear/Angular. (If
Flow-Driven is checked for both types of motion, then both types will be flowdriven.)
2. Define each of the Linear properties by first clicking on the desired property
button: Initial Velocity, Driving Force, and Resistive Force. (It is not required
to specify any or all of the properties.)
3. For each property, select the Variation Method.
4. Enter the appropriate values, as necessary
5. Hit the Apply button.
Step 7
Step 8
Step 9
Step 6
Step 10
button: Initial Angular Velocity, Driving Torque, and Resistive Torque. (It is
not required to specify any or all of the properties.)
7. For each property, select the Variation Method.
8. Enter the appropriate values, as necessary.
9. Hit the Apply button.
10. Hit OK when all information is entered to close the dialog.
7-43
Motion
6. Define each of the Angular properties by first clicking on the desired property
Motion
7.5.3.4
Linear
Motion
Initial
Velocity
Constant
Linear
Motion
Driving
Force
Constant
Linear
Motion
Driving
Force
Table
Linear
Motion
Resistive
Force
Constant
Linear
Motion
Resistive
Force
Table
Linear
Motion
Resistive
Force
Spring
Angular
Initial
Angular
Velocity
Constant
Driving
Torque
Constant
Driving
Torque
Table
Resistive
Torque
Constant
Resistive
Torque
Table
Resistive
Torque
Spring
Motion
Angular
Motion
Angular
Motion
Angular
Motion
Angular
Motion
Angular
Motion
7-44
Motion
7.6
7.6.1
Time = a
Time = a+2
Motion
Time = a+1
7-45
Motion
The combined rotation and orbital motion is shown below (in this graphic the rotation and orbital speeds are the same).
Time = a+1
Time = a
Time = a+2
The orbital speed is often slower than the primary rotational speed, however.
A typical application for Combined Orbital/Rotational motion is a pump shaft with
an eccentric orbit (or whirl) component. The shaft rotates about its centerline, but
also has an eccentric rotation about an additional axis. By specifying an orbit on an
object, it is possible to understand the force imbalance imparted on bearings and
other fixtures as a result of a shaft orbit.
Rotation Direction
Center of Rotation
Orbital Direction
Center of Orbit
Both motions can be either user-prescribed or flow-driven. If the orbit is flowdriven, then the forces acting on the moving object are summed and appropriate
accelerations are computed. Velocities and displacements are limited to the circular
orbital path using the following relationships.
7-46
Motion
7.6.2
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Step 7
Motion
The parameters required for the Orbital and the Rotation definition are specified in
the same manner as angular motion. Descriptions of these parameters are discussed in Sections 7.4.2.1 through 7.4.2.4 of the Angular Motion section of this
chapter.
7-47
Motion
7.6.3
The two elements of Orbital motion, the rotation and the orbit, are defined independently as User-Prescribed or Flow-Driven. The Flow-Driven check boxes on the
Motion task dialog govern how each element is defined on the Material Editor. The
possible combinations of user-prescribed and flow-driven are listed:
7.6.3.1
In this section, methods to prescribe both angular motions (the orbit and the rotation) are described. When an object moves according to a fully-prescribed motion,
it does not react to the flow. The object will orbit and rotate only about the specified
axes, and at prescribed angular velocities.
If one of the two motion elements is to be user-prescribed, then only that one will
be defined using the User-Prescribed properties (as shown below). The other will be
defined using the Flow-Driven properties (as shown in the next section).
7-48
Motion
Step 1
Step 3
Step 4
Step 2
Step 6
Step 5
Step 7
1. On the Motion task dialog, set the Type to Combined Orbital/Rotational. (If
7.6.3.2
Since both elements in an orbital motion are angular rotations, both use the same
angular property variations described earlier in this chapter. The following table
7-49
Motion
Flow-Driven is unchecked for both types of motion, then both types will be Userprescribed.)
2. Click the Angle property button for Orbital Properties.
3. Select the Variation Method for Orbit.
4. Enter the appropriate values.
5. Hit Apply.
6. Repeat for the Angular Rotation property.
7. Hit OK when finished to close the dialog.
Motion
lists these variation methods for User-Prescribed Orbital motion, and lists where to
find more details and illustrations about each.
Angle
Constant
Please see section 7.4.3.1 for a detailed description.
Angle
Oscillating
Please see section 7.4.3.1 for a detailed description.
Angle
Table
Please see section 7.4.3.1 for a detailed description.
7.6.3.3
In this section, methods to describe orbital and angular motions that respond to the
surrounding fluid flow are described. The motion of such objects is influenced by
the flow as well as user-specified driving and resistive forces and torque. The origins of such forces do not have to be included in the analysis model--they act on
the object in a user-prescribed manner to either accelerate the object or to slow it
down.
In several places in this section, the Direction of Rotation of the object are referenced. These are the directions specified on the Motion task dialog. Because the
true rotational direction of flow-driven motion is not always known prior to the
analysis, this direction is really the Reference Positive Direction. Directions of driving and resistance forces are then relative to this direction.
7-50
Motion
Step 1
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 2
Step 6
Step 7
1. On the Motion task dialog, set the Type to Orbital. (If Flow-Driven is
Note that forces (instead of torques) are used to describe the Orbital motion. This is
done because the orbit is really a displacement motion, so force, displacements,
and velocities are more applicable than torque and angular displacements, and
angular velocities. The relationship between torque and force for the orbit is
expressed in terms of the eccentricity radius (eps):
7-51
Motion
checked for Orbital and Angular, then both types will be flow-driven.)
2. Define each of the Orbital properties by first clicking on the desired property
button: Initial Angular Velocity, Driving Force, and Resistive Force. (It is not
required to specify any or all of the properties.)
3. For each property, select the Variation Method.
4. Enter the appropriate values, as necessary.
5. Hit the Apply button.
6. Repeat for the Rotation properties.
7. Hit OK when all information is entered to close the dialog.
Motion
7.6.3.4
The orbital motion element uses forces, and the angular rotation element uses
torque. The following table lists these variation methods for Flow-Driven Orbital
motion, and lists where to find more details and illustrations about each:
Initial Angular
Velocity
Constant
Driving Force
Constant
(Orbital)
Driving Force
Table
(Orbital)
Resistive Force
Constant
(Orbital)
Resistive Force
Table
(Orbital)
Driving Torque
Constant
Table
Please see section 7.4.4.2 for a detailed description.
Resistive Torque
Constant
Please see section 7.4.4.3 for a detailed description.
Resistive Torque
Table
Please see section 7.4.4.3 for a detailed description.
Note: Springs are not available for either motion element in combined orbital/rotational motion.
7-52
Motion
7.7
7.7.1
Nutating Motion
Description
Nutation is a type of motion used in several types of liquid flow meters. A nutating
object is inclined at an angle to a reference axis. As the normal vector of the object
rotates about the reference axis, the angle between the normal vector and the reference axis remains constant. The result is that the object actually wobbles about
the reference axis, but does not change angular position relative to it. A coin wobbling along its edge as it slows from a spin is a good example of nutating motion.
Center of Nutation
Motion
The image above describes nutating motion. The three quantities that are defined
through the User Interface are the Tilt Axis, the Axis of Nutation (Nutating Axis),
and the Center of Nutation. The Tilt axis is normal to the disk, and rotates about
the Nutating axis through the Nutating Angle. The Nutating Axis is typically a global
Cartesian axis, but is not required to be one. The Center of Nutation is typically the
center of the disk. This point is often constructed at the origin or some other easily
defined point. The other quantities shown in the graphic above are determined
automatically, and do not require explicit definition.
7-53
Motion
The series of images below show a nutating disk. The disk wobbles about its axis,
but it does not actually rotate. The angular position of the slot in the disk does not
change throughout the nutation.
7-54
Motion
7.7.2
nutate.
2. Select Nutating as the type of motion
from the Type pull-down menu.
3. Indicate if the motion is to be flowdriven by checking the Flow-Driven box.
4. Click the Create/Edit Motion button.
This brings up either the Motion Editor for
User Prescribed or for Flow-Driven. The
parameters of the motion are entered on
this dialog. These parameters are
described in the next sections.
5. Specify the Nutating Motion Parameters: Tilt Axis, Axis of Nutation, Center of
Nutation, Initial Position, and Minimum
And Maximum bounds (for flow-driven
only). These parameters are not available
until a Motion is created in the Motion Editor. The parameters are described below.
6. Click Apply.
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Motion
7.7.2.1
Step 1
Tilt Axis
The tilt axis is the axis normal to the disk. As the disk nutates, this is the axis that
is pinned at the Center of Nutation and rotates about the Axis of Nutation. There
are several choices for selecting the Tilt Axis: Global X, Global Y, Global Z, KeyIn, and Pick. If Pick is chosen a dialog will appear prompting for selection of a surface normal to the intended axis.
7-55
Motion
The absolute orientation of the tilt axis will change as the object nutates, but the
orientation relative to the object will remain constant. The direction of this axis
determines the direction of Nutation according the right hand rule convention.
7.7.2.2
Axis of Nutation
The Axis of Nutation is the axis that remains constant throughout the nutation process. This axis is selected using any of the following options: Global X, Global Y,
Global Z, Key-In, and Pick. Because this axis does not move, it is often convenient to construct the model such that a Cartesian axis is the Axis of Nutation. This
allows easy specification of the axis. The Axis of Nutation is shown:
y
x
z
7-56
Motion
7.7.2.3
Center of Nutation
The Center of Nutation is the center point of the nutating object. There are two
ways to specify this: by Keying In the coordinates or as the centroid of a selected
surface. The center point is the center of motion, and is typically the center of the
object. Because of this, it is often convenient to construct the CAD model such that
the center of the nutating object is at a known coordinate. In the example shown
below, the Center of Nutation is actually the origin (0,0,0), which made defining it
very easy:
Initial Position
This slider is used to modify the initial angular position of the object from the asbuilt location in the CAD model. This is very useful for fine-tuning the model in case
the initial position of the object in the model is not quite correct.
The positive direction of adjustment is in the direction defined by the Axis of Nutating. Use the slider to rotate the object about the axis of nutation in both the positive and negative directions.
7.7.2.5
Use the Minimum and Maximum pull-down menus to set the bounds of rotation for
flow-driven nutating motion. (This is only required (and available) for flow-driven
nutating.) The choices available for each menu are: Unbounded and Key-In Location.
CFdesign Users Guide
7-57
Motion
7.7.2.4
Motion
Unbounded does not stop the object from moving along its path.
Key-In Location allows specification of an angular limit. Multiple revolutions can be defined by entering the total angular sweep that is permitted.
7.7.3
In this section, methods to define nutating motion are described. When an object
moves according to a fully-prescribed nutating motion, it does not react to the flow.
The object will nutate in the specified direction at the prescribed nutation velocity.
Step 1
Step 3
Step 4
Step 2
Step 5
Step 6
1. On the Motion task dialog, set the Type to Nutating, and be sure Flow-Driven
is unchecked.
2. The only property is the Nutating Angle through which the object will sweep.
3. Select the Variation Method (described below).
4. Enter the appropriate values.
5. Hit the Apply button.
6. Hit OK when all information is entered to close the dialog.
7-58
Motion
7.7.3.1
Table
The table allows for specification of a
Nutation Angle position at specific times.
The angle is relative to the Initial Position
prescribed on the Motion task dialog.
Enter Nutation Angle and Time data into
the table.
Motion
7.7.4
In this section, methods to define nutation that responds to the surrounding fluid
flow are described. The motion of such objects is influenced by the flow as well as
user-specified driving and resistive torques. The origins of such torques do not have
to be included in the analysis model--they act on the object in a user-prescribed
manner to either accelerate the object or to slow it down.
7-59
Motion
In several places in this section, the direction of nutation of the object is referenced. This is the nutation direction determined by the direction of the Tilt Axis or
the Axis of Nutation (as defined on the Motion task dialog.) Because the true nutation direction of flow-driven motion is not always known prior to the analysis, this
direction is really the reference positive direction. Directions of driving and resistance forces are then relative to this direction.
Flow-driven objects may start off with an initial nutation velocity, and either speed
up or slow down based on their interaction with the surrounding fluid (and applied
forces).
Step 1
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 2
Step 6
1. On the Motion task dialog, set the Type to Nutating, and be sure Flow-Driven
is checked.
2. Three properties are available for specification, but entries are not required:
Initial Nutation Velocity, Driving Torque, and Resistive Torque.
3. For each property, select the Variation Method...
4. ...and enter the appropriate values, as necessary. The Variation Methods are
described below.
5. Hit the Apply button.
6. Hit OK when all information is entered to close the dialog.
7-60
Motion
7.7.4.1
Constant
The object will nutate at this velocity at
the on-set of the calculation, and will react
to the flow forces appropriately.
If the object starts from rest, leave this
value specified as 0.
7.7.4.2
A driving torque is positive when applied in the reference direction of motion (as
applied on the Motion task dialog). A negative driving force will act in the opposite
direction.
Examples of driving torque include electromagnetic and other body torques as well
as torque imposed by objects omitted from the analysis geometry. The torque will
act in the same direction as the direction of motion (as specified on the Motion task
dialog).
Constant
Enter a constant torque value to apply an
unchanging torque to the object throughout the entire analysis.
Motion
7-61
Motion
Table
A driving torque that varies with time is
specified using the table of torque vs.
time.
As with all table entries, the values can be
retrieved from an Excel .csv file or likewise saved to one.
7.7.4.3
Applied resistive torque affects the nutation of the object by acting against its specified nutation direction, impeding its progress. A positive value of a resistive torque
acts in the opposite direction of nutation; a negative value acts in the direction of
nutation.
Constant
Enter a constant torque value to apply an
unchanging resistive torque to the object
throughout the entire motion.
7-62
Motion
Table
If a resistive torque is to vary with time,
enter the time history as a table of torque
and time.
As with all table entries, the values can be
retrieved from an Excel .csv file or likewise saved to one.
7.8
7.8.1
The most common application of this type of motion is found in sliding-vane positive displacement pumps. Vanes or pistons rotate about the center-line of the
7-63
Motion
Motion
impeller, but translate radially. The direction of linear travel changes at every angular position. The axis of rotation, however, remains constant. This is shown:
Direction of
translation changes
based on angular position.
Sliding vane motion is specified only as a user-prescribed motion. Flow-driven sliding vane motion is not currently supported.
7-64
Motion
7.8.2
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Motion
7.8.2.1
Direction Vector
This sets the direction of travel of the object. The pull-down menu contains the
three Cartesian directions: Global X, Global Y, and Global Z, Key-in Location,
as well as a Pick option. If Pick is chosen, a dialog will prompt for the graphical
7-65
Motion
selection of a surface normal to the direction of motion. Only planar surfaces may
be selected.
Y
Direction of Travel
An arrow will indicate the direction of travel; click the Reverse button to switch the
direction.
The specified direction of travel is the reference direction, and all directional-dependent parameters are relative to it. Specified positive displacements will move the
object in the reference direction. Negative displacements will move the object in
the opposite direction.
Initial Position
This slider is used to modify the initial position of the object from the as-built location in the CAD model. This is very useful for fine-tuning the model if the position of
the object in the CAD model is different from the true starting position.
The positive direction of adjustment is in the Direction of Travel. Use the slider to
move the object in the Direction of Travel in both the positive and negative directions.
7.8.2.2
Axis of Rotation
The rotational direction about this axis is determined by the right hand rule. Click
the Reverse button to reverse the direction of rotation.
The pull-down menu contains the three Cartesian directions: Global X, Global Y,
Global Z, Key-In Location, and Pick.
7-66
Motion
If Pick is chosen, a dialog will prompt for the graphical selection of a surface normal
to the axis of rotation. (Only planar surfaces may be selected.) The object will
rotate about the specified axis that passes through the Center of Rotation (discussed in the next section).
Y
X
Z
Center of Rotation
The center of rotation is the point through which the axis of rotation passes. There
are two ways to specify it: as the centroid of a selected surface or by keying-in
coordinates. Select the desired method from the Center of Rotation pull-down
menu.
Select surface to
set centroid as
center of rotation
Axis of rotation
y
x
Axis of rotation
a
Offset from Centroid: x = -a
7-67
Motion
Centroid of Surface: The axis of rotation will pass through the centroid of the selected surface. If the axis does not pass through the centroid,
specify an offset distance and direction:
Motion
Initial Position
This slider is used to modify the initial position of the object from the as-built location in the CAD model. This is very useful for fine-tuning the model if the angular
position of the object in the CAD model is different from the true starting position.
The positive direction of adjustment is the positive Direction of Rotation. Use the
slider to rotate the object about the axis of rotation in both the positive and negative directions.
7.8.3
In this section, methods to specify the linear and angular components of Sliding
Vane motion are described. When an object moves according to a fully-prescribed
motion, it does not react to the flow. The object will move and rotate only in the
specified directions, across distances that are explicitly specified, and at prescribed
angular velocities.
The Linear properties on the Sliding Vane Material Editor are shown:
Step 3
Step 1
Step 4
Step 2
Step 5
Motion
Step 7
Step 8
Step 6
Step 9
Step 10
6. Click the Angle property button for Angular Properties. (This defines the angle
Motion
7-69
Motion
7.8.4
The following table lists the variation methods for the linear and angular components of Sliding Vane motion. More details and illustrations for both types of
motions are contained in the preceding Linear and Angular sections, respectively.
Linear
Motion
Distance
Linear
Motion
Distance
Angular
Angle
Reciprocating
Please see section 7.3.3.1 for a detailed description.
Table
Please see section 7.3.3.1 for a detailed description.
Constant
Please see section 7.4.3.1 for a detailed description.
Motion
Angular
Angle
Oscillating
Please see section 7.4.3.1 for a detailed description.
Motion
Angular
Angle
Table
Please see section 7.4.3.1 for a detailed description.
Motion
7.9
7.9.1
Free Motion
Description
A general motion type, Free Motion, has been added to CFdesign v9. Unlike the
other motion types (linear, angular, combined, etc.), Free Motion allows for motion
in any direction. This is the most flexible of the motion types, and can be used to
simulate the unconstrained (or partially constrained) movement of objects within
an active flow field.
The motion is always flow driven, and is defined by enabling or disabling any of the
six degrees of freedom. Limits can be defined for each degree of freedom, but collisions with walls, static and other moving solids are automatically detected.
7-70
Motion
Bounce
Glance
Spin
More details about collisions are presented at the end of this section.
CFdesign Users Guide
7-71
Motion
7.9.2
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
7.9.2.1
By default, objects in free motion can move in any direction. Each of the six
degrees of freedom is enabled by default, indicating that the object is free to move
7-72
Motion
in that direction or rotate about that axis. Unchecking a degree of freedom prevents
motion in that direction (or about that axis).
For two-dimensional models, the Z translation, X and Y rotations are inactive
because motion in these directions is not possible for models oriented in the xy
plane.
Translation
By default, objects in free motion are free to move in the X, Y, and Z directions.
Unchecking a translation degree of freedom will prevent the object from moving in
that direction.
Limits of travel are set for each degree of freedom by clicking the Set Bounds button. This will bring up a dialog that allows for specification of the minimum and
maximum limits of travel:
The choices for the minimum and maximum limits are Unbounded, Key-In, and
Slider:
The Min and Max boundaries can be specified using different methods.
7-73
Motion
Unbounded: the object can move without limit in the direction. This is
the default for all degrees of freedom.
Key-In Location: A dialog will appear for the input of a distance the
object can travel. For example, if 1.5 inches is entered as a minimum value,
then the object cannot go beyond 1.5 inches in the negative direction of
travel. This distance is relative to the initial position of the object.
Slider brings up a dialog and a graphical plane normal to the direction
of travel. Use the slider to position the plane at the desired boundary. All
locations are relative to the initial position.
Motion
Rotation
By default, objects in free motion are free to rotate about the three Cartesian axes.
Unchecking a rotation degree of freedom will prevent rotation about that particular
axis.
Limits of rotation can be set for each degree of freedom by clicking the Set Bound
button. The choices for the minimum and maximum are Unbounded and Key-In
value:
Unbounded causes the object to rotate about the axis without a limit.
Key-In Location allows specification of an angular limit. Multiple revolutions can be defined by entering the total angular sweep (in degrees) that
is permitted.
7.9.2.2
Applied Force
This set of controls provides a way to specify an optional force acting on the object.
There are three basic parameters required to specify a force on an object in free
motion: The force direction, the force magnitude, and the location of force application on the object.
1. Force Direction
The direction of force is specified by either selecting a Cartesian direction, keying-in
a direction vector, or by selecting a surface that is normal to the force direction.
Additionally, the force vector can be constant or vary with position of the object.
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
1. Select the direction or method of specification. Change the direction with the
+/- button if necessary. If Key-In is selected, a dialog will prompt for a unit vec-
7-74
Motion
tor. If Pick is selected, a dialog will prompt for selection of a surface on the object.
This surface is normal to the applied force.
2. The force direction is shown in the field below the direction menu. This is an
editable field, so the unit vector can be modified directly in this field.
3. The force direction can either be a Constant Vector with respect to the
ground, or can Vary By Orientation relative to the ground (while remaining constant with respect to the object).
If Constant Vector is selected, the direction of force will not change
even as the object orientation changes. The force direction remains constant, even if the object rotates about an axis. This is shown:
If Vary by Orientation is selected, the direction of force will vary relative to the coordinate system, but will remain constant relative to the
object. This is the recommended way to apply a constant torque to an
object in motion. This is shown:
7-75
Motion
Motion
2. Force Magnitude
The magnitude of the applied force can either be constant or vary with time.
Step 1
Step 1
Step 2
Step 2
Step 3
Step 3
click the Define button. This will open a dialog allowing specification of a piece wise
linear table between force and time.
3. Select the units of force in the third menu.
3. Location
The final step is to specify the location of the applied force on the object. There are
two methods: select the Centroid of a Surface or by Key-In Location:
7-76
Motion
When Centroid of Surface is selected, a dialog will prompt to pick a surface on the
moving part:
Select a planar surface on the part. The point of application will be the centroid of
the selected surface. Offset the location of force from the centroid by entering the
x, y, and z components of the distance in the Offset group of the dialog. Click OK to
close the dialog.
When Key-In Location is selected, a dialog will prompt to enter the coordinates of
the point of force application:
7.9.2.3
Gravity
The Gravity tab allows for specification of a gravitational acceleration to act on the
object. On the Gravity tab, check the Earth box to indicate that the object is subjected to the Earths gravitational pull. Enter a unit vector to indicate the direction
of the gravitational force:
7-77
Motion
This point must be on or in the moving object. A specified point of application that
does not contact the object in its initial location will cause the force to not act on
the object throughout the analysis.
Motion
To define a gravitational pull that is different from that of Earth, uncheck the Earth
box, and enter the gravitational acceleration in the appropriate direction. The units
of this value will be in terms of the analysis length unit.
7.9.3
Most of the parameters governing free motion are defined directly on the Motion
Task dialog. The exception are the initial linear and angular velocity components.
These values are assigned on the Motion Editor, which is accessible by clicking the
Edit Motion Properties button:
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 1
Step 5
By default objects in free motion start from rest. To define a free motion state that
has an initial velocity or rotation:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Select the velocity or angular velocity component from the Properties list.
The variation method for all initial velocity values is Constant.
Enter the appropriate value and select the units.
Click the Apply button.
Click the OK button to close the dialog.
7.9.4
Collision Detection
As mentioned, objects in Free Motion will react with walls and solids when they collide, thereby preventing penetration with other objects.
7-78
Motion
7-79
Motion
If an object in free motion strikes a wall or static solid, a collision will also occur,
and the object will bounce or deflect appropriately.
Motion
7-80
CHAPTE R 8
8.1
Analysis Options
Introduction
The Options dialog is used to set basic conditions and parameters of the analysis.
The default settings define an incompressible, turbulent flow analysis, with no heat
transfer. The parameters are all engineering in nature, and are discussed in this
chapter:
8.2
Flow
Compressibility
Heat Transfer
Radition
Gravity
Turbulence
Solar Heating
Scalars
Flow
If flow is turned On, the pressure and momentum equations for the fluid motion
will be solved. Turn flow Off for conduction-only heat transfer analyses.
8-1
Options
Note: For forced convection analyses, the flow and heat transfer calculations can be
run separately (although it is not required). After the flow analysis finishes, turn
flow to Off, and turn Heat Transfer On (discussed below). For natural convection
analyses, flow and heat transfer must be run concurrently.
8.3
8.3.1
Compressibility
Incompressible
Characterizes any flow for which the maximum Mach number is less than 0.3. For
more information about incompressible flows, please refer to the Incompressible
Flows section of the Analysis Guidelines chapter of this manual.
8.3.2
Subsonic Compressible
Subsonic compressible flows are flows that are compressible but contain no shocks.
In particular, the fluid velocity must be low enough so that heat generation due to
viscous shearing work on the fluid is negligible. Typically, a Mach number of 0.7-0.8
is the maximum for which this is true.
If there is heat transfer, the static Temperature equation is solved. This equation
neglects viscous dissipation and pressure work effects. If there is no heat transfer,
the total temperature is held constant and the static temperature is determined
from:
= T
2
V
+ --------static 2c
P
Be sure to enter a value for Total Temperature for subsonic compressible flows
without heat transfer. This constant value of total temperature will be used in the
equation shown above.
Additionally, be sure to define a material in which density varies with Equation of
State (see the Materials chapter, Chapter 6, for more information).
8-2
Options
8.3.3
Compressible
Compressible flows are flows that have a Mach number greater than 0.8 with or
without heat transfer and shocks.
If there is heat transfer, the total Temperature equation is solved. This equation
includes terms for viscous dissipation and pressure work. The static temperature is
determined from the equation shown above.
For compressible flows without heat transfer, enter a value for Total Temperature.
Additionally, the density of the fluid must vary with Equation of State (see the
Materials chapter for more information).
If water is chosen as the material and compressible is selected, then the water
hammer problem will be solved.
For more detailed information about running compressible analyses, please refer to
the Analysis Guidelines Chapter of this manual.
8.4
Heat Transfer
The default setting of Off considers the calculation to be adiabatic, and will not
solve for any heat transfer effects.
When Heat Transfer is turned On, conduction, forced convection, mixed convection,
and natural convection are computed as appropriate. To include internal radiation,
check the Radiation box on the Radiation group. If Joule heating boundary conditions (current and/or voltage) are applied, heat transfer must be enabled to solve
for Joule heating.
8.4.1
In forced convection analyses, flow and heat transfer can be run separately
because the flow does not depend on the temperature distribution. This is an effiCFdesign Users Guide
8-3
Options
For more information about heat transfer, please see the Heat Transfer section of
the Analysis Guidelines chapter of this manual.
Options
cient approach because it saves time by not having to run flow and heat transfer
together throughout the entire analysis.
Staged Forced Convection controls this the automation of forced convection
analyses.
To automatically run a forced convection
analysis in separate flow and heat transfer
stages:
Options dialog.
2. Check the Staged Forced Convection
box.
3. Specify the number of iterations for
the flow-only solution on the Analyze dialog.
4. Click GO on the Analyze dialog.
Note that both Flow and Heat Transfer
must be enabled on the Options dialog.
The Staged Forced Convection check box
will not be active if any properties vary
with temperature or if thermostaticallycontrolled internal fans are used.
The following occurs after GO on the Analyze dialog is pressed:
1. The analysis will run as Flow-only (heat transfer is disabled) until either the
8-4
Options
If the Stop button is pressed during the flow-only portion, the analysis will end after
the current iteration, and will not run the heat-transfer portion of the calculation.
8.4.2
Radiation
Gravitational Vector
Use the Gravity Vector for buoyancy driven flows (natural convection). (You should
NOT specify a gravity vector for forced convection flows.) Because most natural
convection analyses occur on Earth, all that is required to set up gravity is to make
sure the Earth box is checked (it is by default) and to indicate the direction of grav-
8-5
Options
8.4.3
Options
ity in your model with a unit vector. For example, if your model is constructed such
that down is in the negative Y direction, then the unit vector for gravity should
be:
X = 0; Y = -1; Z = 0
For buoyancy driven flows on other planets (or where the gravity is different from
that on Earth), uncheck the Earth box, and enter the magnitude (in the analysis
units) and the direction of the gravity vector.
Note: be sure to choose a buoyancy material or set the density to vary with
equation of state on the Material Dialog
To include gravity as a force acting on a moving solid, do not specify gravity on the
Options dialog. Alternatively, assign a driving or resistive force equal to the force
imparted from gravity. The gravitational force may be added to some additional
driving or resistive force, if necessary.
8.5
Optional
There are three additional sets of controls on the Options dialog: Turbulence,
Solar Heating, and Scalars. These controls are accessed by clicking their respective buttons on the Options Dialog.
8.5.1
Turbulence
The Turbulence dialog is used to toggle turbulence on and off, to select the turbulence model and to modify the default values for the turbulence model parameters.
8-6
Options
Turb Model
Five turbulence models are available:
k-epsilon, the default turbulence model, is typically more accurate
than the constant eddy viscosity, but more computational intensive and
slightly less robust. It is not as resource intensive as the RNG model, but
still gives good results.
Low Re k-epsilon is well suited for low speed, but turbulent flows. The
Reynolds number of such flow is typically between 1,500 and 5,000.
This turbulence model is well suited for pipe flows and external aerodynamic flow in the transition between laminar and turbulent as well as flow
situations that have both high speed and low speed areas. Other flow situations that perform well with the Low Reynolds turbulent model include:
1. A high-speed jet entering a large room. The jet is highly turbulent when it first
enters the room, but the flow slows down considerably, and the Reynolds number
drops. These types of flows can be very unstable when run with k-epsilon.
2. Buoyancy-driven (natural convection) flows that are barely turbulent.
Because this turbulent model does not use wall functions, Mesh Enhancement should be always be enabled when using Low Reynolds k-epsilon. We
recommend increasing the number of mesh enhancement layers to 5 (using
the Mesh Enhancement controls on the Meshing dialog).
High Reynolds flows that are run with the Low Reynolds turbulence model
will generally produce the same solution as would the k-epsilon model.
Likewise, laminar flows that are run with this model will produce similar
results to a solution run as laminar.
CFdesign Users Guide
8-7
Options
Note that analyses run with this turbulence model may not be as stable as
those run with the k-epsilon model. Because of this, the Intelligent Solution
Control should be enabled (the switch is located in the Solution Control dialog launched from the Analyze task dialog.) Likewise, analyses run with this
model may take more iterations to reach a fully converged solution.
Options
The RNG turbulence model is more computational intensive, but sometimes slightly more accurate than the k-epsilon model, particularly for separated flows. This model works best for predicting the reattachment point
for separated flows, particularly for flow over a backward-facing step. When
using the RNG model, it is often recommended to start with the k-epsilon
model and after this model is fairly well converged, enable the RNG model.
The constant eddy viscosity model is slightly less rigorous than the
other two models, but more numerically stable. This is a good choice for
lower speed turbulent flows and some buoyancy flows. This is also useful if
one of the other two models caused divergence.
The Mixing Length turbulence model is primarily designed for internal
natural convection analyses. Use of the mixing length model, in some
cases, has been shown to reduce run times and provide better accuracy
than the default turbulence model for internal buoyancy-driven flows.
Auto Startup
Auto Startup controls the Automatic Turbulent Start-Up (ATSU) algorithm.
This algorithm goes through a number of steps to obtain turbulent flow solutions.
The algorithm starts by running 10 iterations using a constant eddy viscosity
model, so the k and epsilon equations are not solved. With this solution as an initial
guess, the two-equation turbulence model is started. At iteration 10, a spike in the
convergence monitoring data will appear for the k and epsilon equations. Other
steps are then taken to gradually arrive at the converged result. These steps may
involve spikes in the convergence monitoring data at iterations 10, 20 and 50. After
50 iterations, the ATSU is turned off automatically.
If Lock On is selected, the ATSU stays on during the entire analysis until the user
manually clicks it off. If there are convergence difficulties after iteration 50 (divergence within 10 iterations), then you should enable Lock On. If the ATSU is turned
on, you should run at least 200 iterations to ensure convergence of the turbulent
flow solution.
If Extend is selected, an extended version of the ATSU is activated. This method is
useful for difficult analyses, particularly compressible analyses. The minimum number of iterations that should be run with this algorithm is 400.
Turb/Laminar Ratio
8-8
Options
The Turb/Laminar Ratio is the ratio of the effective (turbulent) viscosity to the
laminar value. This is used to estimate the effective viscosity at the beginning of
the turbulent flow analysis. In most turbulent flow analyses, the effective viscosity
is 2-3 orders of magnitude larger than the laminar value. The default value is generally suitable for most flows.
For some flows, it is helpful to increase the Turb/Lam Ratio to 1000 or even 10,000.
Such flows typically involve a small, high speed jet shooting into a large plenum.
Such flows are typically momentum-driven, and benefit from a larger turbulent viscosity at the beginning of the calculation.
Additionally, this affects the value of viscosity when the constant-eddy viscosity
turbulence model is used.
Turbulence Intensity
The Turbulence Intensity Factor controls the amount of turbulent kinetic energy
in the inlet stream. Its default value is 0.05 and should rarely exceed 0.5. The
expression used to calculate
1
2
Advanced
The quantities in the Advanced dialog are described in detail in the CFdesign Technical manual.
8.5.2
Solar Heating
The Solar Heating functionality allows study of both scenarios. Solar heating can be
run as a steady state analysis to learn the temperature distribution caused by solar
CFdesign Users Guide
8-9
Options
Solar heating plays a significant role in the reliability and performance of many
mechanical and electronic devices that are subjected to outside environmental conditions. In some situations, the worst-case solar loading during the hottest part of
the day is of interest. In other situations, the intent is to understand the periodic
temperature variation that occurs from diurnal heating (multiple cycles of day and
night).
Options
1. Check the Enable Solar Heating box to include solar heating in an analysis. The
dialog is grayed out unless this box is checked.
8-10
Options
2. Select the geographical location. There are two ways to do this. Method 1 is to
select the country and city from the drop-down menus. Method 2 is to check the
Manual box, and enter the Latitude and Longitude coordinates and offset from
Greenwich Mean Time (in the GMT box). The GMT offset is used to accurately determine the time zone.
Method 2
Method 1
3. Set the Date and Time. Change each value by clicking on it, and use the up and
down arrows to modify the value. (Direct entry in these fields is not supported.)
Note that all times are considered to be Standard Time--Daylight Savings Time is
not supported due to the wide variation of its use throughout the world.
Click the value
4. Specify the orientation of the model. The Compass Direction defines which way
Define as a
Direction and
Cartesian axis
Orientation
or graphically
8-11
Options
the model is facing. The Celestial Orientation defines which way is up by selecting
either the direction of the sky or the ground. For both directions, select the convenient direction or orientation, and select the direction from the adjacent menu. The
direction can either be a Cartesian axis or specified by selecting a direction graphically on the model.
Options
For more information about setting up and running solar heating analyses, please
see the Solar Heating section of the Analysis Guidelines chapter of this manual.
8.5.3
Scalars
The default is No Scalar meaning that the scalar calculation is not part of the analysis.
The transport of a general scalar variable will be modeled when General Scalar is
selected. This scalar might be the salinity in a seawater fluid flow analysis, a mixture fraction in a multi-species analyses or some marker.
The Diffusion Coefficient controls the mass diffusivity of the scalar quantity into
the surrounding fluid. A value of 0 will prevent any diffusion of the scalar quantity.
This quantity is D AB in Ficks Law:
j A = D AB m A
where jA is the mass flux of species A. This is how much of A is transferred (per
time and per unit area normal to the transfer direction). It is proportional to the
mixture mass density, and to the gradient of the species mass fraction, mA. The
units of the Diffusivity coefficient are length squared per time.
Select Humidity to account for moist gas. Both the relative humidity and the condensed water can be post-processed. Note that the condensation of a moist gas can
8-12
Options
be modeled by CFdesign, but the evaporation of water into a gas stream cannot.
Heat transfer must be turned On. If the relative humidity is dependent upon the
pressure, you should also enable Subsonic Compressible. Remember to enter the
correct properties for the gas (only the gas, not the moist mixture) on the Materials
Dialog. A summary of the steps for setting up a humidty (moist air) analysis are:
Options
8-13
Options
8-14
CHAPTE R 9
9.1
Analyze
Introduction
At this point, the model should be set up and ready to run. The Analyze dialog contains controls to run the analysis, and also launches the Convergence Monitor. The
Convergence Monitor allows an easy way to monitor the performance of the calculation. The Fast Track Option is also discussed.
After the analysis is finished, the Review dialog is the place to go for information
about the calculation. The Review dialog provides access to the Status and Summary files, and provides tools to organize saved results sets and time steps for animation.
Prior to the analysis, use the Review task dialog to set up monitor points. During
the analysis, convergence data will be plotted for monitor points, and allow the user
to track the flow and thermal behavior at exact locations throughout the model.
9.2
This dialog contains the commands to start and stop the calculation. The analysis
mode can be set to steady state (the default) or transient. The Results and Summary Output Intervals are set on this dialog. The analysis computer is also set
here. This is for the Fast Track Option--the ability to run the analysis on a computer
different from the one used to build the analysis. The analysis can always be
9-1
Analyze
stopped by hitting the Stop button (which replaces the Go button during a calculation.)
Transient.
2. If Transient, set the Transient
Parameters (time step size, etc.)
3. Set the Results and/or Summary Save Intervals
4. Select the Analysis Computer
(the local computer is the
default).
5. If continuing an analysis,
select the iteration or time step to
Continue From.
6. Enter the number of Iterations to Run.
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Step 8
Step 7
9-2
Analyze
9.3
9.4
Transient Parameters
Three parameters are necessary for transient analysis: Time Step Size, Stop
Time, and Number of Inner Iterations.
9.4.1
The Time Step Size is always in seconds. The correct choice of time step depends
on the time scale of the analysis. For non-motion flow analyses, the time step size
is a fraction of the mean flow velocity, and should be at least a tenth of the time
needed to traverse the length of the device. In many cases a much smaller time
step size will be required to adequately resolve the flow.
For non-motion heat transfer analyses, the time scale is usually much larger, so a
larger time step size can be used. The time step should be no more than one tenth
of the expected heat-up time. In cases involving diurnal solar heating, a much
larger time step can be used because the time scale is typically a day or more. A
time step for a typical diurnal heating analysis can be on the order of 100 seconds
or more.
If Intelligent Solution Control is enabled, CFdesign automatically calculates a time
step size based on convergence progression and the mesh. This time step size is
usually quite small, and often a larger step size can be used effectively.
9.4.2
For Rotating analyses, a time step size ranging from individual blade passages to
complete revolutions can be used effectively. Smaller time step sizes are recomCFdesign Users Guide
9-3
Analyze
Analyze
mended for devices with large number of blades to resolve the interaction between
blades and surrounding, non-rotating geometry.
To facilitate this, a time step calculator has been added to the Analyze task dialog
that computes the time step size based on either a prescribed number of degrees
per time step or the number of blades. Open the dialog by clicking the Estimate
button on the Analyze dialog when a rotating region is present:
Specify either the Degrees per Time Step or the Number of Blades, and the
time step will be computed based on the rotational speed specified as part of the
Rotating Region. If the number of blades is specified, the time step size will be
computed using a single time step per blade passage.
If the model contains multiple rotating objects, the fastest rotational speed is used
as the basis for the time step size computed in this dialog.
More details about proper time step size are presented in the Guidelines chapter of
this manual.
The time step size for moving solids analyses is computed based on the specified
motion parameters and the mesh size. When the Analyze dialog is first opened after
assigning Motion parameters, the time step size is computed automatically. If
changes are made to the flow or motion velocities, click the Estimate button to
recalculate the default time step.
This will not conflict with the time step size determined by Intelligent Solution Control, but rather computes a reasonable starting time step size.
9-4
Analyze
9.4.3
Stop Time
Enter a specific time (in seconds) in the Stop Time field to indicate when the solution should stop. This is a very useful way to end certain transient analyses in which
Intelligent Solution Control is enabled. An example is the simulation of flow-driven
motion because it is not known how many time steps will be required to complete a
certain amount of time. If it is not desired to stop the analysis at a certain time,
enter -1 in the Stop Time field, and be sure to specify the number of time steps
to run.
Enter the number of steps to run in the Time Steps To Run field. After completing
the indicated number of time steps, the solution will stop. This is a recommended
way to run transient analyses whose time step size will not likely change. If the
number of time steps to run is not important (only reaching the stop time is), then
enter -1 as the number of time steps to run, and be sure to specify a Stop Time.
If both a Stop Time and the number of Time Steps To Run are specified, then the
first of the two that is met will cause the analysis to stop. For example: the user
wants to run a transient for 3 seconds, but doesnt want to exceed a total number
of time steps of 1000. The user would set the Stop Time as 3, and the Number of
Time Steps to 1000. If 1000 time steps are calculated, but only 2.5 seconds have
9-5
Analyze
For transient analyses, the user can specify whether the analysis should stop when
a specific time has been reached, after a certain number of time steps, or whichever comes first.
Analyze
passed, the solution will stop. Alternatively, the solution would stop if 3 seconds is
reached in only 450 time steps.
9.4.4
This controls the number of inner iterations for each time step during a transient
analysis.
Because CFdesign uses an implicit method to discretize the transient terms in the
governing equations, the calculation has to be iterated at each time step. This transient inner iteration is similar to a global steady state iteration. The governing
equations are solved at each inner iteration as they are at each global iteration in a
steady state analysis. The difference is that far fewer inner iterations are needed in
a transient time-step because the transient equations are much more numerically
stable.
Typically, 10-20 inner iterations per time step are sufficient for a transient analysis.
If the convergence monitor indicates that this is not enough (the convergence plot
does not flatten), this number can be increased. If the convergence monitor shows
that this is too many inner iterations (curves are flat for several iterations), you can
decrease this number.
For Motion (Rotating and Moving Solid) analyses, we recommend only one inner
iteration per time step. This has been found to work very well for a wide variety of
Motion analyses.
9.5
Save Intervals
Sets how often the results and summary information are stored to the disk.
When the Results Output Interval is set to the default value of 0, results are saved
only when the analysis stops (either completing the specified number of iterations
or because the Stop button was pressed). For complicated analyses, it is recommended to set a non-zero Results Output Interval. (Be careful that your Results
Output Interval is not so small as to exceed your hard-drive capacity.)
These saved results sets/time steps can be used for continuing the analysis from an
earlier result set if there is a problem--in effect returning to an earlier saved state
9-6
Analyze
of the analysis without having to run it out again from the beginning. Results from
saved result sets or time steps can also be animated.
9.5.1
Steady State
For steady state analyses, simply select the interval of Steps to be saved.
9.5.2
Transient
For transient analyses, however, results can now be saved at either a specified
interval of time steps or at a specified interval of seconds. The principal reason for
this feature (besides greater flexibility) is that when Intelligent Solution Control
varies the time step size (as described above) for transient analyses there is no
way to ensure that results are saved at the desired times. This feature provides the
ability to save transient results at exactly the desired times.
The Save Intervals group of the Analyze dialog was modified as shown:
Specify if results
should be saved
at intervals of Steps
or at specific Times.
When transient results are saved by specifying a time interval, the time step size
will be adjusted automatically (assuming Intelligent Solution Control is on) such
that a result will be calculated at the desired time. Intelligent Solution Control
9-7
Analyze
The intermediate summary information is available in the summary file (analysisname.sum). Summary information from intermediate iterations is appended to the
summary history file (analysis-name.smh). This information is useful for tracking
the progress of an analysis.
Analyze
includes the specified time save interval as part of its criteria in determining time
step size.
For example: the user wishes to save results every 3 seconds. However, as Intelligent Solution Control varies the time step (to ensure stability) it finds that a time
step size of 1.7 seconds is optimal. The first time step is then calculated at 1.7 seconds. Knowing that the user wants to save the results at 3 seconds, the next time
step is adjusted from 1.7 (which would put the solution at 3.4 seconds) to 1.3 seconds. This forces a result to be calculate at 3 seconds so that the desired result is
saved.
If Intelligent Solution Control is not enabled, the time step size is not changed
automatically. Because of this, if the time save interval does not correspond to the
user-specified time step size, only results solved at the specified time step are
saved.
For example: the user specifies a time step size of 2 seconds, but disables Intelligent Solution Control. However, they also enter a time save interval of 1 second. As
the solution progresses, results are only calculated every 2 seconds, so the result
at 1 second is not saved. Likewise, the result at 3 seconds and 5 seconds, etc., are
not saved either. Only results at 2, 4, 6, etc. seconds are saved.
The summary file can also be saved using an interval of results steps or of time.
9.5.3
9-8
Analyze
at varying intervals. Checking Table and clicking the Edit button brings up a table
for input of step (or iteration) number and the save interval.
Analyze
For example: tabular data for steps and save frequencies was entered as shown
above. The result will be that from step 0, output is saved every 5 steps. At step
30, output is stored every 10 steps. Finally, from step 100, output is saved every
100 steps. If 300 steps were run, results from the following steps would be saved
to the disk:
5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 200, 300
From step 30,
From step 0,
From step 100,
save every 10
save every 5
save every 100
In the example above, the intervals led to the next interval definition quite naturally. If, however, the table looks like:
9-9
Analyze
every step is saved from time 0 until time=2 seconds. At 2 seconds, results are
saved every 5 steps. Finally, at 10 seconds, results are saved every 20 steps.
9.6
9.6.1
Track
Analyze!
Analysis Computer, Server Monitor, and Fast
9-10
Analyze
CFdesign interface is started again and that analysis opened, either the current status of the analysis will show, or it will be completed and the final results will be
available.
Building upon these concepts, CFdesign features the Fast Track Option.
The Fast Track Option is a way to run analyses on remote computers (on your network). It is a way to temporarily ramp up analysis capability by using (often underutilized) in-house computer resources. This is not an ASP model nor is it distributed
computing. Alternatively, it is an innovative way to run multiple analyses on multiple computers. Temporary Solver licenses can be leased for a few weeks or a few
months at a time. (Consult your Account Manager for details.) With these licenses,
you can perform numerous analyses simultaneously, offering a great way to
explore all those what if scenarios that are critical to a successful design effort.
The analyses are set up locally (on the Interface Computer), but assigned to run on
the machine chosen in the Analysis Computer drop menu. Every machine on the
network that is set up as an Analysis Computer will be listed here. The Server
Monitor, accessible by hitting the Server Monitor tab, lists all available Analysis
computers and their status:
9-11
Analyze
Note: Care should be taken to NOT shut down CFdesign until after the first iteration
is completed.
Analyze
will cause each Analysis Computer to be listed in the Server Monitor on the Interface Computer.
To run an analysis on an eligible Analysis Computer, select its name from the Analysis Computer drop menu (on the Interface machine), and hit GO. The model data
will transmit to the waiting Analysis Computer, and the analysis will proceed. As the
analysis runs, results will be sent back to the interface machine (where the model
was built), for viewing with the Results tools. During the analysis, the model can be
closed and CFdesign shut down on the local (Interface) machine.
Care should be taken to NOT shut down CFdesign on the Interface machine
until after the first iteration is completed.
Later, when the analysis is opened on the Interface machine, the current progress
or the finished results will automatically be sent from the Analysis machine.
9.6.2
Continue From
The default entry in the Continue From drop menu is the last saved iteration or time
step. When GO is hit, the analysis will continue from the value shown in this drop
menu.
If a previous iteration or time step is chosen, then all subsequent saved iterations
or time steps will be deleted from the analysis (after a prompt is displayed confirming that this is OK).
Changes made to the mesh definitions, boundary conditions, or materials will be
automatically incorporated into the analysis. If a mesh size is changed, but the
Continue From menu is not reset to 0, a new mesh will be generated, the current
results will be interpolated onto this new mesh, and the analysis iteration count will
be reset to 0. Note: all intermediate saved results files (and time steps) will
be deleted. The analysis will then proceed with the saved results mapped to the
new mesh except for analyses containing the following features:
9-12
Extruded elements
Surface parts (solid or distributed resistance)
Motion (moving solids)
Rotating region
Periodic boundary conditions
Analyze
Note: for existing analyses originally launched from Pro/Engineer but opened subsequently from the Desktop, the Mesh Size task-dialog will not be available. Furthermore, if the existing mesh sizes are deleted (through the Feature Tree), the
Analyze dialog will be grayed out. This is because the analysis MUST be opened
from Pro/Engineer to generate a new mesh.
Analyze
9.6.3
This is the number of additional iterations or time steps to be run once GO is hit.
9.6.4
Hitting the GO button starts the analysis. Once the analysis is started, it changes to
the STOP button. Hitting the STOP button will stop the analysis at the end of the
current iteration.
For a new analysis, the mesh will be generated prior to any iterations being solved.
For analyses started from Pro/Engineer or CATIA, meshing occurs in the CAD interface--causing CFdesign to minimize while the CAD tool appears. All status messages will appear in the List region of the CAD interface. After the mesh is
generated, the CAD tool will minimize and CFdesign will come back up and the
analysis will proceed. During the analysis, the CAD tool will remain in a minimized
state, and can not be accessed. To shut down the CAD tool (to free up more memory), shut down the CFdesign interface--the analysis will continue to run--and then
shut down the CAD tool. CFdesign can then be started again, and the running analysis opened. The analysis will continue to run even when the CFdesign interface is
shut down.
For Acis and Parasolid based CAD systems, the CFdesign interface does not minimize during the meshing, and status messages are listed in the Information field of
the Analyze dialog.
To just generate the mesh and not run any iterations (this is sometimes useful to
inspect the mesh prior to running a large analysis) set the number of iterations to
0, and hit GO. The mesh will generate, but the analysis will not proceed. The mesh
can be inspected using the Results dialog. (Note: it is not necessary to assign
boundary conditions, materials, or set up any analysis options if the goal is just to
generate the mesh. Obviously these tasks must be completed prior to running the
analysis.)
9-13
Analyze
9.7
Information
In this window on the Analyze dialog, status messages are written out during the
generation of the mesh and model pre-processing. Every pre-analysis calculation
performed on the model is listed here. A small summary of the model is also presented, and lists the number of inlets and outlets, number of nodes and elements,
and the units systems. If an error occurred during processing, it will be stated here.
Also be sure to check the Status window found in the Review dialog, Notes tab
for error messages.
9.8
The Analysis Queue in CFdesign allows the user to run multiple analyses in series,
in much the same way as a batch process can be made to automate a succession of
events. Instead of relying on a DOS batch file, however, the analysis queue
requires no special steps, and is managed through the user interface.
To add analyses to the queue, simply hit the Go button on the Analyze dialog. The
first analysis will start to run immediately. Close the CFdesign interface (the analysis will continue to run). Open a subsequent analysis, and hit Analyze_Go to add it
to the Queue. When Go is hit, the analysis will not run immediately. Instead, it will
be added to the queue, and the word Queued will appear in the Status bar in the
lower left corner of the Interface. Queued analyses will be run in the order that they
were submitted.
It is highly recommended that you generate the mesh for each analysis prior to
launching the first analysis for solving. To do this, simply run each analysis 0 iterations. This will generate the mesh and helps to locate any errors in the set up prior
to running the analyses.
Analyses in the queue will be listed in the Server Monitor tab of the Analyze task
dialog. When an analysis is completed, it will be removed from the list.
At any time while an analysis is running, it can be opened in the CFdesign interface
and the current state of the solution will be loaded for display.
To remove an analysis from the queue, open it in the CFdesign interface. A message in the Status bar will indicate that the analysis is in the queue. To remove it,
9-14
Analyze
simply hit the Stop button on the Analyze dialog. That analysis will then be
removed from the queue and will be removed from the list in the Server Monitor.
If an analysis diverges or stops because of errors, the next analysis in the queue
will start.
9.9
Analysis Intelligence
Accessed with the Solution Control button on the Analyze dialog, a set of tools
exists which allow control over the rate of solution progression. The purpose of
these solution controls is to provide control over how quickly the solution field
progresses, to ensure a robust, converged solution. In addition to the manual controls, CFdesign contains a great deal of Analysis Intelligence which automatically
controls the rate of convergence as well as determines when the analysis is no
longer changing (converged).
This automation is described first, and then the manual controls and the theory
behind them are described subsequently.
9.9.1
9-15
Analyze
When the analysis is completed, open it in the CFdesign interface. When you exit
the interface, be sure to save the analysis when prompted.
Analyze
Intelligent Solution Control is enabled by default for several analysis types (as
described below), but can be disabled on the Solution Controls dialog (launched
from the Analyze task dialog):
The convergence control values that Intelligent Solution Control chooses can be
plotted on the Convergence Monitor by selecting Relax Parm from the third pulldown menu:
The convergence control values are shown for all degrees of freedom over the
range of iterations.
If an analysis simply will not converge even with Intelligent Solution Control
enabled, then the mesh should be evaluated to determine if a finer mesh concentration is needed. Also, the applied conditions and materials need to be inspected to
ensure that the physics are being simulated correctly. If modifications to the mesh
9-16
Analyze
and/or physics still do not produce a converged solution with Intelligent Solution
Control, please contact your technical support representative.
The application of Intelligent Solution Control with different types of analyses is
described:
Intelligent Solution Control adjusts the time step size and the convergence control
settings to achieve solution stability. The result is that even very physically
demanding analyses that would have required manual adjustment of convergence
controls will now run with virtually no manual intervention.
Steady state analyses are run internally as transient solutions when Intelligent
Solution Control is enabled. Each time step consists of only one inner iteration, so
solution times are not significantly longer (as is often the case in true time-varying
transient analyses). Because of this, each time step is considered a single iteration.
Saved results files follow this naming convention:
analysisname.res.s#.
where analysisname is the name of the CFdesign analysis, and # is the number of
the time step (effectively the iteration number for steady state analyses). Note that
the same convention is used when Intelligent Solution Control is disabled.
To run steady state analyses, ensure that Steady State is the selected Analysis
Mode on the Analyze dialog (it is by default). Also, when specifying how often
results are saved to the disk, the default save interval is expressed in terms of iterations (instead of seconds).
Intelligent Solution Control behaves slightly differently when solving for temperature. Unlike the other solution variables in which the convergence controls and time
step are adjusted, for temperature, only the time step is adjusted. Because of this,
the value of the convergence control for temperature (as set in the dialog) will
affect the rate of convergence of the energy equation. By varying the time step
internally, Intelligent Solution Control enforces and maintains stability of the
Energy Solver throughout the analysis. The default value for temperature convergence control has been increased to 1.0 in CFdesign 8.0 in an effort to reduce solution times of heat transfer analyses.
9-17
Analyze
9.9.1.1
Analyze
9.9.1.2
For transient analyses that do not include moving objects, Intelligent Solution
Control adjusts only the time step size, and does not modify any convergence control settings. This is done to prevent artificially affecting the time accuracy of the
solution. (Reducing the convergence control slows down solution progression by the
Solver, so it is always a good idea to use the default convergence control settings
for non-Motion transient analyses.)
We have found that in some cases the time step size that Intelligent Solution Control selects can be smaller than truly necessary for convergence, which may result
in significantly longer solution times. For this reason, Intelligent Solution Control is
disabled by default for transient analyses. It is recommended to manually assign a
time step size based on the physics of the analysis model.
9.9.1.3
9.9.1.4
9-18
Analyze
We recommend that you enable Intelligent Solution Control for rotating analyses
that are either free-spinning or driven by a known torque. This will automatically
determine and vary the time step size throughout the analysis. The time step size
will be modified to ensure that no more than three degrees of rotation pass for each
time step. This criteria has been found to be quite stable for rotating analyses.
Analyze
9.9.2
Automatic Convergence Assessment determines when a solution is converged-when the solution stops changing--and automatically halts the calculation. It examines small and large frequency changes throughout the solution field, and evaluates
the local and global fluctuations of each degree of freedom.
Automatic Convergence Assessment is automatically enabled for the same types of
analyses as Intelligent Solution Control. Automatic Convergence Assessment is
enabled or disabled by clicking the Advanced button on the Solution controls dialog,
and checking or unchecking the Automatic Convergence Assessment box:
9-19
Analyze
Summary trends to be converged. This is appropriate for most analyses with exceptions listed below.
Change the slider setting to Loose for a preliminary analysis in which extremely
high accuracy is not the goal. Such analyses are very useful for identifying trends in
a design. Convergence will typically occur with fewer iterations, but the results may
not be as accurate. Change the slider to Tight to invoke more rigorous convergence
criteria. This is useful for a final analysis in which a high level of convergence and
accuracy is necessary.
It has been observed that in some analyses in which aerodynamic- or hydrodynamic-induced forces are of interest, the solution may be considered converged
and stopped by Automatic Convergence Assessment before the forces have actually
stopped changing. The forces in such analyses (such as aerodynamic flows over
thin bodies) often require many hundreds of iterations to reach fully converged
force values, and may require additional iterations beyond where Automatic Convergence Assessment will stop the calculation. In such cases, it is recommended to
disable Automatic Convergence Assessment and run additional iterations. Monitor
the forces manually to ensure that they have stopped changing.
Additionally, flows that rely only on shear drag for their pressure drop, such as flow
through a pipe, tend to require more iterations to converge. In such analyses, the
default slider setting may halt the calculation prematurely. For this reason, it is recommended to change the setting to Tight for pipe flow analyses that do not contain
any form-drag.
Reliance on Automatic Convergence Assessment is not recommended for transient
analyses that will not reach a steady-state solution such as Rotating, Motion, or
vortex shedding analyses. By their nature, none of these types of analyses will ever
typically reach a numerically converged state that satisfies Automatic Convergence
Assessment. For this reason, it is recommended that the stopping criteria be evaluated manually based on the desired time span of the analysis or other physical
objective.
For more information about these Convergence Criteria, please consult the CFdesign Technical Reference.
9-20
Analyze
9.9.3
Using condition numbers and several parameters in the coefficient matrix, CFdesign
selects the solver best suited for the given analysis type. The result of this is a significant reduction in calculation time, and greater calculation efficiency. There are
no user-modifiable controls associated with this feature.
9.10
The Solution Control dialog controls the solution progression rate so that the
chance of divergence is minimized. Values are adjusted by moving the slider bar
toward Slower or Faster between 0 and 0.5 (or in some cases, 1.0). Note that if
you specify 0, the degree of freedom will not be allowed to progress with the solution at all.
The default values are the best settings for most analyses. However, if Intelligent
Solution Control is disabled, solution difficulties can often be resolved by manually
reducing the progression rate for pressure to 0.1-0.3. This is generally the most
effective way to minimize solution difficulties, particularly if they occur in the early
iterations of a calculation. Reducing the rate on the velocity components, in conjunction with pressure, to 0.1-0.3 may be necessary in some cases.
The progression rate on variables and properties can be adjusted only for those
quantities that are changing in the analysis. For example, the temperature rate can
only be adjusted if Heat Transfer is turned On on the Options dialog. Likewise, the
progression rate on the Density, Specific heat (Cp), and Conductivity properties can
only be adjusted if these properties are variable, as set in the Material Editor.
The progression rate is applied to the solution in the following manner:
= r new + ( 1 r ) old
9-21
Analyze
Because certain numerical solvers are better suited than others for various analysis
types, CFdesign now uses an algorithm to automatically select the optimal solver
for every analysis. Certain model attributes such as the aspect ratio of the flow passages, the number of flow passages, and the overall length of the device all play a
role in which solver is selected.
Analyze
where r is the control parameter, is the dependent variable, the new subscript
refers to the latest solution and the subscript old refers to the previous solution.
Values greater than 0.5 (default) are not used for most solution variables.
For compressible analyses, an additional method of control is also available: Pressure Control and Temperature Control. (Temperature Control is available for
incompressible analyses as well.) A value between 1e-3 and 1e-6 can be selected
for these parameters. They are necessary for compressible analyses because the
numerical conditioning for such analyses can often be poor. For most compressible
analyses, a value of 1e-3 is adequate for pressure (and temperature if Heat
Transfer is enabled in the Options dialog). However, if convergence difficulties
persist, it may be necessary to reduce the value.
The value set for Pressure and Temperature control is a sort of pseudo-transient
relaxation that is implemented in the solution in the following manner:
i N d
i N d
old
A + ----------------------- +
------------------------
F
A
=
+
i t
i, j j
i
i, i t
i
inertia
inertia
ji
9.11
Advection Schemes
The advection scheme can be changed by clicking the Advection button, and selecting the scheme of choice. A brief description of the recommended applications of
the four advection schemes is given:
ADV 1: This is the default scheme for nearly all analyses (except rotating regions).
It is the work horse, and is recommended as a starting point for all analysis types
except for those listed below.
ADV 2: This is the default scheme for rotating regions (not moving solids, however)
analyses. It is better for pressure-driven flows (no specified velocity or flow rate).
Also, it works well for many compressible analyses.
ADV 3: Although not automatically set as a default for any type of analysis, this
scheme has been found to work well for external aerodynamic analyses. In con-
9-22
Analyze
junction with a fine mesh around the body, this scheme does a good job producing
drag and lift values. It can be less stable than the other schemes, although with
Intelligent Solution Control invoked this will not likely be problematic. Note that
Mesh Enhancement must be enabled when using ADV 3. Without it, the accuracy
advantages will be negated.
9.12
This dialog lists the results quantities that are available for viewing after the analysis is completed.
The default quantities are the most widely used, but additional quantities are available if needed.
9-23
Analyze
ADV 4: This scheme is similar to ADV 2, but is not recommended for rotating analyses. ADV 4 is optimized for the analysis of flow through long, skinny pipes. It also
performs well when calculating heat transfer in devices with multiple skinny gaps.
Analyze
After running the analysis, to output additional quantities, select them from this
list, set the number of iterations to 0, and hit GO. These additional quantities will be
available for viewing on the Results dialog.
By default, the film coefficient result quantity is calculated based on heat transfer
results (thermal residual). However, sometimes it is advantageous to obtain film
coefficient data based on the flow solution. This is accomplished by using an empirical correlation. The dialog is accessed by clicking the Options button on the
Optional Post-Processor Output dialog. The dialog is shown:
Nu is the Nusselt number, Re is the local Reynolds number, and Pr is the Prandtl
number. The flow solution is used to calculate the Reynolds and Prandtl numbers.
Use either the default values for a, b, and c, or select new values. Note that the
definition of Reynolds number and Nusselt number requires a length constant. If
you are unsure what to use for these length scales, use the default of 1.
Note: Vorticity is the measure of the spin (angular speed) of a fluid particle. The
mathematical definition of vorticity is the curl of the velocity vector. Another way to
look at it is that vorticity is twice the angular rotation (omega). Since omega is a
measure of the net angular rotation, vorticity is a measure of the local spin of the
fluid particle. (If omega, the angular velocity, = 0, then the flow is irrotational and
the vorticity is zero.)
9-24
Analyze
9.13
Convergence Monitor
9-25
Analyze
While the analysis is running the Convergence Monitor is displayed below the
Graphics window. A detailed description of the Monitor is given in the Review chapter of this manual.
Analyze
9-26
CHAPTE R 10
10.1
Review
Introduction
The Review dialog contains tools to help assess convergence throughout the entire
calculation domain as well as at individual monitor points. Additionally it provides
access to several files that contain summary, status, and results information. Use
the Review dialog to animate multiply saved results sets or time steps as well as
produce Reports that summarize the analysis setup and results.
The Report Generator is a direct extension of the Design Communication Center,
and provides a very easy to use way to create and customize reports for sharing
CFdesign results.
Operation of the Review Dialog is not as sequential as some of the other functions.
Alternatively, there are several useful tools available to help assess and understand
analysis results.
10-1
Review
10.2
Convergence Monitor
After the analysis is finished, the Convergence Monitor is displayed by clicking the
View Conv. Monitor button on the Review task dialog:
The primary criteria for determining convergence is that the change of each degree
of freedom is minimized over a large range of iterations. The curves shown in the
Convergence Monitor are plots of the average value of each degree of freedom
throughout the entire calculation domain. More details about convergence assessment and the Automatic Convergence assessment function are included in the Analyze chapter of this manual.
10.2.1
Degrees of Freedom
A very helpful way to look at this data is to examine each degree of freedom
individually. Select a degree of freedom from the Quantity drop menu (it says
10-2
Review
All by default). The maximum and minimum values of the quantity will be shown
on the Y-axis of the plot:
Iteration Range
Adjust the displayed range of iterations by changing the Start and/or End iteration values. After changing a value, hit the keyboard Enter to implement the
change. This is especially helpful for removing the first 50 or so iterations from the
convergence plot. Before iteration 50, the quantities are typically changing too
much to be considered when assessing convergence.
By default the average value of each degree of freedom is plotted. To view the
maximum and minimum values, select Min. or Max. from the menu at the right side
of the dialog.
The Table tab (shown just above the Start and End fields) shows a table of the plotted data. When an individual degree of freedom is selected, the table shows only
values for that quantity.
10-3
Review
10.2.2
Review
10.2.3
Several different parameters can be plotted with the Convergence Monitor to aid in
understanding the progress of an analysis.
10-4
Review
10.3
Monitor Points
Monitor points are available in two forms: Runtime and Post. Runtime points track
convergence (of the basic degrees of freedom) at a user-specified point for every
iteration of the analysis. For this reason, Run-Time points must be selected
prior to running iterations. Note that there is a limit of 100 run-time monitor
points in an analysis.
10-5
Review
Post Monitor points are used to create XY plots of any output quantity at any location in the model for the saved time steps or iterations. These locations can be chosen after the analysis, but only results data for saved iterations or time steps can
be plotted. (Recall that the Results Output Interval on the Analyze dialog can be
used to save results sets during the analysis.)
Review
10.3.1
Step 2
tab is showing.
2. Use the X, Y, and Z sliders to
navigate to the desired location.
Specific coordinates can be entered
in the fields adjacent to the sliders.
3. Hit the Add button to finish the
point definition.
4. Points and their locations will be
displayed in the List Region.
5. Plot the point graphically by hitting the Show Points button.
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 1
Monitor points can not be chosen while the solver is running, and must be created
prior to running iterations. Convergence data at monitor points created after iterations have been run will be of subsequent iterations as the analysis is continued-not from previous iterations.
Likewise, if a point is removed and the analysis is continued, then no subsequent
data will be available for the removed point.
10-6
Review
When a completed analysis is started over from the beginning, all monitor point
data for the previous analysis will be removed.
Convergence data for each monitor point is plotted in the Convergence Monitor in
the same manner as the global convergence data. Select a specific monitor point
from the drop menu on the right side of the Convergence Monitor:
10.3.2
Go to the Review dialog task, and select the Monitor Points tab.
Plot the saved results at a point by first selecting it from the list and then hitting the
View Plot button.
Note: Select the desired results sets to plot using the Review_Results tab. Only the
results sets added to the Active group will be plotted.
When the View Plot button is hit, an XY plot of the data will be presented. A drop
menu on the plot window lists all the saved output quantities for the analysis, and
any of these can be plotted against iteration number.
10-7
Review
Post monitor points can be created after the analysis is finished, but are only plotted for saved results sets or time steps (recall that the Results Save interval is set
on the Analyze task dialog).
Review
10.4
Notes
The Notes tab provides access to several informational files created during and
after the analysis. Additionally, user-defined annotations can be created and
assigned from the Notes dialog:
Files for viewing:
Status
Summary
Summary History
Component Thermal Summary
Setup Parameters
Rotating Region Results
Motion Results
Annotations
10.4.1
Status File
The status file contains descriptions of any errors that occurred during the analysis.
If a message saying Errors occurred, Review Status File appears in the Analyze
Dialog Information field, this is where you should go to view the error.
Additionally, this file contains the messages displayed during startup (the initial calculations) as well as the residuals for each degree of freedom for each iteration.
By default, the status and summary files are written out to the working directory as
separate text files. However, if they are deleted or if the cfd file is moved without
either file, the status and summary data are still accessible through the Review dialog. To create a separate text file for either file, click the Save button on the bottom of the dialog frame.
10-8
Review
10.4.2
Summary File
This file contains tabulated minimum, maximum, and average nodal values for
selected variables. It also contains global summary calculations such as mass flow
through inlet and outlet passages, bulk pressures and temperatures, Reynolds
number, wall heat transfer, a global energy balance and the fluid forces. Additionally, analysis times and the amount of RAM used in the analysis are shown.
<jobname>.sum is a simple text file that can be viewed in any text editor.
The calculation units as well as the units for every variable are included in the file.
When working in the inch-lb-s and inch-Watt-K units systems, the mass flow rate
will be given in both the consistent units as well as in lbm/s.
Line
Review
Energy Balance
Fluid Energy Balance Information:
Line 1: The difference in energy in the fluid from the outlet to the inlet. This is the
sum of the residuals over the entire fluid domain. It represents the total energy
needed to sustain all of the fluid boundary conditions. This should match up with
the quantity: m c p T .
10-9
Review
Line 2: This is how much energy the fluid picked up from heat transfer boundary
conditions on the wall, and is the sum of the residuals at all of the wall nodes,
including those nodes on the interface of the solid materials. In the case where all
of the external fluid walls (not touching any other volume or surface) are adiabatic,
this represents the amount of energy the fluid gets from the solid materials. If
there are thermal boundary conditions on these external fluid walls, Line 2 will
include those conditions as well as the energy being transferred from the solid
materials.
Line 3: This is the summed energy from heat sources in only the fluid elements/
volumes.
Line 4: The residuals calculated in Lines 1-3 and Lines 5-7 do not include the radiative fluxes. This line sums the radiative fluxes from every wall surface.
Line 5: This is how much energy is transferred to (or from) the solids to (or from)
an exterior boundary. This is the sum of the residuals on the external faces of the
solid materials. These are faces that do not touch any other material. In certain
cases, where the solid material has say a heat generation applied to it and some
external faces, this Line may contain a finite number which is the sum of the residuals on these external nodes. In this case, this number can be interpreted as the
energy that would seep into the environment from that material. In the case where
the external faces have a thermal flux-type condition or a specified temperature,
this Line represents the amount of energy needed to sustain those boundary conditions.
Line 6: This is the summed energy from the heat sources in only the solid material
elements/volumes.
Line 7: This is the energy that crosses the interface of the solid materials into the
fluid elements. For adiabatic fluid external walls, this Line should be matched up
with Line 3.
For the Fluid Energy Balance, the following values should match:
Energy Out - Energy In = Heat Transfer from Wall to Fluid + Heat Transfer Due to
Source in Fluid + Radiant Heat Transfer to Fluid Walls
or
Line 1 = Line 2 + Line 3 + Line 4
10-10
Review
For the Solid Energy Balance, the following values should match:
Heat Transfer Due to Sources in the Solid = Heat Transfer from Exterior to Solid +
Heat Transfer From Fluid to Solid + (some radiation)
or
Line 6 = Line 5 + Line 7 + (some radiation)
For radiation calculations, Line 7 will be larger than Line 6 because the radiative
energy leaving the solids is not included.
Inlets/Outlets
Recall that for book-keeping purposes, any specified velocity boundary condition is
labeled an inlet, and any specified pressure boundary condition is labeled an outlet.
For a pressure-driven flow, with a pressure at the inlet and a pressure at the outlet,
the summary file will report that there are zero inlets, and two outlets. The physical inlet will have a positive mass flow rate however, and the physical outlet will have a negative mass flow rate. Also note that the Total Mass Flow In
and the Total Mass Flow Out will be 0. This is because there are no specified
velocity conditions (no labeled inlets), and the total mass flow from the labeled outlets cancels (one is positive, and the other is negative).
Temperature Statistics
For analyses with heat transfer, statistics for temperature distribution are included
in the summary file. These statistics show how much (as a volume percentage) of
the model has a temperature within a given range.
10-11
Review
Why dont they exactly match? Remember, we are summing the residuals of the
energy equation at every node in the model. If the energy equation is not converged, there will not be a balance. Even at convergence, the energy balance may
still contain some errors due to numerical roundoff and mesh inaccuracies.
Review
Shell Forces
If an analysis contains shells (solid surface obstructions), then force, temperature,
and heat transfer information for each surface is listed in the summary file.
10.4.3
This is a collection of all the summary files created for this analysis. Each time the
analysis is continued, a new summary file is appended.
10.4.4
10-12
Review
This information is also saved to an external file, and is named after the analysis
with a .cts extension.
10.4.5
The Setup Parameters File is automatically saved at the conclusion of every analysis. This file contains a listing of all applied analysis conditions such as mesh sizes,
materials, and boundary conditions.
This file is named after the analysis with a .set extension.
10.4.6
This data is also written to a .csv file named after the analysis name with the
word torque appended to it. For example, an analysis named Centrif-Pump would
produce a torque file called:
CENTRIF-PUMP_torque.csv.
10.4.7
Motion Results
This is a time history of the behavior for every moving object in a Motion analysis.
The linear and angular velocities, the linear and angular displacements, the force,
and the torque for each time step are listed. This information is very useful for
understanding the dynamic state of each part throughout the analysis. Each part is
listed on a separate tab.
Note that the linear and angular displacements are relative to the initial position of
the object as specified using the Initial Position slider on the Motion task dialog. Pay
particular attention to this if the initial position differs from the as-built location in
the CAD model.
This file is also saved to the working directory, and is named using the analysis
name and the part name and the word motion. For example, the motion file for
10-13
Review
This is a time history of the behavior of rotating regions in a Rotating analysis. The
hydraulic torque, rotating speed, and hydraulic force components for each rotating
object are listed.
Review
10.4.8
Annotations
This feature allows text notes to be added to the results display of an analysis.
There are two forms of graphics: static notes and model notes. Static notes are
used primarily as titles and general information text on a model, and do not change
position on the Graphics window. Model notes are attached to geometry and display
objects (such as cutting planes), and navigate with the model.
10.4.8.1
Step 1
10-14
Step 2
Review
To place a note:
model note
Review
10.4.8.2
static note
Modification of Notes
All notes are listed under the Annotations branch of the feature tree (which is only
shown when the Results and Review task dialogs are active). A right mouse button
10-15
Review
menu is available for each note that allows the note to be moved, changed,
deleted, or displayed with a frame:
To move a note, right click on the note in
the feature tree, and select Move. Click on
the new location.
To show a frame around a static note,
select Frame from the menu.
To edit a note, click Change. The note
will be editable on the feature tree. Modify
the note as necessary, and then hit Enter
on the keyboard. The modified note will
appear in the Graphics window.
To delete a note, click Delete. It will be
removed from the feature tree and from
the Graphics window.
A note cannot change form after it is created. If a note is first placed on the model,
it will remain a model note. If moved, it must be placed on a model entity. The
same is true of static notes--if a model entity is selected as a new location, it will
remain a static note.
10.4.8.3
10-16
Review
Only the text from notes is saved in the Graphics Text file (.gtx).
Click the Save All button to store the text
from all notes in a model.
Text locations are not stored in this file,
but when opened into a model, each note
can be placed individually.
Click the Retrieve button to open a
Graphics Text file to add text to a Results
display.
Review
10.4.8.4
Static notes displayed on a model will be shown for all models when the Design
Review Center is active. Model notes, however, are only shown on the model on
which they were created.
10-17
Review
10.5
Results
Step1
Step3
Result sets that are added to the Active group can be animated. This is very useful
for visualizing time dependent data. The next section describes animation of time
steps.
10-18
Review
10.6
Animate
Once result sets are made Active on the Results tab, hit the Animate tab to view the
animation:
Review
Play Forward
Play In Reverse
Single Frame
Reverse
Stop
Single Frame
Advance
Pause
Use the VCR controls to control the animation. Animated files can be played forward or in reverse as well as stopped, paused, and advanced by frame forward or
reverse. Click the Cycle box to alternate between playing the animation forward
and then in reverse.
The speed of the animation is controlled with the Frame Interval value (in milliseconds).
Use the controls on the Results task dialog to set up the view. Results objects can
be added, removed, and manipulated during the animation. Additionally, cutting
plane bulk data can be output for all active sets during an animation.
10-19
Review
10.7
10.7.1
Report Generation
Introduction
10-20
Review
10.7.2
A default report template is automatically created for every analysis after the analysis is processed (run for 0 iterations or more). Located under Review_Report, the
template lists the items that will be placed into a report when it is generated:
Review
Items can be modified, suppressed, and moved within the template. New items can
be added as well. This section describes the basic process of manipulating the contents of a report and a description of the entities in the report template.
10-21
Review
10.7.2.1
Template Columns
The template layout is divided into two columns: the Template Items on the left
and the Values on the right. The names of the Template Items and the Value of
default items cannot be changed. Values of user-created Items can be changed,
however.
10.7.2.2
Entity Types
There are two primary types of entities in the report template: Text Lines and
Referenced Files.
Text Lines
Text Lines are single lines of text, and include the Report Title, Report Date,
Author name, Analysis Name, and Section names. The contents of each text
line is shown in the Value column in the report template.
Note that the Report Date, Analysis Name, and Section names of default sections
cannot be changed. (The names of user-created sections are modifiable, however.)
These items can be suppressed from the report by right clicking on the item, and
unchecking Include.
Referenced Files
File References are references to external files that are to be included in the report.
They are typically descriptive text files, vtf files, graphics files, and output files such
as the Summary file.
The Referenced Files that are included by default are:
Corporate Logo
Summary File
Setup Parameters
Model Image
Convergence
Plot
Thermal Summary
The two User Text Entries do not contain any text, and are not part of the report
until the user adds text and saves them. A ? beside the entry indicates that the
10-22
Review
file does not exist. After text is added and the file saved, the ? will disappear from
the report template.
10.7.2.3
Basic Usage
Right click on file name, and uncheck Include.
To include a suppressed file, right click and check
Include.
Exclude a Section
Click on an entity, and click the Up or Down buttons near the bottom of the task dialog. Move an
entire section by first clicking on the section
header, and then hitting the Up or Down buttons.
10-23
Review
Review
Create a Section
Delete a Section
If the Report task dialog is showing when a properly named vtf file is created, click the Refresh
button to automatically add it to the Graphics
section.
Create a Report
10.7.3
By default, analysis reports consist of five sections: Creation Info, Model Description, Analysis Summary, Graphics Files, and Conclusions. All sections are included
by default in the report except Graphics. The Graphics section is enabled automatically, however, if there are vtf files named according to the convention described in
the Graphics section description.
This section describes the default contents of each section.
10-24
Review
10.7.3.1
Introduction
This section contains basic information about the origin of the report.
Corporate Logo: The file and location of
this graphical file are set in the User-Preferences dialog, found under the File main
menu item.
Report Title: The analysis name is used
by default, but can be changed.
Report Date: The current time and date
when the report is generated.
10.7.3.2
Review
Model Description
10-25
Review
10.7.3.3
Analysis Summary
The files containing the text files describing the analysis results are included in this
section.
Summary File: An output file that is
automatically saved. It contains a summary of the analysis results, results at
openings, and energy balance.
Convergence Plot: A bitmap of the Convergence Monitor.
Thermal Summary: An output file that is
automatically saved. It contains the temperature data for every solid in the analysis model.
10-26
Review
10.7.3.4
Graphics Files
10.7.3.5
Conclusions
This section provides a place to summarize the pertinent findings of the analysis.
Conclusions User Text Entry: A blank
text file that can be used to enter conclusions. The ? adjacent to the entry means
that no text has been saved to the file.
10-27
Review
10.7.4
To view the report that is defined by the template, click the Generate Report button near the bottom of the task dialog. An HTML-based report will then be created
and will open in Internet Explorer, if available. All of the items contained in the
template (but not suppressed) will be included in the report. A table of contents
with linked entries is included on the left side of the window for easier navigation.
Part of a sample report is shown:
All vtf files will be navigable, and will contain any animation present at the time of
file creation. Because the vtf files use an ActiveX plug-in to be viewed within the
HTML document, the CFdesign Communication Center must be installed on a computer to view the vtf files. This is automatically installed as a part of the CFdesign
installation. To view a report on a computer without a CFdesign installation, download the CFdesign Communication Center from the CFdesign web site (www.cfdesign.com).
Note that Internet Explorer (by Microsoft) is required to view the report. This is due
to the fact that the vtf files require an ActiveX plug-in (described above) for viewing
in applications other than the CFdesign Viewer. When a report is opened in IE, a
security message may appear prompting for approval to show the images. This is a
10-28
Review
Windows security measure, but you should select the choice allowing the images to
show.
All included and generated files in the report are placed into a sub-folder of the
working directory created when the report is generated. This sub-folder is named:
Analysis_Report_analysis name_0001
where analysis name is the name of the CFdesign analysis model. The number
appended to the folder name is incremented each time the report is generated. This
means that each time a report is generated, it is a new report, and does not overwrite a previous version.
10.7.5
A default template (or report layout) is included with the CFdesign installation.
However, to save a modified template for use with other reports, click the Save
button from the Template group in the task dialog:
This will prompt for a template name, which will have the extension .dcctmp.
(This stands for Design Communication Center Template.) This file will contain
every item in the customized report in the same order.
User-created and added Referenced files (graphics and text files) will not be explicitly saved in a template, but blank entries for them will. A U will appear adjacent
to each user-added or created entity.
User-created sections are included in the template as well. When a saved template
is applied to a new report layout (by clicking the Open button) user-created section
names appear in the template.
10-29
Review
This folder contains all of the files needed to view the report. To send the report to
another person, simply send all of the contents of the report folder.
Review
To make a customized template the default template for all subsequent reports,
enter the location and name in the File_Preferences dialog:
The template that is created or used for a report is saved as part of the analysis to
a separate file called analysis-name.dccrt. This file is read when the analysis file is
opened, and all template settings applied automatically. The reason for this is to
allow easy modification of a report. Because it is not possible to edit an HTML document, modification of a report is performed within the CFdesign analysis file by
manipulating the report template. Modification, relocation, addition, or removal of
referenced files is performed directly on the template. When completed, simply
generate a new report.
10.7.6
Project Reports
A report format for projects is available by clicking the Project Report box at the
bottom of the task dialog. Note that this option is only available while a project is
open.
When unchecked, the report template will be for the current analysis. It behaves as
described above.
10-30
Review
However, when checked, the report format changes so that project-specific information can be added. The Creation Info section is still positioned at the beginning
of the report, but it is followed by a Project Description section. This consists of the
project name and a User-Text Entry line for description.
A single graphics section automatically includes all of the graphics from the Graphics section of each analysis in the project. This is the ideal place to include vtf files
that show animation of Design Review Center results. They can be created in any
analysis file, and should be named with the appropriate naming convention to
ensure inclusion in the report.
Additionally, the Model Description and Analysis Summary sections from each analysis report are automatically added to the Project report.
Project Name
Review
10-31
Review
This is a powerful way to compare results from many analyses in a design study.
The Model Description and Analysis Summary sections are read directly from the
respective analysis report templates. Customizations made to either of these sections will be included in the Project report. Likewise, any modifications made to one
of the sections while in the Project report mode will be migrated back to the Analysis report template.
As in an analysis report, text files can be created or added to the report. If placed in
an analysis-specific section, they will be included in that analysis report. If a vtf file
is created using the naming convention described in the Graphics section above,
then it will be included in the appropriate analysis report as well.
Project templates can be customized as well. Sections can be moved, items can be
added and removed. Project templates can be saved using the Save button in the
Template group. A project template can be applied to subsequent projects by clicking the Open button in the Template group or by setting the default Project Template in File_Preferences.
10-32
CHAPTE R 11
11.1
Viewing Results
Introduction
CFdesign has a powerful set of results visualization tools to help view, extract, and
present analysis results quickly, easily, and efficiently. An integrated feature tree
lists display entities, and several ways to output graphical images and data make
communicating your analysis results with other members of the design supply chain
very easy.
The Results dialog task is more than just a post-processor: it is the way to view
results during the calculation. CFdesign has had Run-Time Results viewing capability for several years, but this is the first time that the run-time results viewing environment is the same as the post-analysis results environment.
The Results-specific icons, the Feature Tree, and the Results dialog task are all discussed in this chapter. There are several icons that are unique to the Results task,
and make viewing results easier. The Feature tree contains a summary of the settings that were in effect for the displayed results. Finally, the Results dialog task is
divided into four tabs: Cut Surface, Iso Surface, Wall, and Settings. Most of these
tabs are divided into further sub-tabs for clarity.
11-1
Viewing Results
11.2
Results-Specific Icons
Most of the icons in the user interface are discussed in Chapter 2 -- the User Interface Chapter. However, there are several icons that are specific to post-processing,
and are discussed here:
Save Image. This saves a jpeg, bitmap, gif, or tif image
of the current contents of the Graphics Region.
Save Dynamic Image. This saves a .vtf file, which is
an image that can be viewed in the free viewer distributed with CFdesign. It can also be viewed in PowerPoint,
Word, or Internet Explorer if the free plug-in is installed
(details later in this chapter). This image is navigable--it
can be panned, rotated, and zoomed by the viewer.
Left: Save View Settings. This saves post-processing
views and objects such as cutting planes and iso surfaces.
Right: Open View Settings: This retrieves and applies
saved views and objects. A settings file can be opened on
a model different from the original model.
Note: non-planar cutting surfaces (described later) cannot be saved to a View Settings file.
11-2
Viewing Results
Shaded Image.
The model is shown
filled.
Outline Image.
The outline of the
model is shown.
Viewing Results
Transparent. This
works in conjunction with a shaded
image, and makes
the model transparent.
11-3
Viewing Results
Peel by Surface.
Toggles between
surface and volume
blanking (with the
right-mouse-button). Default is volume blanking.
(Note: surface peeling is not available
for parts with
assigned motion
(Moving Solids).)
11-4
Viewing Results
Crinkle Cut
The Crinkle Cut provides a
three-dimensional interior
view of the analysis mesh. This is a
visually interesting and very useful
way to examine the element distribution, transitions, and shape within
the model.
This view is controlled with the ZClip dialog. Check the Crinkle-Cut
box to show the model in this manner
When crinkle-cut is enabled, the
model is automatically shown in
shaded mode, and the mesh is displayed.
Viewing Results
11-5
Viewing Results
Mirror
Part mirroring reflects displayed
geometry about a plane. This is
very useful for results on models that
have been divided by symmetry.
The Mirror icon opens the Mirror dialog
box.
Check the Mirror Enabled box to activate mirroring.
A model can be reflected about a single
plane at a time.
There are two ways to set the reflection
plane:
Select any planar surface on
the model when this dialog is
open.
Click the X-Y, Y-Z, or Z-X
buttons to reflect the model
about the Cartesian planes.
Mirroring is active after the dialog is
closed, if it was not disabled.
11.3
Feature Tree
The Results Task Feature Tree behaves differently from the Feature Tree shown in
the other tasks. Most of the branches are informational only, and do not allow any
modification to assigned settings. The Length Units, Coordinate System, Boundary
and Initial Conditions, and Mesh Size branches behave this way.
11-6
Viewing Results
Additionally, each of the branches lists the settings that were assigned to produce
the current results. If a boundary condition or mesh size is changed after results
are obtained, they will not be listed on branches of the Results Feature Tree until
the analysis is run with the new settings. However, any new settings will be listed
on the feature tree for the other tasks.
11.3.1
Analysis Settings
The Boundary Conditions, Initial Conditions, and Mesh Size branches list the
settings for the current analysis, and left clicking on the entity label (volume,
surface, or edge label) will cause that entity to highlight. This is a convenient way
to determine the location of settings while viewing Results. Click the label again to
turn off the highlighting.
11.3.2
Materials
The Materials branch lists each material and the associated parts.
Left clicking on a part label causes that part to highlight in the Graphics region.
To remove the highlighting, left click again on the part label.
11-7
Viewing Results
Right clicking on a specific material branch brings up a menu with display controls that are applied to all parts with that material.
Viewing Results
Right clicking on a part label brings up the same display control menu but
applies only to that part.
Most of these commands are view settings,
and perform the same function as the tool-bar
icons described earlier.
Additionally:
Visible toggles the visibility of the part.
Transparent displays the part with transparent surfaces.
Set Transparency Value opens a dialog
allowing control of the transparency level. A
value of 0% is opqaue; a value of 100% is
completely transparent.
Show Results toggles the display of analysis
results on the part.
Show Color opens a Color Palette dialog for
assigning colors to parts. Results are not
shown on a part when it is colored.
11.3.3
Results
The result selected from the Scalar branch of the Feature Tree is the globally displayed result. The result selected here will show on all surfaces of the model.
This is important to note because cutting planes and iso-surfaces can display a
result different from the global result.
If a desired quantity does not appear in the Results_Scalar list, then you should
return to the Analyze task, and click the Result Quantities button. Select which
quantity you want displayed, and run the analysis zero iterations (ensure the last
iteration is shown in the Continue From menu). When you return to Results, the
quantity will be available in the Feature Tree.
11-8
Viewing Results
Results
If an analysis has multiple saved results sets
or time steps, by default the last set will be
visible. To select a different set to view, go into
the Results task, and right click on the Results
branch of the Feature Tree. A menu will appear
showing all the saved results sets and time
steps.
Select the desired set from the list. Results
from the selected set will then be displayed.
Scalars
All the entries under the Scalars heading are single-component quantities, and do
not have a direction. Toggle between quantities simply by clicking on the desired
one.
The right click menu for each scalar quantity looks like
Reference Frame is described below.
11-9
Viewing Results
Viewing Results
Note that values on XY plots, the bulk calculations, and wall results always
use the analysis units system, and will not be updated when a different
units system is chosen from the Feature Tree menu.
Reference Frame is only available for Velocity Magnitude. This allows the user to
toggle between the Absolute and Relative velocity frames. Applies to velocity
magnitude fringe display and velocity vector display. This is most applicable for
rotating analyses:
relative velocity = absolute velocity - rotating component.
Vectors
The Vectors branch has multiple components. Click on a vector quantity to control
its visibility in the Graphics Window. Note that this controls only the visibility of vectors on surfaces of the model. Vector display throughout the interior of the model is
controlled by the cutting plane and iso surface dialogs.
Each vector quantity has a right-click menu:
Visible controls the visibility of vectors on
the model surfaces. Uncheck to turn off the
vector display.
Settings toggles the Vector Properties dialog. This dialog will be discussed in the Settings section of this chapter.
11-10
Viewing Results
11.3.4
Groups
Groups of surfaces can be used in the Wall Calculator, however, by right clicking in
the List region of the Wall dialog, and selecting the appropriate group of surfaces.
11.3.5
Annotations
11-11
Viewing Results
The groups branch lists every group that had been created prior to running the
most recent set of iterations or time steps. Because groups are composed of geometric entities, and the displayed entities in Results mode are all based on the analysis mesh, there is no facility for direct visualization or manipulation of groups or
group entities through the feature tree.
Viewing Results
11.4
Entity Blanking
In the default mouse mode, right clicking on an object will cause it to be blanked
(hidden) from view. Click the right mouse button off of the model to re-display all
blanked items. Click the middle mouse button to re-display the last blanked item or
to undo a total re-display command.
By default, right clicking on the model blanks the volume that it touches. To enable
surface blanking, click the Volume/Surface toggle tool button to Surface (pressed
in):
11.5
Result values can be probed on any surface--walls, openings, slip faces, internal
fluid surfaces, etc. To probe on any surface: Hover the mouse over the area of
interest and hold down the shift and control keys simultaneously.
11-12
Viewing Results
The value of the active scalar will be displayed in the Status bar:
11.6
Color Legends
Each time the global result is changed in the Feature Tree, the color legend updates
to show the new quantity. Additionally, because each cutting plane and iso surface
can show a unique result quantity, a new color scale is drawn for each unique quantity.
The following graphic shows a model with velocity magnitude as the global result
(which only shows on the surfaces of the model), static pressure as a cutting plane
Viewing Results
11-13
Viewing Results
quantity, velocity magnitude is shown on the other cutting plane, and u-velocity as
an iso-surface quantity:
Each color legend has a title that indicates which display entity is displaying the
result, and the units of the result quantity
11.7
Cutting Surfaces
Cutting surfaces are the primary post processing tool for visualizing data on three
dimensional models. Traditionally, cutting surfaces have been used simply to visualize fringes or vectors on a planar slice through the model. In CFdesign, cutting
surfaces have several additional roles:
They
They
They
They
In addition to the user-interface roles of the cutting surface, results can be probed
at any location on a planar cutting surface by holding down the shift key, and positioning the mouse at the point of interest. The value at that location will be shown
11-14
Viewing Results
in the status bar at the bottom of the interface. The units of this value correspond
to the units selected from the Scalar branch of the Feature Tree.
Shown are examples of a planar (left) and a non-planar cutting surface (right)
showing fringe (color) results:
Viewing Results
11-15
Viewing Results
The basic cut surface controls are always visible on the dialog. Additional controls
and other functionality such as particle traces, bulk values, and xy plots are
accessed through tabbed dialogs on the Cut Surface dialog.
11-16
Viewing Results
11.7.1
The Cut Surface Tools control the basic location and orientation of the cut surface,
and can be accessed when any of the cut surface sub-tabs is active:
11.7.2
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Step 1 Step 7
Viewing Results
The Controls tab contains advanced options for controlling cutting surface appearance. This tab provides controls for the appearance of scalar and vector data as
well as the creation of non-planar cutting surfaces
CFdesign Users Guide
11-17
Viewing Results
11.7.2.1
Appearance
Shaded toggles visibility of the cutting surface. (Uncheck to make cutting surface disappear.)
Vectors toggles display of vectors.
Color by Scalar toggles the display
of the scalar quantity on the cutting
surface.
Clip cuts the model with the planar
cut surface.
Show Grid toggles the display of the
vector display grid. This is only available for planar cutting surfaces.
Show Mesh toggles the display of the
mesh on the cutting surface. For planar cutting surfaces, this is the interpolated mesh at the current location
of the surface. For non-planar cutting
surfaces, this mesh is the mesh that
was on the source surface(s).
11-18
Viewing Results
11.7.2.2
Vector Spacing
11.7.2.3
Viewing Results
11-19
Viewing Results
11.7.2.4
group.
2. Select Surface from the Shape
pull-down menu.
3. To define the shape of the cutting
surface, click the Source Surface(s)
button.
4. The Select Source Surface(s)
dialog will come up. Select surfaces on
the model by left clicking on them.
5. Click the OK button to end the
selection process.
The cutting surface will then be created,
and will overlay the source surface(s).
As it is moved through the calculation
domain, it will be colored by the Cut
Surface Scalar at its local position.
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
11-20
Viewing Results
Step 2
Step 3
Viewing Results
Step 1
11-21
Viewing Results
Morphing
Morphing a cutting surface means that
its shape will change as it is moved
between the source and the target. One
of the steps described below is how to
define the target.
Step 2
Step 1
Step 3
Step 4
5. Move the slider to morph (convert) the cutting surface from the
source to the target.
Step 5
11-22
Viewing Results
Distortion may occur when morphing surfaces if the angle between the source and
target is greater than approximately 110 degrees. The reason is that the transformation rays between the source and target can be multi-valued. Below is an example of this. The source was the roof of the car; the target was the planar surface
cutting through the car.
In the following graphics, the source was the roof of the car, but the target was the
surface of the wind tunnel opposite the car. The surface is shown at four positions
of its morph:
Viewing Results
11-23
Viewing Results
As mentioned, the choice of source and target surfaces plays a significant role in
the level of distortion that will occur during the morph. Reasonable morphing can
really only be obtained in the following two scenarios:
If the surfaces to be morphed completely surround a volume, then source and target surfaces must completely enclose their respective volumes without any gaps.
The best types of volumes are shaped such that a direct line of sight exists between
every face and the centroid of the volume.
If the morphing surfaces do not completely enclose a volume, then the source and
target surfaces must be shaped such that they can be mapped (or projected) onto a
flat plane. The key is that there must be a one-to-one correspondence to get a useful mapping. An example of a surface that does not meet this criteria is shown:
cylinder
plane
Points A and B both map to point C. This produces a non-unique mapping which will
result in a lot of distortion.
11-24
Viewing Results
Offset Surface
This mode scales a non-planar cutting surface while preserving its original shape.
Step 2
Step 1
A non-planar cutting surface that has been offset is shown: Both the expanded
(left) and shrunk surfaces (right) are shown:
Viewing Results
Note: non-planar cutting surfaces cannot be stored as part of a View Settings file.
Any non-planar cutting surfaces saved as part of a view settings file will not be
restored when the View Settings file is open on a model.
11-25
Viewing Results
11.7.2.5
Rotate
The tools in the Rotate group allow the user to rotate a cutting surface about its
centroid, any of the Cartesian axes, or a user-defined axis.
Step 6
Step 1
Step 5
Step 4
Step 3
Step 2
The Centroid selections mean that the cutting surface will rotate about an axis in
the x, y, or z direction that passes through the centroid of the surface.
The Global axis selections cause the cutting surface to rotate about the selected
global axis. This can be very useful for cutting surfaces in an impeller that rotates
about a Cartesian axis. These selections are only available for non-planar cutting
surfaces.
11-26
Viewing Results
Note: The Axis Pt. and Axis Dir fields are grayed out when any of the Centroid or
Global components are selected.
The User Defined option will cause the Axis Point and Axis Dir fields to be editable.
Specify the axis of rotation by entering a point through which the axis passes (Axis
Point) and the direction of the axis by entering a unit vector (Axis Dir). Both entries
can be entered by separating the three components with spaces or commas.
11.8
Particle Traces are similar to an injected dye in the flow. They are a very useful
method of visualizing the flow distribution. Hit the Trace tab on the Cutting Plane
dialog for particle trace controls. There are three sub-tabs for particle traces: Sets,
Attributes, and Mass. Each is discussed below:
Viewing Results
11-27
Viewing Results
11.8.1
Sets
11-28
Viewing Results
Circumferential
Radial
Settings made on these two tabbed dialogs apply to the trace set highlighted on the
Sets field.
11.8.1.1
Residence Time
The time that each trace takes to traverse through the model is its residence time.
This value is listed in the Edit Sets region of the Particle Trace dialog for each trace.
This value will be changed depending on whether the trace has mass or not.
Each trace is listed within its group. Groups of particle traces are listed as well.
When a trace is selected from the list, it will change color in the Graphics window to
provide a graphical indication of its location.
11-29
Viewing Results
Viewing Results
11.8.1.2
Delete individual particle traces by selecting the trace from the list, and click the
Delete button:
Step 2
Step 1
Delete an entire trace set by highlighting the group name and clicking the Delete
button.
11-30
Viewing Results
11.8.2
11.8.3
Massed Particles
By default, particle traces are the traces a particle without mass would take if it
were released in the flow. A more physically real visualization technique is to
include the effects of mass on the particle. The resulting trace will behave more like
a physical substance within a flow system.
Massed particle traces are only drawn forward, not backward, so it is best to position the seed points near the inlet of the geometry.
Inertial and drag effects are taken into account, and if a particle has too much inertia to turn a corner, it will hit the wall. Massed particles will bounce when they strike
a wall. They will also bounce when they strike a symmetry surface. The coefficient
of restitution can be specified to control the amount of bounce in a collision.
11-31
Viewing Results
Attributes:
Viewing Results
There are several capabilities that allow a great deal of flexibility to the visualization
of massed particles. The most basic is the ability to select units required quantities:
particle density and particle radius. Other functionality include a user-prescribed
initial path, the inclusion of gravity, and the ability to customize the drag correlation by modifying the coefficients.
These features are located in the Mass sub-tab of the Trace dialog:
11-32
Viewing Results
11.8.3.1
Enter the density and radius of the particle, and select the desired units for both
quantities, respectively. The default density is the fluid density, and the default
radius is based on the bounding box of the
model.
11.8.3.2
Coefficient of Restitution
V 2f V 1f
C = -------------------V 2i V 1i
Viewing Results
V 2f
C = -----V 2i
The range of values of the coefficient of
restitution is between 0 and 1. A value of
0 is an inelastic collision, and the particles
stick when they hit the wall.
A value of 1 is a perfectly elastic collision,
and particles have the same velocity (and
kinetic energy) after the collision.
The default value is 0.5.
11-33
Viewing Results
11.8.3.3
Initial Path
11.8.3.4
Gravity
Check the Enable Gravity for Massed Particles to include the effects of body forces
on particle traces. Enter the components
of the force in the X, Y, and Z boxes.
For Earths gravity, check the Earth box,
and enter a unit vector to indicate the
direction in which gravity acts.
11.8.3.5
24
c
C d = ------ ( a + bRe )
Re
11-34
Viewing Results
11.8.4
Massed particles with a Coefficient of Restitution value of 0 are shown on the left.
The traces on the right have a value of 1:
For Rotating Region analyses, select Relative Velocity from the Feature Tree to
show particle traces in the relative frame. To do this, right click on Velocity Magnitude from the Results branch, and select Relative Velocity. This will show the flow
with the rotating velocity component subtracted out. An example is shown on the
right above.
11-35
Viewing Results
Viewing Results
11.9
This feature quickly calculates and shows bulk-weighted results on a planar cutting
surface. Bulk (mass-weighted) results are automatically updated as the active cutting surface is moved:
Step 2
Step 3
Step 5
Step 4
11-36
Viewing Results
Bulk output files are saved in Excel comma separated variable (csv)
format instead of a simple text format. This allows bulk output files to be
readily opened into Excel for further results processing.
11.9.1
The Design Review Center (DRC) is an easy, powerful tool for assessing results
from multiple analyses in a project. The DRC has now been extended to the Bulk
calculator so that bulk data from multiple analyses can be saved to a single output
file. When the DRC is active, click the Save button on the Bulk dialog. An Excel CSV
file will be written that contains the bulk data from the active cutting plane for
every active analysis in the project.
11.10
11.10.1
11-37
Viewing Results
Viewing Results
1. Select the method of point selection: Add by Picking, Add by Keyin, or Read from File.
Step 1
Step 2
Step 4
Step 3
11-38
Viewing Results
11.10.2
The XY Plot
Viewing Results
11-39
Viewing Results
11.10.2.1
This is the quantity plotted on the Y axis. The X axis quantity is the parametric distance along the path between selected points.
11.10.2.2
The Y axis label of XY plots now shows the units of the dependent variable:
This adds clarity to the plot, and improves communication of CFdesign results with
others.
11-40
Viewing Results
The units can be changed by right clicking anywhere on the XY plot, and selecting
Units from the menu. Choose the desired units for the dependent variable from the
list:
The Y-axis label will be modified to show the new label, and the Y-axis values will
be converted to the selected units.
11.10.2.3
11-41
Viewing Results
The labels for both axes can be changed by right clicking on the plot, and selecting
either Change X-Axis Label or Change Y-Axis Label:
Viewing Results
Pressing the Set Default button will return the axis label to its default value.
The Display Min/Max Values box controls the appearance of the axis extremes.
Unchecked, the min and max values will be removed from the label.
11.10.2.4
The plot background color can be changed from the default blue by right clicking on
the plot, and selecting Background Color:
11-42
Viewing Results
Customize the color to make the plot easier on the eyes or easier to print.
11.11
Iso Surface
Iso surfaces are a three dimensional visualization tool that show a value as well as
the physical shape of the flow characteristics. They are very useful for visualizing
velocity distributions in complicated flow paths in addition to temperature distributions in thermal analyses. Iso surfaces can be used to determine the locations of
the maximum and minimum values in a model.
11-43
Viewing Results
11.12
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Wall
The Wall tab of the Results dialog task provides a way to calculate flow-induced wall
forces on wall surfaces of the model. Such forces are useful in many situations.
Examples include assessing the hydrodynamic force on internal valve components
for determining spring rate as well as calculating the lift and drag on aerodynamic
bodies.
In addition, this utility calculates wall temperatures, pressures, heat flux, and film
coefficients on walls. The torque about an axis as well as the center of force are
also calculated.
11-44
Viewing Results
The Wall Results tab is broken into two sub-tabbed dialogs: Selection-and-Result
and Output. The former is used for selecting surfaces and the desired calculation
value. The latter displays the results.
11.12.1
When this dialog is invoked, surfaces on the model will highlight when the mouse is
hovered near them.
When the Selection Mode is Volume, volumes will highlight when hovered over,
and can be selected. Note that the surfaces belonging to the picked volume are
actually be added to the selection list.
(List Region)
Step 3
Viewing Results
Step 1
Step 4
11-45
Viewing Results
Forces are the overall stress tensor--both pressure and shear are integrated over the surface. Force components and magnitude are output for
each surface. Total force for all selected surfaces is also given. To remove
very low wall pressures from the force calculation (which may indicate the
on-set of cavitation), check the Cutoff Pressure box, and enter a minimum pressure value. All pressure values that fall below the Cutoff (on the
selected surfaces) will be re-assigned to the cutoff pressure value for the
wall calculation. (This cutoff does not affect the displayed results fringes or
any other output quantity.)
For moving solids, the computed force and torque are the hydraulic values, and do not include the effect of specified driving and resistance forces
or torque as part of the Motion definition.
Pressure is the average pressure exerted by the fluid on the wall surface.
Temperature is the average temperature on the wall surface. Note
that temperatures values from intermediate saved iterations or time steps
are not accessible on the Wall dialog.
Calculated Heat Flux is based on the thermal residual from the heat
transfer solution. Note that heat flux values from intermediate saved iterations or time steps are not accessible on the Wall dialog.
Film coefficient can be calculated in two ways: Enter a value for the
reference temperature or use the near wall temperature at every wall node
as the local reference temperature. The latter is done by checking the Use
near-wall temperatures box.
11-46
Viewing Results
11.12.2
Wall - Output
Viewing Results
11.13
Settings
The Settings tab of the Results dialog contains numerous settings for customizing
the display of scalars and vectors. Items such as the legend fringe range and the
vector sizing are controlled here.
11-47
Viewing Results
11.13.1
Settings - Scalar
11-48
Viewing Results
1. On the Settings tab of the Results dialog, click the Set to Part button.
2. Click on the desired part in the analysis model.
Viewing Results
11-49
Viewing Results
11.13.2
Settings - Vector
Attributes: Control the length of vectors with the Scale Factor. If the Scale
Relative to Model box is checked, this
value is between 0 and 1. Unchecked,
and it can be greater than 1.
The Arrowhead size can be varied from
0 (no arrow heads) to as big as necessary. The default size of 1 is based on
the average vector length.
Clamping: Sets maximum and minimum cut off values for vectors. Vectors
that fall outside of this range will be
resized to the length corresponding to
the maximum or minimum value, as
appropriate.
Filtering limits the display of vectors to
only those that fall within the specified
range.
Same Length: If enabled, all vectors
will be displayed as the same length.
The slider bar controls this length.
Hit the Apply button to implement
settings.
11.14
Traditionally, communicating analysis results was accomplished by creating numerous images in an attempt to convey the whole story to an audience (or a manager!). The creator of such images often has to create additional images once the
intended viewer decides they want to see the results from a different orientation or
they want to zoom in on a particular detail.
CFdesign takes Design Communication to a new level. With the introduction of the
Design Communication Center and the Dynamic Image, CFdesign users not only
share images, they can share the whole story. Unlike traditional bitmap, tif, and
11-50
Viewing Results
11.14.1
After setting up a view that you want to share, click the Dynamic Image icon:
You will be prompted to enter a name and location of the file. The extension is
.vtf.
11.14.2
If CFdesign is installed on your computer, then all of these files can be found in the
Design-Communication-Center sub-folder in your CFdesign installation folder,
and it is not necessary to run the CFdesign-Communication-setup.exe file.
11-51
Viewing Results
To view a Dynamic Image on a machine that does not contain a CFdesign installation, it is first necessary to run the Design Communication Center installation. This
file is called CFdesign-Communication-setup.exe, and is part of the CFdesign
installation (located in the Design-Communication-Center subfolder of your
CFdesign installation). It can be shared with anyone that wants to view Dynamic
Images. It can also be downloaded from the CFdesign web site. This will install the
Design Communication Center (the free viewer) and a few other files necessary for
viewing Dynamic Images.
Viewing Results
CFdesign Report
The Review_Report dialog contains a template for the CFdesign Report. The layout
of the report can be changed by using the right mouse-button menu for each item
to change its visibility, with the Up and Down buttons to change the order of items
and sections, and by adding additional text files and images.
11-52
Viewing Results
Dynamic Images that are named according to this naming convention will automatically be included in the report:
analysis name_g_image name
where analysis name is the name of the analysis (car, for example), and image
name is whatever descriptive name you want to use. Be sure to separate the two
names with the _g_.
Dynamic Images are automatically added to the Graphics section of the report.
When the report is generated, an HTML document is created that includes the
Dynamic Images:
Viewing Results
To view a CFdesign report, you should have the Design Communication Center
installed. (This is done automatically when CFdesign is installed). Use the CFdesignCommunication-setup.exe file to install it on other computers. This file is included
in the CFdesign installation (Design-Communication-Center folder), and can be sent
to anyone; additionally the file can be downloaded from the CFdesign web site.
CFdesign reports can only be viewed with Microsoft Internet Explorer. Care should
be taken to ensure that your browser security settings will allow the ActiveX plug-in
to display the Dynamic Images. If your images cannot be viewed from a CFdesign
CFdesign Users Guide
11-53
Viewing Results
report, check the security settings of your browser. If Dynamic Images do not
appear in your report, and you see the warning message shown in the following
graphic, then click on the warning message, and select the option to allow content:
PowerPoint
Prior to adding an image into PowerPoint, add the CFdesign dynamic image macro.
This adds a button into the PowerPoint menu, and makes adding images much easier:
installation, and select the add-in called ppt-dyn-img.ppa. This add-in uses a
macro, so a warning will come up about macros.
4. If the button does not appear, then you should reduce the security settings of
PowerPoint.
To add an image to a PowerPoint presentation:
2. A frame will be drawn in the presentation. Right click on the frame, and select
Properties.
11-54
Viewing Results
3. On the Properties dialog, enter the name of the image in the FileURL field.
Dynamic image files (files with the vtf extension) must reside in the same directory
as the PowerPoint presentation.
4. On the frame, hit the right mouse button, and select Properties.
11-55
Viewing Results
3. From the list of controls, select GLView 3D Plugin, and position the frame in
Viewing Results
5. On the Properties dialog, enter the name of the image in the FileURL field. It is
recommended that the dynamic image files (files with the vtf extension) reside in
the same directory as the document file.
11.15
When the Results dialog task is invoked when a Project is open (instead of an analysis), an additional dialog will appear below the Graphics Window:
This is the Design Review Center, and is used to view results from all the analyses
in a project.
By setting up a view on one analysis and hitting the DRC-Compare button, all of
the analyses in a project will be presented with the exact same view attributes.
Using this dialog, one can flip from one analysis to the next manually, or hit the
11-56
Viewing Results
Play button on the VCR controls to automatically flip through all of the analyses.
The beauty of this is that each analysis is presented with the same color legend
scale and in the same manner--with the same cutting planes, iso surfaces, etc.
This is a great way to visualize results data from multiple design concepts, without
having to create dozens (or even hundreds) of static images. Also, because each
analysis is presented in the same manner, it eliminates having to set up multiple
viewing panes on the screen and trying to make each one look the same.
More information about the Design Review Center is presented in the Projects chapter of this Guide.
Viewing Results
11-57
Viewing Results
11-58
CHAPTE R 12
12.1
Introduction
CFdesign results can be applied as boundary conditions for FEA analyses using several popular FEA tools: Nastran, Abaqus, Ansys, Pro/Mechanica, I-DEAS, and Cosmos, as well as FEMAP. This capability showcases one of the strengths of the finite
element approach, in that results can be shared across analysis platforms and used
for subsequent calculations quickly and easily. The ability to transfer results to
loads in this manner greatly strengthens the bond between flow and structural
analysis, making for a more comprehensive and useful analysis suite. As a critical
element in this suite, CFdesign allows flow analysis to be an integral part of the
product design process.
Pressure and temperature results are interpolated onto the FEA model, meaning
that the FEA mesh does not have to coincide with the CFdesign mesh. Most of the
time, these two meshes will be very different, as required by the particular analysis
tool. Additionally, the element types used in the FEA analysis do not have to be the
same as in the CFdesign analysis.
This chapter discusses the procedure for converting CFdesign results to FEA boundary conditions. Specific details for each supported FEA tool are presented.
12.2
Procedure
Steps 1 through 4 need to be completed in the FEA tool. Steps 5 through 9 are performed in CFdesign. Step 10 is performed in the FEA tool.
1. Prepare the FEA geometry. The model geometry must be in the same position
and orientation as the CFdesign analysis model.
2. Build the appropriate finite element mesh for your structural analysis. The
mesh does not have to have the same density or use the same element types as
the CFdesign mesh. Only those regions critical to the FEA analysis have to be
meshed.
CFdesign Users Guide
12-1
Analysis Deck
Nastran
.nas (or.dat)
Abaqus
.inp
Ansys
Pro/Mechanica
FEMAP
.neu
Cosmos
.gfm
I-DEAS
.unv
Step 6
Browse button.
7. Select the Results type to Map
(pressure or temperature).
8. Indicate if the direction of pressure should be reversed. (This is
specific to FEA tools--some direct
positive pressure inward, some outward.)
9. Hit the Map Results to BC button.
Step 7
Step 8
Step 9
10. A new deck will be written with results interpolated to the appropriate boundaries. This deck will have the words _new BC appended to the original name.
Return to the FEA tool, and import the new deck. The boundary condition values
will be the result values from CFdesign, and they will be interpolated to the new
nodal and/or elemental locations.
12-2
12.3
12.3.1
FEA Details
Nastran
12.3.2
Abaqus
12-3
Loads Transfer
12.3.3
Ansys
12.3.4
Pro/Mechanica
No input deck is required. An .fnf file with the same name as the analysis is output automatically for every analysis based on a Pro/E geometry.
Import the .fnf file into your Pro/Mechanica model.
Temperatures and pressure are included in this file.
CFdesign will output two versions of the fnf file format: one that is compatible with Pro/E 2001 and one that is compatible with Wildfire.
12-4
12.3.5
FEMAP
12.3.6
Cosmos/M
I-deas
12-5
Loads Transfer
12.3.7
12.4
12-6
The conversion of results to Pro/Mechanica loads is not performed through this dialog--a Mechanica .fnf file is saved automatically at the conclusion of every Pro/Ebased analysis that contains solid materials. If the flag mentioned above is enabled,
then a Mechanica file for each time step is automatically saved to the disk.
Loads Transfer
12-7
12-8
CHAPTE R 13
13.1
Projects
Introduction
Most of the description in this guide has been about setting up, running, and postprocessing an individual analysis. CFdesign has made this process very easy. In
fact, if product design was accomplished with just one or two analyses, our work
would be done. The reality of the situation however, is that design engineering
requires many analyses and a great deal of information to attain that much soughtafter final design.
Most traditional CFD tools are aimed at the dedicated analyst whose goal is often
to complete one large-scale, complicated analysis at a time. CFdesign is different.
CFdesign is a CFD package whose mission is to accelerate product development. It
is a design tool, and is developed for the product design engineer that isnt satisfied
with completing just one analysis--the product design engineer might require one
hundred analyses! The information learned from a single analysis is often not
enough to design a product--information from a multitude of analyses is required.
This is why the concept of the project was introduced into CFdesign 6. A project is a
collection of analyses--much like a CAD assembly is a collection of parts. The link
between analyses in a project is a strong one, and one that makes setting up, running, and post-processing a multitude of analyses a practical part of the product
design process.
13.2
13.2.1
13-1
Projects
When the flow and/or heat transfer through or around an object is calculated, an
analysis has been performed.
A project is a collection of analyses. The components that make up a single analysis can be shared with other analyses in a project. Projects provide a convenient
means of staging a large number of analyses for simultaneous execution using the
Fast Track Option (see the Analyze and Review chapter, Chapter 8). Projects furthermore simplify post-processing multiple analyses.
13.2.2
Requirements
13.3
13.3.1
Assembling a Project
Project Creation
13-2
Projects
from which the project was created will be in the project. The Feature Tree will look
something like:
Project Name
Projects
Analysis Name
Analysis Settings
When in a project, the project name is shown as the top branch of the Feature Tree.
Each analysis is a sub-branch. The settings for each analysis (mesh sizes, boundary
conditions, etc.) are listed as sub-branches for each analysis.
13.3.2
contemplated.
3. Before returning to the CAD system, create a new project from this
completed analysis using the Place Analysis in Project icon, and save
the project using the Save Project icon.
4. Shut down CFdesign, and return to the CAD system. Make the geometric change, and launch back into CFdesign.
5. Create a new analysis.
6. Hit the Place Analysis in Project icon, and select the project that was just
created.
13-3
Projects
7. Now the project has two analyses, and the new analysis can be set up by reading settings from the first analysis (see the next section).
Menu, and hit the New icon. Select Project on the Browse window, and
give the project a name.
3. Hit the Add Analysis into a Project icon, and select an analysis from
the browse window.
4. Once in the project, the analyses can be opened using the Feature Tree
(see the next section). Results from all of the analyses can be viewed using
the Design Review Center (discussed in a later section in the chapter).
Note: Individual analyses in a project can be saved by hitting the Save
Analysis icon. The entire project can be saved by hitting the Save
Project icon. This automatically saves all of the analyses in the project as
well.
13-4
Projects
13.4
Opening an Analysis
All analyses in a project are listed in the Feature Tree. The analysis with the +
beside its name is the open analysis. To open a different analysis, right click on its
name, and select Open.
The open analysis
The open analysis is the active one, and it can be interacted with as if it were open
as a single analysis outside of a project. Controls to set up, run, and view results
can be applied to the analysis. When a different analysis is opened, the previous
one is closed, and all settings and results shown are for the open one only.
Note: if an analysis is created from Pro/E and added to a project, only that analysis
corresponding to the active Pro/E session can be meshed. If a different analysis is
opened, it cannot be meshed. We recommend that on Pro/E models, the mesh be
generated (run 0 iterations) prior to opening any other analyses in the project.
13.4.2
One of the major strengths of the project is the ability to share settings between
analyses. All of the settings (analysis units, loads, mesh sizes, materials, and
options) can be imported from a completed analysis to a new one simply by using
the Feature Tree.
13-5
Projects
13.4.1
Projects
The new analysis (well call it the target) has to be open. Right click on its Analysis
branch in the Feature Tree, and hit Import Settings From. This will show a list of all
the other analyses in the project. Simply select the analysis that has the settings
that are to be applied to the new one, and they will be applied automatically.
This settings transfer works best if the two analyses are topologically similar. Parametric changes can exist between the two, but if the change was topological in
nature (added or deleted geometric features), then some settings may not be
applied automatically, and will have to be applied manually. An example is if a part
with an assigned heat generation load was removed from the model. The heat generation boundary condition would be lost from the model.
In this case and for the case in which an analysis is re-opened after geometric
changes, any settings that are lost are now listed in a small dialog. The user can
reassociate these settings to the model by selecting the geometric entity and then
the setting from the list.
If settings are lost (either because a topological change eliminated some geometry
or because of because the topology was changed too much), a Show Lost button
will appear on the appropriate dialog (based on the type of settings that were lost):
The Show Lost button will only appear on a dialog if settings of the dialog type are
lost.
13-6
Projects
When the Show Lost button is hit, a window will come up listing the lost settings:
Projects
The number to the right of the setting indicates how many instances of the condition were lost. Lost conditions can be applied to as many entities as desired, however.
For lost mesh sizes, the type of entity the condition was applied to (volume, surface, or edge) will be indicated in the list.
To reassign a lost setting, first select the geometric entity (or entities) in the model.
Select the setting from the list of lost settings. Hit Apply on the task dialog.
All lost lists will be cleared from the analysis when the analysis is saved.
13-7
Projects
13.4.3
This affects the order of the analyses when the Design Review Center is invoked.
13.4.4
Removing an Analysis
An analysis can be removed from a project by right clicking on the analysis name in
the Feature Tree, and selecting Remove from the menu. This will not delete the
analysis from the disk, but will only remove it from the project.
13.4.5
If an analysis is running, another analysis can be opened, and will appear in its current state. The running analysis will continue to run, although results and convergence information are not available for viewing until the analysis is opened again.
When it is opened, the results and convergence information from the current iteration will be displayed.
In conjunction with the Fast Track option (described in the Analyze chapter, Chapter 8), projects can serve as a central hub for running multiple analyses. Each analysis can be run on a selected analysis computer, and can be monitored from the
project. To inspect the progress of an analysis, simply open it from the Feature
Tree. That analysis will open in its current state, and can be interacted with while
running. It will continue to run even when a different analysis is opened for inspection.
13-8
Projects
When finished, results from all the analyses can be viewed in a truly novel manner...
Viewing Results
13.5.1
When the Results task dialog is invoked in an analysis in a project, the Design
Review Center controls appear below the Graphics window:
This simple dialog provides the ability to automatically apply a view from a single
analysis to all the analyses in the project.
Instead of toiling over multiple results panes to create the same view or printing
out a forest of paper, the Design Review Center makes it possible to view results
from a multitude of analyses quickly and easily. It is called the Design Review Center because it acts like an engineering design review meeting. By presenting
results from each analysis in exactly the same manner, everyone involved in the
CFdesign Users Guide
13-9
Projects
13.5
Projects
13.5.2
XY Plotting
An XY plot over a path can be created for all analyses in a project. Create the plot
on the active analysis, and start the DRC. Curves will be added to the plot showing
results along the same path for each analysis in the project. A legend on the plot
indicates the analysis for each curve.
13-10
Projects
13.5.3
Bulk Results
13.5.4
If an analysis has multiple saved results sets or time steps, by default the last set
will be viewed in the DRC. To select a different set to view, go into the Results task,
and right click on the Results branch of that feature tree. A menu will appear showing all the saved results sets and time steps:
Select the desired set from the list. Results from the selected set will be displayed
immediately, and when the DRC is invoked. This can be done for any analysis in the
project. The selected result set will be remembered, even when a different analysis
is opened.
13.5.5
By default all analyses in a project will be shown when the DRC is invoked. To prevent an analysis from being part of the DRC, right click the Analysis name, and
select Remove from DRC from the menu. To include it again in the DRC, select
Add to DRC from the right mouse button menu.
13-11
Projects
Bulk Results on a cutting plane are shown for each analysis in the DRC. To view the
results, create and position a cutting plane, and switch to the Bulk tab (under Cutplanes). Start the DRC. The Bulk results text information will update as the DRC
scroll bar is manually dragged between analyses. The text information will not
update if the frames are animated using the VCR play button.
Projects
13.6
The Design Review Server is an innovative union of Fast Track and the Design
Review Center. Fast Track is a system that distributes analyses to remote computers for running multiple analyses concurrently; as discussed, the Design Review
Center allows direct results comparison of multiple analyses in a consistent, easyto-use environment.
The Design Review Server distributes the results processing of analyses in a project
across available networked computers. Instead of opening and computing the
results visualization for every analysis on a single machine, the Design Review
Server transfers completed analyses to networked computers for computation of
the data model. This spreads out the computational burden of opening the analyses and computing the results visualization. The end result is a convenient way to
compare analysis results from numerous large analyses.
13.6.1
Set Up
The Design Review Server relies on computers on the same network, and is configured in the same manner as Fast Track. For a computer to be accessed by the
Design Review Server, it must satisfy all of the requirements to be a Fast Track
Analysis computer:
13-12
Projects
CFDESIGN USE_VIZSERVER 0
13.6.2
Distribution of Analyses
Most of the functions performed by the Design Review Server are transparent to
the user. The only user interaction is to assign analyses to available Design Review
Server computers on the network.
When a project containing completed analyses is either opened or an analysis is
added, a dialog will open that lists the available Design Review Server computers as
well as the analyses in the project. Existing analysis computer assignments are
listed (either from previous assignments or from their last Fast Track run). The
amount of memory on each computer is shown to assist in making new assignments or modifying existing ones.
The dialog and usage are shown:
To assign an analysis to a different computer, drag its name and drop it
onto the desired computer.
To assign all analyses to the local machine, click the Reset to Local
button.
When all assignments are made, click the Open Project button. This
will automatically distribute the display model for each analysis to the
assigned computer.
Check the Save Server Assignments box to store the assigned computers.
The Cancel button will assign all analyses to the local machine and
close the dialog.
13-13
Projects
If the conditions listed above are met, the Design Review Server will be enabled by
default. To disable the Design Review Server, add the following entry to your
cfdesign_flags.txt file:
Projects
13.6.3
The specific scenarios that cause this dialog to open are described. Note that the
term finished analysis refers to an analysis with results.
Open a project with two or more finished analyses. The Configuration dialog
will open, and default assignments are shown. (These are either saved assignments
or the original Analysis computer of the analysis.) Change assignments as necessary based on required memory and available memory on each machine.
From a project with one or more finished analyses, add a finished analysis.
The Configuration dialog will open, and the existing assignments will be shown. The
new analysis will be assigned to its analysis computer, but can be reassigned as
appropriate.
From a project with two or more finished analyses, add a a new analysis.
The Configuration dialog will open to allow assignment of the finished analyses. The
new analysis will not be listed on the Configuration dialog, but is assigned by
selecting the desired Analysis Computer on the Analyze dialog.
From a finished analysis, place into a project with one or more finished
analyses. The default assignment will be the analysis computer, but can be reassigned to a different available computer. Other assignments can be changed if necessary.
From a new analysis, place into a project with one or more finished analyses. The saved assignments for the completed analyses will be listed on the Configuration dialog, and can be modified. The new analysis will not be listed in the
Configuration dialog, but is assigned by selecting the desired Analysis Computer on
the Analyze dialog.
13.6.4
When an analysis is run on a Fast Track machine, the results visualization is computed on that machine as well. In previous versions of CFdesign, the display view
was computed on the local machine based on data sent back from the Solver
machine. This change is a by-product of the architecture of the Design Review
Server, and is more efficient, and better leverages the resources of the Solver
machine.
13-14
Projects
When an analysis is run on a Fast Track machine, the machine assignment (set on
the Analyze dialog) is stored, and is the default Design Review Server assignment if
that analysis is opened within a project.
Projects
13-15
Projects
13-16
CHAPTE R 14
14.1
Analysis Guidelines
Introduction
This chapter presents guidelines for various types of flow analyses. While the previous chapters in this Guide discussed the general operation of the software, this
chapter discusses some of the specific physical details of various flow conditions.
The suggestions offered should be used in conjunction with the Examples Manual.
The following analysis types are discussed:
Note that the first six items make up the Basic configuration. The Advanced
configuration is made up of the next eight items. The Motion Module is required
for Motion analyses. (The Advanced configuration is a pre-requisite for the Motion
Module.)
14-1
Guidelines
14.2
14.2.1
Incompressible Flows
Internal Flow
Internal flow is a very general category which describes the flow of a fluid that is
contained by and passes through a solid structure. There may be one or several
openings through which fluid enters and leaves the device. The solutions to internal
flow problems are among the most difficult to achieve in typical CFD (CFdesign is
hardly typical!), particularly for turbulent and compressible flows with complex
geometry. The reason is that there are often several flow regimes throughout different regions of the device, and hence the mathematical characteristics vary
widely through the calculation domain.
CFdesign has several tools to aid convergence for a wide range of internal flow
problems. These tools include the Automatic Turbulent Start-Up algorithm, AutoConvergence Control, and Auto-Stop. These algorithms work to prevent solution
instability or divergence, particularly in the early iterations.
Notes regarding incompressible internal flow:
1. Mesh Density in Gaps: When using any turbulence model there should be at
least five elements across inlet and outlet passages so that gradients can be properly resolved. Mesh Enhancement automatically ensures that this criteria is met.
2. Mesh Refinement: It is good practice to refine the mesh near openings so
that the boundary conditions correctly influence the flow in the interior. Generally
Automatic Mesh Sizing ensures this requirement is satisfied, but if not, the mesh
should be adjusted.
3. Outlet Configuration: At the outlet, where a uniform pressure is commonly
applied, there must not be any flow features which will conflict with this uniform
pressure boundary. Additionally, the flow should be approximately normal to the
14-2
Guidelines
plane of the outlet. Sometimes the boundary must be extended to achieve this
result. The following figure illustrates these concepts.
surfaces that meet at a corner. This often causes flow recirculation zones that can
lead to analysis instability. It is not physically possible to maintain the specified
pressure uniformly over all surfaces of a corner. The work-around is to extend the
opening and to apply the boundary condition to only one surface of the extension.
5. High Speed Jet: For flow situations in which a small, high speed jet of fluid is
blowing into a relatively large region filled with fluid, it has been found to be helpful
to change the Turb/Lam Ratio to 1000 or greater (the default is 100). This control
is accessed with the Turbulence button on the Options dialog task. An alternative
approach is to change the turbulence model to the Low Reynolds model. This will
resolve both the high and low levels of turbulence throughout the domain.
6. Pressure drop prediction of flow in a long straight pipe: When the pressure drop is caused by shear losses along the pipe walls instead of form drag due to
obstructions, the following technique should be used to calculate an accurate pressure drop:
Use an entry length of approximately 25 pipe diameters upstream of
the test section. This is to ensure fully developed flow at the entry of the
test section.
Use symmetry to reduce overall model size, if possible.
Apply a surface mesh size to the pipe wall such that there are eight
nodes for every 90 degrees of arc. Apply a volume mesh size to the pipe
that is two times the surface mesh size.
On the Mesh Enhancement dialog, select Automatic Layer Adaptation.
On the Analysis task dialog, click the Solution Control button, click the
Advection button, and select ADV3.
14-3
Guidelines
Guidelines
Also on the Solution Control dialog, click the Advanced button in the
Intelligent Solution Control group. Move the slider to Tight. These analyses
require more iterations to converge than models with form drag.
Run the analysis at least 600 iterations.
7. Internal Fans with fan curves: When a fan curve is used to describe an
internal fan material object, it is recommended to apply convergence control to
pressure if Auto-Convergence is not enabled. This will allow the solver to match the
correct flow rate from the curve to the system pressure drop in a stable manner.
When this occurs too quickly, the flow rate produced by the fan may oscillate which
in turn causes the system pressure to change too quickly. Additionally, if the internal fan is causing instability, refine the inlet and outlet surfaces of the fan part.
8. Low Pressure Limit: CFdesign provides a numerical solution of the NavierStokes (N-S) equations. The N-S equations assume that the fluid can be treated as
a continuum, and this assumption becomes inaccurate as the characteristic dimension of the flow path drops below 10 times the mean free path of the fluid. The
Knudsen number (Kn) is the ratio of the mean free path to the characteristic length.
Kn < 0.01: The N-S equations are accurate without any special treatment.
- 0.01 < Kn < 0.1: The N-S equations can be used in conjunction with
slip-wall boundary conditions.
- Kn > 0.1: The N-S equations no longer apply because the fluid cannot
be considered a continuum. This regime is often called molecular flow or
rarefied gas flow, and other equations and techniques are required. Physically, the regime occurs primarily with high-altitude flight, strong vacuum
applications, and flow through very small passages (such as in MEMs applications).
9. Bivarient non-Newtonian setup: To properly set up a bivarient non-Newtonian Fluid, you first need to curve fit your data to fit the following model:
14-4
Guidelines
the temperature in C, the natural log of the shear rate in inverse seconds
squared, the natural log of the shear rate in inverse seconds multiplied by
the temperature in C, and the temperature in C squared. Use the add-in for
data analysis and select Linear Regression with the y value as the first column, and the x values as the remaining columns. The six coefficients will be
output.
14.2.2
External Flow
These problems generally require the greatest number of nodes of any CFD calculation since the velocity and pressure boundary conditions applied at the exterior of
the flow domain must not affect flow features around the immersed body.
14-5
Guidelines
External flows are characterized by a solid body immersed in fluid that is moving
relative to the body. Nearly all engineering aerodynamic problems are external
flows. Examples include noise generated by a car mirror at highway speeds, the
drag on a motorcycle fairing, and the lift on a missile. Additionally, wind tunnel
models are usually considered external flows.
Guidelines
Apply slip conditions to any surfaces that are not openings unless the
boundary layer or ground effects are of interest against the wall.
4. Convergence: Note that convergence will often be slow, and the monitor will
show relatively flat lines well before the flow field is fully developed around the
body. Subtle differences in the pressure distribution may not be visible by only
reviewing the convergence monitor. This is why it is recommended to adjust the
Automatic Convergence Assessment to Tight when running external incompressible
analyses.
5. Accuracy of Drag Calculation: CFdesign has been used to calculate the drag
on aerodynamic bodies with a very high degree of accuracy. Such drag is due
almost entirely to form drag. Such calculations can be very sensitive to the applied
conditions in the model, and care must be taken to represent the physics as carefully as possible. This sensitivity is not unique to CFdesign, but is inherent to all
CFD tools. Some suggestions to improve accuracy of the drag calculation include:
The region around the object must be meshed with a very fine mesh.
More streamlined bodies require the mesh near the stagnation point of the
body to be highly refined to capture the rapidly changing coefficient of pressure.
Change the turbulence intensity to 0.01 (from the default of 0.05) for
wind tunnel analyses. This will more accurately represent the conditions in
an actual wind tunnel.
Reduce the turb/lam ratio to 10 (from the default of 100).
Use the ADV 3 advection scheme.
14-6
Guidelines
This section discusses conduction and the different types of convection. Radiation is
discussed in a subsequent section in the Advanced part of this chapter.
There are several variations of heat transfer analyses that can be performed using
CFdesign. They include: conduction, natural convection, forced convection and
mixed convection. Some of these can occur together in the same analysis. For
example, conjugate heat transfer includes both convection through a fluid and conduction through a solid. The following discussions present information about performing each of these types of heat transfer analysis.
14.3.1
Conduction
A conduction heat transfer analysis can be performed on fluid materials, solid materials, or a combination of both. For all cases, the correct properties (particularly
thermal conductivity) are necessary. Be sure to define the material properties on
the Material dialog task. Also, select Laminar from the Options_Turbulence dialog.
This will ensure that the correct conductivity is used in the fluid.
On the Options dialog, you should turn Flow to Off and Heat Transfer to On. Click
the Turbulence button, and turn turbulence Off (on the Options dialog). This will
use the laminar conductivities of the materials in the model. Additionally, the temperature convergence should be set to 1.0 on the Solution Control dialog launched
from the Analyze task (it is by default). If the material properties are not varying
with temperature, the analysis should only require 10 iterations to converge.
CFdesign Users Guide
14-7
Guidelines
14.3
Guidelines
14.3.2
Natural Convection
Natural and free convection flows are largely dominated by buoyancy forces. The
buoyancy forces are generated by density gradients which vary primarily with temperature since pressure gradients are relatively small in these flows. Natural convection flows may be laminar or turbulent depending on the Grashof number
associated with the flow. The Grashof number is defined as
3
gL T
Gr = -------------------
where g is the local acceleration of gravity, is the thermal coefficient of volume
expansion, L is a characteristic length of the surface in the direction of gravitational
acceleration, T is the temperature difference between the heated surface and the
undisturbed fluid and is the kinematic viscosity.
The Grashof number is a measure of the ratio of net buoyancy forces to viscous
8
forces. Transition to turbulence occurs at around Gr 4 10 .
Some prefer to use the Rayleigh number to characterize the flow. The Rayleigh
number is the product of the Grashof and Prandtl numbers. The Prandtl number is
defined as
C
Pr = ---------pk
For most gas flows, Pr 1 .
construct a box (the calculation domain) around the device. The box should be wide
enough so that the flow is not artificially accelerated. (If the side walls are too close
to the heated object, the flow may accelerate as in a nozzle). The top of the box
should be farther away than the base to allow for eddie currents downstream of the
object as the hot air rises. A good guideline for the size of this box is a height 10
times the vertical dimension of the device, and a width and depth that are 5 times
the respective width and depth of the device.
2. Boundary Condition Placement: Apply a pressure (of 0 gage) and a temperature to the top surface of the air domain, and leave the bottom surface a wall. In
addition, apply a temperature or a low convection coefficient value to the sides of
the box. This approach will produce correct flow and temperature patterns near the
object if the domain is large enough, even though in reality air may come from all
directions, not just the top.
14-8
Guidelines
14-9
Guidelines
the top and bottom openings of the domain, and a temperature to the bottom. In
most cases, air will flow in through the bottom-most opening (hence the applied
temperature), and out through the top-most opening. The surrounding surfaces
should be left as walls or have an applied slip condition.
4. Need for a Specified Temperature: It is very important that a temperature
be specified somewhere in the model (in addition to the known heat loadings). This
can be an applied temperature boundary condition, but can also be the reference
temperature for a film coefficient or radiation boundary condition. Without a specified temperature somewhere in the model, the temperature solution will not converge.
5. Need for a Specified Pressure: For some complicated geometries, it has
been found that a specified pressure somewhere in the model considerably helps
convergence as well. If possible, specify pressure on an outer solid surface, or on
some location that fluid cannot pass through. If no such convenient location exists
in the model, apply pressure AND a zero value velocity condition to some external
surface.
6. Convergence: While an external natural convection analysis is running, the
temperatures will often initially climb quite high (because the air is still moving very
slowly) and then will settle back down as the flow field develops. Natural convection
analyses usually require more iterations than internal flow problems to reach a
steady-state solution. The number of iterations required, and hence the total solution time, will be longer for a natural convection than for a pressure-driven flow
analysis. Solution progression is slowed by the fact that buoyancy forces are generally significantly larger than pressure forces.
7. Convection with Liquids: Because a larger temperature gradient is required
to cause buoyancy-driven movement in liquids, overall solution times can be
reduced by first inducing a temperature gradient through the fluid prior to running
the flow and thermal analysis. Do this by running 10 iterations thermal only (without flow). After a thermal gradient is achieved, flow and thermal should be run
simultaneously.
8. Meshing: When defining the mesh for buoyancy-driven analyses, more elements will be required in the interior of the domain (away from the solid boundaries) than for a pressure driven flow. The reason is that accurate representation of
the small density gradients is critical to computing the driving buoyancy forces correctly.
9. Analysis Setup: Some basic guidelines for setting up a natural convection
analysis include:
Be sure to select a property with Buoyancy on the Material task or
select Equation of State as the density variation in the Material Editor.
Guidelines
14.3.3
Forced Convection
If the heated or cooled air is being blown (by a fan, for example) through the solution domain, this is usually forced convection. In forced convection heat transfer,
the temperature does not influence the fluid material properties.
For this reason, the energy equation can and should be solved alone (Flow is Off
on the Options window) after the flow solution (velocity, pressure) has converged.
The problem with running flow and thermal together is that the thermal solution will
evolve very slowly due to the very small time scale required for the flow solution.
The thermal solution will converge much slower if run concurrently with flow. When
run separately, a larger time scale is used, and the thermal solution will typically
converge very rapidly.
As with the conduction heat transfer analyses, ten thermal-only iterations are typically sufficient for thermal convergence.
Note that you should not specify a gravity vector for forced convection analyses
(leave the gravity components set to 0).
14.3.4
Mixed Convection
In some heat transfer analyses, the heated or cooled air is blown but may contain
local temperature gradients that will cause some appreciable buoyancy effects. This
type of heat transfer is known as mixed convection, since it has features of both
natural and forced convection. There is not a good way to tell prior to the analysis if
the heat transfer is mixed or forced. To check, you should run a mixed convection
analysis after the forced convection analysis is finished. The steps required are:
14-10
Guidelines
1. Get a converged flow solution with Thermal set to Off on the Options window
and constant fluid properties on the Materials dialog.
2. Turn Flow to Off, and turn Heat Transfer to On on the Options window and run
5 iterations.
3. Set Flow to On, keep Heat Transfer On, and set the Gravity vector on the
Options dialog. Select a fluid property with Buoyancy in its name from the fluid
property data base or choose Equation of State for the functional form for density.
For the latter, set the appropriate parameters for this functional form.
4. Run 25 - 50 more iterations and examine the results for changes.
14.3.5
For conjugate heat transfer analyses, the solid material conduction and the fluid
convection are analyzed simultaneously. For this type of analysis, the type of fluid
convection (natural, forced or mixed) determines the analysis parameters. For
forced convection, you should again get a converged flow solution and then run the
forced convection analysis with the flow turned off for a few more iterations. If the
fluid convection is natural convection, you need to run the thermal equation analysis with the flow turned on for all iterations. For mixed fluid convection, follow the
steps outlined above.
14.4
Multiple obstructions in a geometry (holes in a baffle plate, for example) can conveniently be modeled using distributed resistance (porous media) materials. This
eliminates the need to mesh around every finite obstruction, thereby resulting in a
more efficient mesh.
Assign a distributed resistance material to a part by selecting the part and indicating the through-flow and cross directions. If such a material does not exist, create
CFdesign Users Guide
14-11
Guidelines
Many electronic cooling applications are in the mixed convection regime. The above
steps are recommended for these analyses. Temperature results should be
reviewed carefully after step 2 to ensure that unrealistically high temperatures
have not been predicted. This is generally an indication that buoyancy effects are
significant. In this case, continue on to step 3, BUT choose the previous iteration
from the Starting At menu on the Analyze dialog to start the thermal solution from
a constant temperature field instead of the unrealistic values.
Guidelines
one using the Material Editor. In the Material Editor, the through-flow and crossdirection resistances are required, as is the thermal conductivity. If the object that
is being represented with distributed resistances has a different thermal conductivity than the surrounding fluid, enter that value in the Material Editor as well. An
example of such a situation is air through a porous ceramic filter. The ceramic
material has a different conductivity from that of the surrounding fluid, and that is
entered as a property of the material.
There are 5 ways to enter flow resistances for these obstacles:
14.4.1
u
P = i ----i2
If you know the pressure drop, the velocity, and the density, you can back out the
value of . Enter this value for K.
In many situations, the loss in one direction will be significantly less than the loss in
the other two directions. To represent this, enter the calculated or estimated loss
coefficient for the through flow direction and some value four or five orders of magnitude higher in the cross directions. This will allow the flow to go in the desired
direction, and impede it in the other directions.
The Permeability value can be specified in conjunction with the Constant resistance
method as well as the Friction Factor method. This allows a resistance to be specified in the form:
2
V
P 1 P 2 = VL + -----------2
Where is the viscous resistance term, which is the reciprocal of permeability.
The value of permeability is required in the resistance Material Editor, and is used in
the pressure drop equation in the following manner:
14-12
Guidelines
1
= --
where is the value of permeability. The unit of permeability is the Darcy, and is
expressed in terms of length squared.
The term (in the above equation) is the standard loss coefficient.
The combined pressure drop equation is then:
2
1
V
P 1 P 2 = --- VL + -----------
2
Where:
Guidelines
14.4.2
ui
pf
-----= ------- L ----DH
x i
2
where f is the friction factor and DH is the hydraulic diameter of the obstructions.
Both of these values must be entered as material properties.
The friction factor can be calculated in one of two ways:
In the first method, the friction factor is calculated with the Moody formula. The
obstruction roughness height must be entered in the correct length units.
In the second method, the friction factor is determined from:
14-13
Guidelines
f = aRe
where Re is the Reynolds number based on the hydraulic diameter of the obstruction. If this method is chosen, the values for a and b are required. For this case,
note that the friction factor is dimensionless but the hydraulic diameter should be
entered in the correct length units.
Note that for both methods, the hydraulic diameter and the simulated pipe length
are required properties of the material.
14.4.3
To represent a perforated plate or a baffle that has a known open (free) area, use a
free area ratio. The free area ratio is the ratio of the open area to the total area of a
perforated plate:
A open
f = -----------A total
A value of 0 represents a completely closed direction. Enter a free area ratio for
each component direction.
14.4.4
A head capacity table controls the flow rate based on the calculated pressure drop.
14.4.5
A permeability can be input using the Darcy equation. Unlike loss coefficients which
have different resistance values in the three directions, a permeability provides a
constant resistance in all directions. An example is a packed bed of stones.
p
------- = Cu i
x i
where C is the viscosity coefficient, is the viscosity (of the surrounding fluid) and
ui is the velocity in the global i coordinate direction.
14-14
Guidelines
1
P 1 P 2 = --- VL
Multiple Fluids
CFdesign has the ability to handle multiple fluids in one model. Note that fluids with
different materials cannot come in physical contact with each other unless one or
more is a distributed resistance. Non-distributed resistance fluids can be connected
thermally (separated by a solid material).
To implement multiple fluids into an analysis, assign the fluids as appropriate,
ensuring that no fluids come in contact.
Examples where this is useful include an air-water heat exchanger or flow blown
over a sealed electronics component box. In the latter example, natural convection
might be important inside the sealed box, and forced convection may play a role
outside the box.
Note that a pressure boundary condition must be set in all fluid regions. For a
totally enclosed area with no inlets or outlets, it is a good idea to specify the pressure on at least one surface somewhere in the enclosure. If necessary, specify a 0value velocity to the same surface to prevent it from being treated as an opening.
This will decrease the analysis time significantly.
14-15
Guidelines
14.5
Guidelines
14.6
Boundary layer flows are performed in a fashion similar to external flows with one
important exception. Since the pressure field is generally uniform throughout the
domain in these types of flows, the nodal pressures must be initialized to the same
value (usually zero) and not updated during the calculation. The solution relaxation
for pressure must be set to zero to maintain the initial pressure field.
P P
Note that there will be finite ------ , ------ and ------ terms in the governing flow equations
xareyused inz
since intermediate pressures
their computation. Intermediate refers
to a point in the middle of a sequential solver iteration when pressure gradients are
established to conserve mass. At the end of each sequential solver iteration, these
pressure gradients will not be present since pressure relaxation is set to zero.
14.7
Periodic boundary conditions (cyclic symmetry) enable users to model a single passage of an axial or centrifugal turbomachine. It is not a sliding mesh implementation (like the full rotating device), but will capture the flow within the blade
passage. Periodic boundary conditions can also be used to simulate non-rotating
devices such as a single blade passage through a stator cascade.
For such an analysis, only a single blade passage is modeled. Additional volumes
are added to the inlet and the outlet of the model. These should be distinct volumes
from the blade passage as they do not rotate. Periodic boundary conditions are
always applied in pairs, typically to surfaces on the inlet and outlet extensions that
are not walls or openings.
Note that models containing periodic boundary conditions cannot be remeshed and
continued from a saved iteration. If the mesh is changed, the model must be
started from the beginning (iteration 0). This is due to the nodal reorganization that
occurs at the onset of analyses containing periodic boundary conditions.
14.7.1
Boundary Conditions
The sides of the extensions must be translated or offset from each other in the
same manner. For example, if the sides of the inlet extension are rotated 30
14-16
Guidelines
degrees from each other, then the sides of the outlet extension must be rotated 30
degrees from each other as well. Alternatively, if the periodic sides of the inlet
extension are translated in the Y direction 3 inches, then the periodic sides of the
outlet must be translated 3 inches in the Y direction as well.
At least one set of periodic surfaces in the model must be planar. As long as one set
is planar, the other surfaces can be curvilinear.
In 2D models, edges in a periodic pair must be within three degrees of each other,
and must be the same length. Additionally, all normals from one surface must
pierce the other, and vice versa.
The side ID should be consistent from one region to the next. This is shown:
side 1
side 2
Being consistent with the sides from one region to the next will greatly speed-up
startup processing. If side IDs are not marked consistently, the start-up processing
of the analysis will take considerably longer.
14-17
Guidelines
When applying a periodic condition, a pair ID is required. Use an integer value for
the pair ID, and use the same value on the periodic surfaces of each extension.
Additionally, a unique side ID is required for each member of a pair. For example,
one surface of a periodic pair might have pair ID =1 and side ID =1. The corresponding surface in the pair would have pair ID =1, and side ID = 2.
Guidelines
14.7.2
Geometry Configuration
There are two ways to configure the rotating region based on the blade passage.
One approach is for the passage to be exactly between the blades (extending from
the suction side of one blade to the pressure side of the other):
Outlet Periodic
Extension
Periodic Pair 1
Side 1
Side 2
Side 1 Side 2
Periodic Pair 2
Inlet Periodic
Extension
Rotating Region
(Blade passage,
pressure and suction sides of blades)
This approach is better for most centrifugal devices and axial devices that have a
large number of blades or high degree of blade curvature.
Alternatively, the rotating region can extend from the mid-point of one passage to
the mid-point of the neighboring passage. In this case, a single blade will run
14-18
Guidelines
through the middle of the rotating region. The blade should either be a cutout or
should be a solid:
pair 2, side 1
pair 3, side 1
pair 1, side 1
pair 3, side 2
pair 1, side 2
pair 2, side 2
The blade passage will be set up as a rotating region, and the rotational speed and
direction of rotation must be defined. Periodic boundary conditions are required on
the sides of the rotating region as well, if the blade is centered within the region. If
the sides of the rotating region are the pressure and suction sides of the blade,
then it is not necessary to assign periodic conditions to the sides of the rotating
region.
Periodic boundary conditions can also be used for non-rotating devices, such as a
stator cascade. Periodic pairs are required at the inlet and outlet extensions:
Outlet
Pair ID 1
Pair ID 2
Inlet
Blades
14-19
Guidelines
Turbomachinery analyses using periodic conditions are only useful for blade passages. Such analyses are not appropriate for geometries in which a non-moving
solid is included, such as a centrifugal pump surrounded by a volute.
Guidelines
Analyses with periodic boundary conditions that include a rotating region must be
run transient. For analyses of non-rotating devices, it is not required to run as a
transient analysis.
Note that periodic boundary conditions are included in the Basic configuration, but
the Motion Module is required to analyze rotating machinery passages with periodic
boundaries.
Advanced Functionality:
The following functionality items are the additional items in the Advanced configuration.
14.8
Transient Flows
In fluid flow analyses, transient refers to both periodic in time (albeit steady) and
the usual time-varying flow solution. For transient flows, initial conditions must be
set. The default initial condition will be zero for all variables except temperature.
Assign initial conditions using the Initial tab of the Loads dialog task.
necessary. The steps for setting a time-varying boundary condition are outlined in
the Loads chapter of this guide.
2. Unit of Time: Note that the time unit is always seconds for transient analyses.
This unit of time is consistent with that used for the properties. Even for transients
which take days or longer, the time step size should still be entered in seconds.
3. Inner Iterations: Because CFdesign uses an implicit method to discretize the
transient flow equations, iterations must be run for every time step. This inner iteration is similar to the amount of work required for a single steady state iteration.
However, the inner iterations in a transient analysis are almost always better-conditioned mathematically than a steady state iteration. For this reason, far fewer inner
iterations per time step (typically 10) are required than iterations for a steady state
solution.
For Motion analyses, the recommended number of inner iterations per time
step is one. Little benefit has been found from using more iterations per
time step.
14-20
Guidelines
4. Divergence: If the transient calculation is diverging, the time step size will
14.9
Height of Fluid
Designed to track the fluid level for a tank filling or emptying operation, the Height
of Fluid (HOF) function is a transient-based formulation that works for two and
three dimensional geometries as well as axisymmetric.
To implement HOF into an analysis, simply apply the Height of Fluid initial condition
to those regions of the model that contain fluid at Time 0. Regions that do not have
this condition are considered empty at the onset of the analysis. The geometry
should be oriented such that the filling or emptying direction is the Y coordinate
direction.
14-21
Guidelines
likely need to be decreased. For most situations, reducing the time step size is a
better approach than adjusting the convergence controls because doing so will
affect the time-accuracy of the solution. The convergence controls will artificially
slow down the time history of the calculation.
5. Intelligent Solution Control: If invoked, it adjusts only the time step size,
and does not modify any convergence settings. This is done to prevent artificially
affecting the time accuracy of the solution. (Convergence settings slow down solution progression so it is always a good idea to use the default settings for nonMotion transient analyses.) We have found that in some cases the time step size
that Intelligent Solution Control selects can be smaller than truly necessary for convergence, which may result in significantly longer solution times. For this reason,
Intelligent Solution Control is disabled by default, and it is recommended to assign
a time step size for transient analyses that do not involve the Advanced functionality physics.
6. Pressure Waves: When running a transient analysis with time-varying pressure boundary conditions, the analysis should be set to compressible. The transient terms in the pressure equations can only be accurately determined if the
density is allowed to vary. Namely, pressure waves always have to be modeled as a
compressible flow phenomenon.
7. Compressible Liquids: In water hammer analyses, the density does not vary.
Compressible and Transient must still be invoked however to solve a water hammer
analysis.
8. Animation: Transient results sets can quickly be animated in the Results dialog. This is described in the Review chapter of this Guide.
Guidelines
Additionally, be sure to select Transient on the Analyze dialog, and set an appropriate time step.
The filling or emptying process must be driven by an applied velocity boundary condition. The hydrostatic head of the water column will not cause the water to spontaneously empty from a tank.
Note: the Residence Time scalar quantity can be selected for results viewing, and is
often useful for HOF analyses. This is selected from the Results Quantities dialog
available on the Analyze dialog. Note also that an HOF analysis can have a scalar
quantity as part of the calculation. This is useful for modeling the concentration of
additives to the water.
14.10
Moist/Humid Flows
To model the effect of moisture on a gas flow, specify a relative humidity and a
temperature boundary condition at every inlet.
Additionally, it is often helpful to apply the initial value of temperature and humidity
to the model. Use one of the inlet values as the initial condition value.
On the Materials dialog, select one of the Air_Moist properties from the fluid material database, or define a new material using a Moist Gas density variation. The values that can be changed are the Reference Pressure and Gas Constant. The
reference pressure is the sum of the partial pressures of the gas and the water
vapor. You should also enter the carrier gas viscosity, conductivity and specific heat.
Also, select the Humidity option on the Scalar dialog on the Options task, and set
Heat Transfer to On on the Options dialog.
For incompressible flows, only the temperature affects the fluid properties (including relative humidity). If pressure effects are to be considered, select Subsonic
Compressible from the Options dialog task.
When continuing an analysis from existing results, there may be a blip in the convergence monitor for temperature and scalar due to some internal conversion variables.
14-22
Guidelines
Note: CFdesign can model the condensation process but not the evaporation process. The amount of liquid condensed and the calculated field values of
relative humidity can be viewed as results. The condensed liquid is calculated as a
mixture fraction, i.e., the mass of the condensed liquid divided by the total mass of
the liquid, vapor and carrier gas.
It is often helpful to apply Convergence Control to the following variables for moist/
humid analyses: pressure, temperature, and density. Values of 0.1-0.25 are appropriate.
Be sure to enable output of the Scalar quantity on the Result Quantities dialog
(available from the Analyze dialog). This will allow humidity to be viewed as a result
quantity.
Steam/Water Flows
To model a two-phase mixture of steam and water, specify the steam quality and
static temperature (as well as the appropriate flow condition) at all inlets. If the
inlet fluid is 100% liquid water, then the steam quality is 0.
Select the H2O_Steam/Liquid property from the Fluid list on the Material dialog.
If operating far from STP, create a new steam/water material, and change the Reference Pressure accordingly. The actual values of the fluid properties will be determined during the analysis using the steam tables and the specified reference
pressure.
On the Options dialog, turn Heat Transfer On, and select Steam Quality from the
Scalar dialog.
For incompressible flows, only the temperature and reference pressure will affect
the fluid properties (including the steam quality). If local pressure effects need to
be considered, select Subsonic Compressible flow on the Options dialog.
In the case of steam/water flows, CFdesign assumes a homogeneous two-phase
mixture. The energy equation that is used is written in terms of enthalpy. Temperature is determined using the steam tables. Both temperature and enthalpy results
can be viewed in the Results dialog task (make sure both quantities are enabled on
the Output Quantity dialog on the Analyze dialog).
14-23
Guidelines
14.11
Guidelines
14.12
The radiation model uses a true view factor calculation which provides as accurate
energy balance because it enforces reciprocity between solids. Temperature and
energy balance accuracy are ensured for geometries with widely varying feature
sizes.
Radiative heat transfer through transparent media is supported, as well as geometric symmetry. The radiation model computes radiative heat transfer to moving solids and moving surfaces, and is the basis of the solar heating model. The radiation
model has very rigorous bookkeeping to keep track of the radiative energy balance, and reports the amount of heat transfer due to radiation and the radiative
energy balance for each part in a model. The result is that reciprocity is enforced,
to ensure that the radiative heat transfer between parts with large size differences
is computed accurately.
Radiation works with all of the supported geometry types: two and three dimensional Cartesian and axisymmetric about the X and Y axes.
14.12.1
The new radiation model computes true view factors for every part. This is more
accurate than the flux-based method used in the radiation model in previous versions. The view factors between every part are written to the .sol file, and should
sum to 1 for each part. Tables of view factors are produced for opaque as well as
transparent materials.
A sample view factor list for one part in an assembly is shown:
Opaque Part-To-Part View Factors
Part 1 viewing Part 1, VF = 0
Part 1 viewing Part 2, VF = 0.00870629
14-24
Guidelines
Guidelines
14.12.2
Modeling Guidelines
To use radiation, specify an emissivity for every solid material type in the model. If
there are no solids present, specify an emissivity for the surrounding walls by setting an emissivity on the fluid material. (You will have to create a new material, but
it can be based on a database material.) Because the radiation algorithm does not
allow the fluid medium to participate, emissivity specified on a fluid material is
automatically applied to the walls touching the fluid.
Note that the default value of 0 as the emissivity is not generally recommended
because it indicates a perfectly reflective surface. Such a case may cause analysis
instabilities and convergence difficulties.
Enable Heat Transfer and Radiation on the Options dialog.
14-25
Guidelines
Radiation can be run with or without flow, but should be run with Heat Transfer set
to On.
An important modeling consideration is that fluid and parts that contact each other
should not be extrusion meshed. The reason is that if either (or both) use extruded
elements, the interface between the extrusion faces and the tetrahedral faces, also
known as a non-conformal interface, is not supported by the radiation model. The
radiation model must have a matching mesh at all fluid-solid interfaces. This guideline applies to solid-solid interfaces as well if one or both of the solids is a transparent medium.
When an assembly is enclosed by an air volume, it is very important that a nonzero value of emissivity be assigned to the air (which then gets applied to the
walls). If a value of 0 is used, the wetted surfaces (that do not touch solids) will
behave as perfect mirrors, and no energy will be lost to the environment--a nonphysical situation. Apply a temperature boundary condition to the external air surface that represents the correct environmental temperature, and specify a realistic
emissivity for the air.
14.12.3
Transmissivity
The new radiation model supports radiative heat transfer through transparent solid
media. A new material property, transmissivity, defines the level of transparency of
a solid object. Radiative heat transfer through a transparent solid object that is
completely surrounded by fluid can be simulated by assigning a non-zero transmissivity property to the material. Opaque solids that are enclosed by transparent solids can be modeled as well. This even allows nesting of multiple layers of opaque
and transparent solids.
Note that transmissivity cannot be assigned to surface parts.
In the new radiation model, radiative energy that passes through a transparent
solid does not experience an attenuation effect--there is no absorption of radiative
energy into the media. There is no accounting for spectral effects within a transparent object, and energy leaves the object in a diffuse manner. Energy may, however,
be absorbed through the surface and then emitted (emissivity = absorptivity). The
energy balance for radiative heat transfer looks like:
r = 1
14-26
Guidelines
where r = reflectivity, = emissivity, and = transmissivity. Note that transmissivity can only be applied to solids. Fluids are non-participating media for all radiation simulations.
14.12.3.1
To include radiative heat transfer through a transparent solid that is completely surrounded by the fluid, assign a transmissivity value to the material using the Material Editor on the Material task dialog.
Guidelines
14-27
Guidelines
Note that the sum of transmissivity and emissivity must be less than or equal to 1.
Air cavity
Emissivity of walls set
as property of air
Object with
heat source
emissivity <= 1
if opaque, transmissivity = 0
14.12.3.2
Object heated
by radiative
heat transfer
Transparent part
transmissivity > 0
Material task dialog. (Note that the part must have a non-zero transmissivity property to be considered transparent.)
3. Assign a Transparent boundary condition to the external surface:
Transparent part
on exterior of model.
Transmissivity > 0
Internal solid part
Transparent BC with
Background Temperature
applied to external surface(s)
Air cavity
The temperature specified with this boundary condition is used to define the incoming radiation flux according to this equation:
14-28
Guidelines
q = ( T background )
Transparent BCs should only be applied to external boundaries so that the incoming
flux is external to the analysis domain. They must be assigned to a solid material;
assignment to a fluid material will result in an error.
Solar heating problems should not use transparent BCs because the set up of the
solar heating problem requires a sky dome and ground structure that define the
entire external boundaries. If windows are modeled in these cases, these transparent materials would be internal to the analysis domain which would make transparent boundary conditions inappropriate.
14.12.4
Symmetry
The new radiation model supports geometric symmetry. Symmetric divisions must
be such that the model is a true fraction of the complete model. For example, a half
symmetric model is valid if the other half makes up the complete device. Likewise,
a quarter symmetry is valid if it encompasses 90 degrees of the actual device, and
if the other three quarters would make up the complete device.
14-29
Guidelines
Guidelines
A slip condition that does not divide a model along a geometry symmetry would not
produce accurate radiative heat transfer results. Examples of valid symmetry/slip
divisions are shown:
Half Symmetry
Quarter Symmetry
Model
Symmetry Plane
Model
Cut-away half
Symmetry Plane
Cut-away Quarters
These two examples show valid half and quarter symmetry geometries, but much
smaller symmetry can be used, if it is valid. As an example, an 18 degree wedge
could be analyzed from a disk. This corresponds to a 1/20th symmetry! The key is
to apply the symmetry (slip) boundary conditions so that they properly define the
symmetry.
When working with a symmetric model, care should be taken to ensure that the
model uses pure rotational symmetry. A combination of rotational and mirrored
symmetry is not supported. For example, if the complete geometry looks like the
image on the left, then a valid quarter symmetry would be as shown on the right:
14-30
Guidelines
But, if the actual geometry did not contain pure rotational symmetry, and looked
like the image on the left (below), then the symmetry shown in the middle image
would be wrong. The image on the right is the correct way to invoke symmetry on
such a model:
Half Symmetry
VALID
14.12.5
Motion
Radiation is now supported for moving solids. When radiation is enabled for a
motion analysis, the view factors will automatically recompute when the moving
part has traveled 2% of the maximum diagonal of the domain bounding box. This
value can be changed with a flags file entry:
ViewFactorUpdate VALUE
14-31
Guidelines
Quarter
Symmetry
NOT VALID
Guidelines
where VALUE is the percent of the diagonal. To recompute view factors every 5%,
for example, place this entry in your flags file:
ViewFactorUpdate 5
NOTES:
Moving objects that experience radiation heat transfer must not touch
any stationary object or wall at any point in the analysis. This includes the
as-built location as well as anywhere in the motion path.
Moving objects must not leave the enclosure.
Radiation cannot be used for rotating regions--it is only for moving solids.
Moving parts must be opaque. They cannot have a non-zero value of
transmissivity in their material definition.
14.12.6
Invoking
The new radiation model is enabled by default. To use the CFdesign v8 radiation
model, add this setting to your cfdesign_flags.txt file:
rad_model_1 1
14.12.7
Resource Usage
The fact that the new radiation model computes view factors and reciprocity
between every face of every part leads to a high level of accuracy and a good
energy balance for radiation calculations. The model is, however, resource intensive. During initial startup, a view factor is calculated between all element faces of
every part with a line of sight. Additionally, the radiation matrix must be built that
tracks all of this data.
The required amount of RAM increases with the square of the number of surface
element faces. Depending on the number of surfaces in a geometry, the amount of
RAM required to compute the view factors may be in excess of 1 Gigabyte. The
amount of time required to compute the view factors at startup can be quite significant as well. A progress bar indicates the relative progress of this calculation during initial startup.
14-32
Guidelines
14.12.8
Spectral Radiation
14-33
Guidelines
Guidelines
To account for the spectral characteristics of a surface, use the radiation functions
in the following table to construct a second table of total emissivity as a function of
temperature to be used in CFdesign:
m R
m K
E b0 T
----------------4
T
m R
m K
E b0 T
----------------4
T
0.0
10,200
5666.7
0.70754
1000
555.6
1.70e-8
10,400
5777.8
0.71806
1200
666.7
7.56e-7
10,600
5888.9
0.72813
1400
777.8
1.06e-5
10,800
6000
0.73777
1600
888.9
7.38e-5
11,000
6111.1
0.74700
1800
1000
3.21e-4
11,200
6222.2
0.75583
2000
1111.1
0.00101
11,400
6333.3
0.76429
2200
1222.2
0.00252
11,600
6444.4
0.77238
2400
1333.3
0.00531
11,800
6555.6
0.78014
2600
1444.4
0.00983
12,000
6666.7
0.78757
2800
1555.6
0.01643
12,200
6777.8
0.79469
3000
1666.7
0.02537
12,400
6888.9
0.80152
3200
1777.8
0.03677
12,600
7000
0.80806
3400
1888.9
0.05059
12,800
7111.1
0.81433
3600
2000
0.06672
13,000
7222.2
0.82035
3800
2111.1
0.08496
13,200
7333.3
0.82612
14-34
Guidelines
m R
m K
E b0 T
----------------4
T
m R
m K
E b0 T
----------------4
T
2222.2
0.10503
13,400
7444.4
0.83166
4200
2333.3
0.12665
13,600
7555.6
0.83698
4400
2444.4
0.14953
13,800
7666.7
0.84209
4600
2555.6
0.17337
14,000
7777.8
0.84699
4800
2666.7
0.19789
14,200
7888.9
0.85171
5000
2777.8
0.22285
14,400
8000
0.85624
5200
2888.9
0.24803
14,600
8111.1
0.86059
5400
3000
0.27322
14,800
8222.2
0.86477
5600
3111.1
0.29825
15,000
8333.3
0.86880
5800
3222.2
0.32300
16,000
8888.9
0.88677
6000
3333.3
0.34734
17,000
9444.4
0.90168
6200
3444.4
0.37118
18,000
10,000
0.91414
6400
3555.6
0.39445
19,000
10,555.6
0.92462
6600
3666.7
0.41708
20,000
11,111.1
0.93349
6800
3777.8
0.43905
21,000
11,666.7
0.94104
7000
3888.9
0.46031
22,000
12,222.2
0.94751
7200
4000
0.48085
23,000
12,777.8
0.95307
7400
4111.1
0.50066
24,000
13,333.3
0.95788
14-35
Guidelines
4000
Guidelines
m R
m K
E b0 T
----------------4
T
m R
m K
E b0 T
----------------4
T
7600
4222.2
0.51974
25,000
13,888.9
0.96207
7800
4333.3
0.53809
26,000
14,444.4
0.96572
8000
4444.4
0.55573
27,000
15,000
0.96892
8200
4555.6
0.57267
28,000
15,555.6
0.97174
8400
4666.7
0.58891
29,000
16,111.1
0.97423
8600
4777.8
0.60449
30,000
16,666.7
0.97644
8800
4888.9
0.61941
40,000
22,222.2
0.98915
9000
5000
0.63371
50,000
27,777.8
0.99414
9200
5111.1
0.64740
60,000
33,333.3
0.99649
9400
5222.2
0.66051
70,000
38,888.9
0.99773
9600
5333.3
0.67305
80,000
44,444.4
0.99845
9800
5444.4
0.68506
90,000
50,000
0.99889
10,000
5555.6
0.69655
100,000
55,555.6
0.99918
Radiation functions from R.V. Dunkle, Trans. ASME, 76, p549, 1954
For example, if you know the range of temperatures for your model is 100F
to 1200F and the emittance of the surface is 0.3 ( 1 ) below 3 and is 0.8
14-36
Guidelines
( 2 ) at the longer wavelengths, you would create the following table, and
enter this data in the Piecewise Linear property table in CFdesign:
E b0 T
---------------4
T
Emissivity
Temperature (F)
1680
9.888e-5
0.8
100
4980
0.220354
0.69
1200
E b0 T
E b0 T
- + 1.0 ---------------- 2
= ---------------4
T 4 1
T
Substituting the numbers above and interpolating values from the table:
E b0 T
- = 9.888e 5
( T = 100 ( F ) ( T = 3 560 = 1680 ) ) --------------- T 4
E b0 T
- = 0.220354
( T = 1200 ( F ) ( ( T = 3 1660 ) = 4980 ) ) --------------- T 4
14-37
Guidelines
14.12.9
Energy Balance
For every iteration, a radiosity matrix is form and solved. A complete record of the
energy balance is provided for every part in the model. This data is written to the
.sol file for every iteration during the analysis, and to the summary file after the
last iteration. This section describes the information that is provided, and discusses
the differences for models using transparent boundary conditions and solar heating.
14.12.9.1
The following is a sample energy balance from a radiation analysis containing five
parts. There are four parts immersed in an air cavity (part 5). None of the parts has
transmissivity. Comments about the meaning of certain items are written below the
line and are preceded by a >>>> symbol.
Radiosity Solution has converged
Iter=12 ResNorm = 5.85774E-013
CPU time to solve radiosity matrix = 0.719
Radiation heat balance = 2.3363e-008/ 20.437 = 1.1431e-007%
>>>> The 2.3363e-008 is the sum of the radiative energy. This value should be 0
or very close. The 20.437 is the sum of the absolute values of the radiative energy.
The 1.1431e-007% is the total radiative energy divided by the sum of the absolute
values. This is an indicator of the error in the radiative energy balance.
Radiation Heat Loads by Part ID
ID
Radiation
Area
Surface
Heat Load
(mm^2)
Temperature
(Watts)
Emissivity
Transmissivity
(K)
1
-2.583
5959.3
365.23
0.94
-2.5318
5959.2
363.07
0.94
-2.5806
5959.3
365.56
0.94
-2.5148
5959.3
364.2
0.94
14-38
Guidelines
10.21
1.2296e+0
05
298.25
Totals
2.3363e008
1.4679e+0
05
309.01
0.7
>>>>Parts 1-4 are each losing about 2.5 Watts through radiation, and part 5, the
enclosure, is receiving that radiant energy. The totals indicate that the total heat
lost equals the sum of the heat gain, indicated by the total heat load summing to 0.
The temperature for each part is an area-weighted temperature, and the total temperature is average temperature for all of the parts.
14.12.9.2
Radiation
Heat Load
Area
(mm^2)
(Watts)
2
3
-36.289
Surface
Temp
Emissivity
Transmissivity
(K)
1268.5
0.94
/ 0 transparentBC
6.917e+00
5
-32.062
1599.3
1015.7
0.94
1767.8
980.85
0.05
0.8
/ 0 transparentBC
4
0.18324
/ -76.557 transparentBC
14-39
Guidelines
Guidelines
-8.3889
/ 0 transparentBC
Tot
als
-76.557/ -76.557
2.029e+00
5
1270.7
8.980e+00
5
1268
0.94
>>>> Parts 2 and 3 are losing about 36 and 32 Watts, respectively. Part 6, the
enclosure, is losing about 8 Watts. The sum of the energy lost from these three
parts equals the energy lost through the transparent boundary condition. The
transparent part, part 4, is only picking up a small amount of energy because it is
losing most of its energy through the transparent boundary condition. Note that the
total transparent BC heat load = total radiation heat load. This indicates a good
energy balance.
14.13
Solar Heating
The Solar model only works in conjunction with the new radiation model, and as
such supports radiative heat transfer through transparent media. With solar heating, the effect of shadowing on other objects is supported as well. The Solar user
interface dialog allows for specification of specific geographical locations as well as
input of latitude and longitude. The date, time, compass direction, and object orientation relative to the sky are also specified. A full report of the radiative energy balance similar to the reports shown in the previous section is provided during and
after the analysis.
14.13.1
Geometry
14-40
Guidelines
sary to compute the thermal inertia of the ground. The ground part should be
approximately 20 times wider than the studied object.
The shape of the environment volume is not critical, and a hemisphere or cube are
the most convenient choices. The environment volume should extend at least 10
times the height of the objects in the analysis model. A smaller environment can be
used, but if natural convection is analyzed, a small volume will influence and potentially complicate the buoyancy-induced flow. Also, if diurnal heating is analyzed, a
cold sky temperature that is too close to the object will artificially cool the object
through conduction.
Environment Volume
Guidelines
20 meters
Object
2 meters
Ground
1 meter
Volume
40 meters
Note that only three dimensional geometry is supported for solar analyses because
the motion of the sun is a function of its altitude and its East-West (azimuth angle)
orientation. Since the solar energy flux is a function of three dimensional space,
CFdesign does not convert this energy into an equivalent energy load in two dimensional models. For example, for a model that is axisymmetric in the Y axis, solar
input only exists on one side of this object. This conflicts with the condition of symmetry about the Y axis because the solar heating is non-symmetric by its very
nature.
The relative locations of objects in an analysis model are important because shadowing is computed by the Solar Heating model. When an object blocks solar flux
(either partially or completely) from hitting another object, that blocked object is
14-41
Guidelines
shadowed. Such an object is still subject to receiving indirect radiant heat flux from
the sky, the ground, and surrounding objects.
This object is in
If solar flux
the shadow of
comes from
here...
14.13.2
Analysis Settings
Temperature boundary conditions and emissivity values should be specified for both
the ground and sky.
Sky temperature
Sky emissivity
Ground emissivity
Ground temperature
The ground temperature depends on the location on the Earth, and should be specified on the external surface of the ground volume. The emissivity of the ground
should be specified as a property of the ground material. This value depends on the
type of material. Grass surfaces, for example, may have an emissivity of about 0.3,
while asphalt may have an emissivity of about 0.8. White surfaces such as an air-
14-42
Guidelines
port tarmac, are highly reflective, and would tend to have very low emissivity values.
During the day, the sky temperature is nearly the ambient temperature. At night,
however, the sky temperature falls to about 0 C. On very cloudy nights in warm climates, the sky temperature may be warmer than this. On clear nights in cold climates, the sky temperature can be as cold as -15 C.
The amount of cloud cover and the amount of ambient light affect the amount of
radiant energy that is reflected off the sky and back to earth (the albedo). Use the
value of emissivity specified on air to control the emissivity of the sky (and hence
the reflectivity). The emissivity controls the amount of reflected energy: (reflection
= 1-emissivity).
To study diurnal heating, specify the sky temperature as a transient boundary condition, and assign the emissivity of the air (which is automatically assigned to the
exterior surface of the environment volume) as a function of temperature. During
the day, high sky temperature corresponds to lower emissivity. During the night,
low sky temperature corresponds to higher emissivity values.
Transparent objects such as windows can be incorporated into solar heating analyses. Assign a transmissivity property value to such parts in the Material Editor.
Because all parts are internal to a solar heating analysis, the transparent boundary
condition should not be used in a solar heating model. This boundary condition is
used for setting an external temperature on objects that are on the exterior of a
model, so it is not appropriate for objects in the interior of a solar analysis.
Please see the Solar Heating section of the Options chapter of this manual for information about the Solar Heating dialog.
14-43
Guidelines
A clear sky with little or no cloud cover has a higher emissivity value
(and hence lower reflectivity) than a cloudy sky.
At night, a clear sky might have an emissivity as high as 1, but because
of the low night-time sky temperature, it acts as an emitter that is cold, so
little heat is emitted back to the object and ground.
A cloudy night sky will have a lower emissivity (higher reflection), so
the clouds reflect the radiation emission from the ground, and will limit the
heat loss of the ground.
Guidelines
14.13.3
There are two ways to run a solar heating analysis: as steady-state or as transient.
When run as steady state, the time specified on the Solar Heating dialog does not
change throughout the calculation. This is ideal for computing the worst case
solar heat loading on an object during the heat of the day. Also, this regime is useful for determining seasonal variations in the peak solar loading.
To study the variation of solar loading over a longer period of time (either within a
single day or over multiple days and nights), a solar heating model can be run transient. The time and date specified on the Solar Heating dialog are that at the beginning of the simulation. If analyzing diurnal heating over a long period of time
(several days, for example), we have found that it is convenient to divide a day into
100 time steps. This is a time step size of 864 seconds. Such a large time step
should be very effective if Flow is disabled on the Options dialog. If buoyancy effects are to be studied, then a significantly smaller time step will be necessary.
When running a diurnal solar analysis, it will likely be important to vary the sky
temperature with time so that the appropriate value is used during day and night.
Likewise, define the sky emissivity to be temperature-dependent to properly represent the reflective effects of ambient light and cloud cover.
The two result quantities that provide the most insight into the effects of solar loading are temperature and solar heat flux. Solar heat flux is enabled automatically,
and is available from the Scalar branch of the feature tree:
14-44
Guidelines
14.13.4
A complete reporting of the radiation energy balance is also provided in the Summary file when running Solar Heating. Below is a sample of such a report. Comments about the meaning of certain items are written below the line and are
preceded by a >>>> symbol.
Simulation Time 1.728000e+003 seconds, year = 2006, month = 2, day = 1 hour
= 12 minute = 25 second = 5
>>>>Time, date, and duration when the position of the sun is computed.
Altitude 72.6 Azimuth 3.2 Night 0 Direct Solar Flux 7.239663e-004 sun_pointer
0.298570 -0.016760 0.954241
Guidelines
Radiation
Area
Surface
Heat Load
(mm^2)
Temperature
(Watts)
Emissivity
Transmissivity
(K)
1
0.1875/ 0 solar
5959.3
298.43
0.7
0.19787/ 0
solar
5959.3
298.83
0.7
12.858/ 14.379
solar
1.56e+0
05
303.46
0.2
0.6
14-45
Guidelines
0.57946/
0.51806 solar
5959.3
300.24
0.7
0.78074/
0.69285 solar
5959.3
301.29
0.7
71.656/ 70.67
solar
1.21e+0
05
303.73
0.94
Total
86.259/ 86.259
3.01e+0
05
303.27
>>>> Part 3 is picking up 14.379 Watts through incoming solar flux, but its net
increase is only 12.858. This means that this part lost about 1.5 Watts to its surroundings. Part 6, conversely, has a slightly higher net influx than it received from
solar. This means that it picked up additional radiant energy from its surroundings.
Note that the total solar heat load = total radiation heat load, indicating a good
radiation energy balance.
14.14
Compressible Flows
Physically, the fluid density of compressible flow varies with pressure. In CFdesign,
the distinction between subsonic compressible and full compressible is that in the
former, the relationship between pressure and density is weak, and in the latter, the
relationship is quite strong. In compressible flow, the pressure strongly affects the
density.
Subsonic Compressible flow contains no shocks. The local Mach number is always
less than 1.0.
Compressible flow may have shocks and regions where the local Mach number is
greater than 1.0. This type of flow may be either transonic or supersonic. In supersonic flows, pressure effects are transported downstream. The upstream flow is not
affected by downstream conditions.
If the flow accelerates through a geometrically converging section to sonic speed,
the flow is considered to be choked. When choked, no additional mass can pass
through the constriction region, even as the pressure drop is increased (by lowering
the outlet back pressure). The flow downstream of the throat can then expand and
become supersonic.
14-46
Guidelines
Please note that compressible analyses can vary considerably from one to the next,
and that they can be much more sensitive to applied parameters than incompressible analyses. It is very important that the physics of the model be represented correctly. Discrepancies between the model set up and the actual physical situation
can cause significant differences in the results, and may affect analysis stability.
Some general guidelines for running compressible analyses are listed:
RT
Where =1.4 for air, R = gas constant, and T = reference static temperature (in absolute units).
Note: The reference temperature is the static temperature at the inlet of
the domain.
If the source of the flow is a pressurized plenum, specify a total pressure.
2. Exit Boundary Condition: If the outlet flow is supersonic, the outlet boundary
should be the Unknown boundary condition. If the outlet flow is subsonic, then
apply a pressure of 0 gage. Ensure that a specified pressure is far enough from any
supersonic regions so as not to cause any artificial influence.
3. Materials: Use a material with a density that varies with equation of state. It is
very important to use the correct fluid reference quantities. The reference static
pressure and static temperature are used to initialize the density. Because of this,
the reference temperature needs to be reasonable and the pressure needs to be
exact for the gage reference point to be correct.
4. Meshing: To capture physical elements such as shocks, the mesh size will have
to be quite fine in critical areas. The mesh can be less fine in non-critical areas. A
good guideline governing mesh transition is that the mesh size should not transition
by more than a factor of four between neighboring fluid volumes.
5. Total Temperature: If heat transfer is not solved for, it is necessary to specify
a Total temperature in the Options dialog. The equation for total temperature is:
2
1 2
Vi
-M
- or T t = T 1 + ---------T t = T + -------
2
2C p
14-47
Guidelines
a =
Guidelines
7. Advection: for pressure driven flows, ADV2 is the recommended scheme. The
default of ADV1 is recommended for most other situations. Note that ADV2 will
often produce higher resolution shock results than ADV1, so if the location of shock
waves is an important result, use ADV2.
8. Intelligent Solution Control: The use of Intelligent Solution Control is recommended for compressible analyses. Such analyses have historically been challenging to solve, and have required a great deal of manual intervention to adjust
control parameters and materials. Intelligent Solution Control applies controls automatically, resulting in a more efficient analysis process.
14.14.1
Internal Flow
The practices outlined in the Incompressible flow section about internal flow modeling should be followed for compressible flows as well, with the important exception
of the boundary conditions.
the inlet is supersonic, pressure and velocity must be specified at the inlet because
pressure signals only travel downstream in a supersonic flow. If the outlet flow is
supersonic, then it is not a good idea to specify the outlet pressure for the same
reason. The Unknown boundary condition is a better outlet condition for supersonic
outlet flow.
14-48
Guidelines
14.14.2
External Flow
Please refer to the general information about external flows in the Incompressible
flow section of this chapter for basic geometric guidelines.
1. Boundary Conditions: The key difference between incompressible and compressible external flow modeling is the boundary conditions. For supersonic flows,
14-49
Guidelines
ever, in which the inlet and/or the outlet may be subsonic, while flow within the
domain is supersonic.
For a subsonic inlet that is well below sonic, it is a good idea to specify
only velocity.
For a subsonic inlet that is near sonic, both velocity and pressure can
be specified.
If the outlet is very far downstream of supersonic flow, specify a pressure. In some instances it is possible to add an extension to the exit to be
able to set a uniform pressure at the domain exit. If such an extension is
used, it is good practice to set the slip condition on the walls of the extension to prevent any Fanno flow effects.
If, however, the outlet is fairly close to supersonic flow, you should set
the Unknown boundary condition.
3. Running: The analysis sequence for internal flows that have some internal
compressibility effects is:
Run 15-40 iterations with Incompressible selected on the Options dialog. (The solution should become stable and flow should be entering the
domain.) Also, set density to vary with equation of state. This will allow the
density to approach the correct value prior to switching to compressible.
After the first 15 iterations, run the remaining iterations with Compressible enabled. This sequence allows the flow to get established
throughout the calculation domain prior to introducing compressibility
effects.
Guidelines
specify both pressure and velocity upstream of the object. Downstream of the
object, set the Unknown boundary condition. An example of this is shown:
Note that if the domain is not large enough, you may have to make the inlet condition (velocity and pressure) extend over a greater portion of the domain.
should be run with Velocity and Static Pressure specified upstream and the
Unknown set downstream (as shown in the preceding figure). (If Auto-Convergence
is not invoked, Pressure Control should be set to 0.001 and Convergence Control on
velocity and pressure should be set to 0.1 in the Control_Convergence window.)
4. Calculation Domain Shape: Sometimes it might be more convenient to use a
rectangular shaped domain instead of a semi-circular or spherical shape. This has
been found to work quite well for some situations, and the boundary conditions
should be applied as shown in the following graphic:
14-50
Guidelines
cally require more iterations than incompressible analyses to converge. For this
reason, we recommend that you adjust the Automatic Convergence Assessment
slider to Tight.
14.15
Joule Heating
14-51
Guidelines
Guidelines
end of the solid through which electricity is passing and a voltage of 0 on the other
end:
Current on surface
Voltage = 0 on surface
Flow Volume
Alternatively, a potential (voltage) difference can be applied across the device, and
the current boundary condition can be omitted.
A new material property has also been added: Resistivity. This is the resistance
times the area divided by the length of the device. A value for resistivity is required
for any solid that is heated by the Joule effect.
rL
RA
or r = ------------A
L
R = resistance (ohms)
r = resistivity (ohms-length unit)
L = length of the device
A = cross sectional area
A non-zero value for resistivity should always be specified for solids experiencing
Joule heating. For non-conductive materials or materials in which Joule heating
does not occur, specify 0 as the resistivity value. As with any heat transfer analysis,
a temperature needs to be specified somewhere in the model (either as a temperature boundary condition or as a surrounding temperature for a film coefficient
boundary condition).
Care should be taken that the mesh on any object heated by the Joule effect should
have two layers of elements across the object. This will ensure that there are
enough nodes to calculate the heating in the object.
Joule heating is invoked automatically if the Current and Voltage Boundary Conditions and the Resistivity Material Property are set. Additionally, heat transfer must
14-52
Guidelines
be enabled on the Options task dialog. There is not a separate button to invoke
Joule Heating.
14.16
14.16.1
Motion Module
Introduction
The mission of the Motion Module is to analyze the effects of solids moving through
or within a fluid.
There are two principal ways of simulating the motion of solid objects with the
Motion Module: with Rotating Regions and as Moving Solids.
14.16.2
Rotating Regions
14-53
Guidelines
The interaction between a solid body in motion and the surrounding fluid is a key
aspect to the design of many mechanical devices. The CFdesign Motion Module
brings this capability to the world of product design as a key element of Upfront
CFD. Through simulation, this Module allows understanding the interaction between
fluids and moving solids to be integral to the product design process.
Guidelines
14.16.3
Moving Solids
Unlike Rotating Regions in which a special region surrounds the object in motion,
Moving Solids are solid objects that have motion assigned directly to them. Moving
Solids are more versatile than Rotating Regions, and there are several different
types of motion available:
Linear motion is the motion of a solid in a straight line. Examples
include a piston moving in a cylinder, a hydraulic ram in a chamber, and
objects on a conveyor belt moving through a curing process. The linear
motion of solids can be fully prescribed, or it can be driven by the flow. If
flow-driven, additional parameters are required including the bounds of
motion and relevant resistive or driving forces. Examples of flow-driven linear motion include the above items, as well as the simulation of valves
opening and closing.
Angular motion is the rotation of an object about a centerline. Examples of applications that use angular motion are positive displacement
pumps (such as gear pumps and trichodal pumps), check or reed valves,
and other devices with an angular movement. Unlike rotating regions
(described above), objects with an angular motion can have paths that
interfere--such as gear teeth in a gear pump or multiple mixing blades in an
egg-beater. The Motion chapter of this guide contains more information
about the use of rotating regions and angular motion for different applications.
Combined Linear and Angular motion allows objects to translate as
well as rotate about a user-specified axis. Examples of applications include
certain flow meters that rely on both components of motion.
Combined Orbital and Angular: A typical application for Combined
Orbital/Rotational motion is a pump shaft with an eccentric orbit (or whirl)
component. The shaft rotates about its centerline, but also has an eccentric
rotation about an additional axis. By specifying an orbit on an object, it is
possible to understand the force imbalance imparted on bearings and other
fixtures as a result of a shaft orbit.
Nutation is a type of motion used in several types of liquid flow
meters. A nutating object is inclined at an angle to a reference axis. As the
normal vector of the object rotates about the reference axis, the angle
between the normal vector and the reference axis remains constant. The
result is that the object actually wobbles about the reference axis, but does
not change angular position relative to it. A coin wobbling along its edge as
it slows from a spin is a good example of nutating motion.
14-54
Guidelines
14.17
This functionality gives the user the ability to analyze the flow within the blade passages of a rotating device. It also allows study of the interaction between rotating
and non-rotating geometry. A classic example is the interaction between the rotor
and the stator in an axial compressor or turbine. Another example is the influence
of a volute cutwater (tongue) on the exit flow from a centrifugal pump impeller.
14.17.1
Geometric Considerations
The CFdesign rotating machinery capability analyzes rotating devices using a locally
rotating frame of reference. This region completely surrounds a rotating object, and
is called the rotating region.
Areas in the model that are not rotating are analyzed in a static (absolute) frame of
reference. These regions are called static regions. (Obviously fluid in a static
region can move, but the volume itself does not rotate in space.)
The following points summarize the geometric considerations for setting up rotating
analyses:
All rotating objects must be completely immersed in a rotating region.
Such a region will rotate using its own relative rotating frame of reference.
14-55
Guidelines
Guidelines
14-56
Guidelines
14-57
Guidelines
Static Regions
Guidelines
Rotating Region
Static Region
Discharge
Volute
Pump Impeller
Periphery Zone
Rotating Region
Impeller
Outlet
Inlet
Static Regions
A rotating region must not be in direct contact with a solid region. The
outer edge of the rotating region must either be a fluid or an exterior
boundary.
14-58
Guidelines
14.17.2
Boundary Conditions
If the rotational speed of the rotor is known, then pressures will often be specified.
In many cases, the purpose of the analysis is to determine the flow rate generated
by the device for a given pressure. Apply a pressure rise across the device. This will
impose the resistance faced by the rotor. Note that it is recommended to start such
an analysis with equal pressures assigned to both the inlet and outlet. As the impeller starts rotating and moving flow, the pressure rise can be gradually imposed.
This can be done either manually or with a time-varying boundary condition.
Another situation involving a known rotational speed is that the flow rate is known,
and the pressure drop is the desired output quantity. For such a model, specify a
pressure of 0 gage at the inlet and the flow rate at the outlet. This method will
often solve faster than specifying a pressure on both the inlet and outlet.
14.17.3
Rotating device analyses are always run transient (varying with time). This is
because the mesh of the rotating region physically rotates relative to the static
regions in the model. Transient will be set automatically on the Analyze dialog when
a part is designated as a rotating region.
A Time Step Calculator computes the ideal time step size for a known rotational
speed. The time step size is computed to be the amount of time per blade passage.
For cases in which the rotational speed is not known (for known torque and free
spinning analyses), use Intelligent Solution Control to automatically determine and
vary the time step size throughout the analysis. The time step size will be modified
to ensure that no more than three degrees of rotation pass for each time step. This
criteria has been found to be quite stable for rotating analyses.
14-59
Guidelines
If the rotational speed of the rotor is unknown (as in the case of the torque-driven
or the free-spinning scenarios), then a specified velocity or flow rate is most often
appropriate. Recall that a pressure MUST be assigned to at least one opening in the
model unless the model is fully enclosed.
Guidelines
In addition to the time step size, CFdesign automatically invokes several other settings for rotating devices: The number of iterations per time step is set to 1. The
Automatic Turbulence Startup is set to the Extend mode.
Be sure to set a Results Output frequency. This controls how frequently the time
steps are saved to the disk. Saved time steps can be used to animate the results
after the analysis is completed. Care should be exercised when setting the output
frequency to avoid saving so many results sets that your hard drive fills up.
As the analysis runs, the rotation of the rotating region (and any solids within the
region) will appear both computationally and visually in the run-time results viewer.
At the conclusion of an analysis, a comma separated variable file
(jobname_torque.csv) containing a time history of velocity and torque is written to
the working directory. This information is also accessible on the Review_Notes task
dialog.
Note that it is not possible to change the mesh and continue a rotating region analysis from a saved iteration. If the mesh is changed, the analysis must be started
from iteration 0 (the beginning). This is a consequence of the nodal organization
and book-keeping that occurs during the initialization of a rotating region analysis.
14.17.4
Analysis Notes
The purpose of many rotating analyses is to obtain the flow rate for a known head
or pressure rise. The most basic approach to such a problem is to apply the pressure rise across the device as inlet and outlet boundary conditions, and then spin
the rotor or impeller at its known rotational speed. The problem with this approach
is that solution accuracy may be compromised because of the unrealistically fast
start-up of the device. Rotating analyses can be quite sensitive to instantaneous
changes in the rotational speed or to the back pressure.
14.17.4.1
For many rotating devices, we have found that using a time step size equal to the
blade pass time allows a practical way to run enough revolutions to achieve accurate flow rate and/or pressure head prediction.
An example is a pump impeller with six blades. Using the blade pass time as the
time step size, a complete revolution is completed in just six time steps. Some
14-60
Guidelines
devices require as many as 100 revolutions before reaching a steady-state condition. This time step strategy allows this requirement to be satisfied in a practical
manner.
To facilitate this, a time step calculator has been added to the Analyze task dialog
that computes the time step size based on either a prescribed number of degrees
per time step or the number of blades. Open the dialog by clicking the Estimate
button on the Analyze dialog when a rotating region is present:
Guidelines
Specify either the Degrees per Time Step or the Number of Blades, and the
time step will be computed based on the rotational speed specified as part of the
Rotating Region. If the number of blades is specified, the time step size will be computed using a single time step per blade passage.
If the model contains multiple rotating objects, he fastest rotational speed is used
as the basis for the time step size computed in this dialog.
The Time Step Calculator is performing the following calculation to determine the
time step size:
D
t = ----------N6
where t = time step (in seconds)
360
NumberofBlades
D = number of degrees per time step: D = -------------------------------------------(for a time step size = to a blade passage)
N = rotational speed (in RPM)
14-61
Guidelines
When using this approach, the impeller will not appear to move because with each
time step it rotates a complete blade passage. Additionally, this approach will not
produce a time-accurate solution for the interaction between the rotor and a stator
or a static volute. (It will produce accurate results for steady-state quantities such
as resultant flow rate.) To save results with a finer resolution or to obtain a time
accurate solution for the rotor-stator interaction, reduce the time step size to three
degrees per time step and run an additional revolution after completing the set of
multiple revolutions.
14.17.4.2
Non-Impulsive Startup
When a constant rotation speed is prescribed, an impulsive start means that the
impeller accelerates from a stop to its rated speed in just one time step.This is
hardly a realistic condition! In some devices, an impulsive start has been found to
create large separation zones on the pressure side of the blade passage.
These separation areas prevent the blades from pumping as much fluid as they
would in reality. The forces and vortex generation is quite large when this happens.
In some cases, these vortices will be carried out of the impeller and a normal flow
field will evolve over time. However, in some instances the vortices and the separation remain and the flow rate through the device is greatly under predicted.
To prevent an impulsive start up, prescribe the impeller speed as a function of time
using a table. A good guideline is to set the rotation speed at 0 RPM at time 0, and
allow it to increase over the next 30 time steps to its full rated speed. If using a
time step size that allows the rotation of one passage per time step (as described in
the previous section), then multiply the time step size by 30 to determine the time
at which the impeller should be rotating at its full speed.
For example, if a six bladed fan is to rotate at 1000 RPM, the time step size would
be such that 60 degrees of rotation occurs per time step. At 1000 RPM, this works
out to a time step of 0.01 seconds. If the impeller is to ramp up over the first 30
time steps, then our ramp up time is 30 x 0.01 = 0.3 seconds. The rotational speed
table would then look like:
14-62
Impeller Speed
(RPM)
Time, sec
1000
0.3
1000
100
Guidelines
(The last line is to hold the rotational speed constant through the duration of the
analysis.)
14.17.4.3
The challenge with this approach is knowing the appropriate flow rate with which to
start the analysis with. This can usually be calculated using velocity triangles based
on the known rotating speed and the blade angle, and the assumption of ideal flow.
This initial flow just needs to loosely approximate the operating condition, and will
provide a much better starting condition for the device than an impulsive no-flow
start.
14.17.5
Visualization Notes
Results from a rotating analysis are viewed using the visualization tools described
in the Results Visualization chapter of this guide. It is often useful to animate
results to more fully understand the rotational effects and the interaction between
the rotating and static geometry.
Velocity can be presented in the relative frame with the Feature Tree sub menus:
On the Results_Scalar_Velocity Magnitude branch, right click on Velocity Magnitude,
and select Reference Frame. The choices are Absolute and Relative. Absolute is the
default. Relative is the velocity flow field with the rotational component (r omega)
subtracted out. This is very useful for visualizing the flow within the impeller blade
passages. Note that particle traces will show the relative velocity if this selection is
made.
14-63
Guidelines
The approach described in the previous two sections works well for most applications, but if flow reversal throughout the device is a problem and is not washed out,
then an additional approach is to first run two revolutions with a known flow rate
running through the device. The boundary conditions would include a velocity or
flow rate on one opening and a pressure on the other. (The placement of the flow
rate and pressure should be based on numerical stability. Place the specified pressure where it makes sense to do so--not too close to the impeller if possible.) After
two revolutions, replace the flow rate boundary condition with a pressure condition
(to impart the specified head rise), and continue the analysis for another two or
three revolutions. The flow rate will then adjust slightly, resulting in a better overall
solution.
Guidelines
Wall results data on the surfaces of rotating regions can be obtained for any time
step. Prior to going into the Wall Results dialog however, it is necessary to first go to
Review_Results, and activate those times steps on which wall results are required.
After doing this, select the desired time step by right-clicking on the Results branch
of the Feature Tree, and then selecting the time step from the Iterations/Time Step
menu.
14.18
Moving Solids
The support motion types are described in the introduction to the Motion section.
For all but sliding vane, the option to prescribe the motion manually or to let the
flow drive the motion is available. (Sliding vane only allows user-prescribed
motion.)
To define motion, the basic movement parameters are specified in the Motion Editor. Such quantities include the speed or displacement/position with time as well as
driving and resistive forces for flow-induced motion. All geometry-dependent
parameters are specified on the main Motion task dialog. These items include the
direction of travel, the center of rotation, as well as the initial position and the
bounds of movement for flow-induced motion.
14.18.1
Geometric Considerations
Unlike Rotating Objects, a special envelope is not necessary around the moving
object.
Because the initial position of moving objects can be set in the Motion task dialog,
objects can be constructed in the CAD model where it is convenient. When preparing the analysis model in CFdesign, the object can then be moved to its correct
starting location. Note that all bounds information (for flow-driven analyses) will be
relative to the selected starting position.
Moving objects can start completely inside the flow volume, partially inside, or
completely outside. Moving objects can pass through the flow volume, and exit
completely. If the moving solid starts outside of the flow volume but overlaps or
14-64
Guidelines
even touches it, then the volume outside of the flow volume will be maintained as
part of the flow volume, even after the solid leaves that region. This is illustrated:
If heat transfer is of interest, then the energy equation is solved between the fluid
and the solid nodes. Obviously the heat transfer between the moving solid and the
fluid will be a function of the respective materials as well as the velocity of the solid
and of the fluids.
The motion of a moving solid can be described such that the solid will collide with
static solids. The solver will allow this type of motion, and care should be taken to
ensure that physically real solid motion is defined. A Preview function is provided
that allows the motion to be practiced prior to running the analysis. This is
described in the Motion chapter of this guide.
14.18.2
Meshing Guidelines
CFdesign uses a masking technique to model the interaction between moving solids and the fluid through which the solids move. As a moving solid passes through
fluid, its elements mask the fluid nodes, meaning that the velocity on those nodes
is governed by the motion of the solid. The mesh density of a moving solid and the
14-65
Guidelines
When an object moves through the fluid volume, the mesh of the object will appear
to overlap the flow mesh. The solid elements will block out the fluid elements, and
the velocity of the moving solid will be transferred to the nodes of the underlying
fluid.
Guidelines
fluid in its path must be fine enough to adequately represent the interaction
between the solid and the fluid.
The graphic on the right is an example of a
fluid mesh that is much too coarse. As the
solid moves through the fluid, there are
times when the solid elements do not
mask any fluid nodes. The result is that
the solid has no effect on the fluid.
14-66
Guidelines
14-67
Guidelines
To adequately mesh the moving solid and fluid path in this example, a minimum of
two rows of masked nodes throughout the fluid path are required.
A more universal guideline is that the
moving solid must be meshed finely
enough to resolve gradients through it,
and the fluid path must be meshed with a
similar element size.
Such a strategy will allow proper masking
of fluid nodes, and will support gradients
within the pressure field.
The velocity field for this finer mesh is
shown. No bleed-through occurred, and
the results appear quite plausible.
14-68
Guidelines
14.18.3
When thin volumes are set into motion, the mesh requirements in the part itself
and in the motion path in the flow can be quite severe. The moving volume must
have a mesh that is fine enough to resolve the gradients through its thickness, and
the flow path must have a correspondingly fine mesh.
To provide a more convenient method of analyzing the motion of thin objects, the
Motion Module support moving surface parts. This reduces the meshing requirements on both the moving part (because it is a surface part) and the motion path in
the surrounding fluid:
Guidelines
On the Materials task dialog, create a surface part by assigning a solid material to
the intended surface. The properties of the material and the shell thickness are
used to compute the mass of the part, and influence the movement for flow-driven
motion. For user-prescribed motion, the physical properties do not influence the
motion. On the Motion dialog, change the selection mode to Surface, and select the
surface or surfaces that are to move.
Guidelines
Any of the motion types can be applied to moving surfaces. The motion
can be user-prescribed or flow-induced.
Surface parts cannot be coupled with moving solids using Motion
Groups. Surface parts can, however, be grouped with other surface parts in
Motion groups.
Moving surface parts cannot contact moving solids at their starting
location.
Moving surface parts can fully enclose a region.
Moving surface parts do not have to be planar--they can be arbitrarily
shaped.
14-69
Guidelines
Moving surface parts must not come into contact with parts that are
extrusion meshed. The interaction between surface parts and extrusion
meshed parts is not supported.
While moving surface parts can initially touch non-moving solid parts,
they should not be in complete contact with a solid at their starting point.
The reason is that after a small amount of movement, fluid will be trapped
between the surface and the solid, and the pressure in the fluid may be
very high.
To add clarity when visualizing the results of a motion analysis with a
moving surface part, the moving surface is shown with a virtual thickness.
This thickness is purely graphical, and does not influence the motion or the
flow around the part.
The meshing requirements in the path of a moving surface are significantly reduced compared to the path of a moving volume. Unlike moving
volumes, the solid elements do not mask the underlying fluid elements, and
the fluid mesh does not have to be fine enough to resolve the solid.
The mesh should, however, be fine enough to resolve the pressure gradients on the
surface. Likewise, the mesh within the fluid surrounding the moving shell should be
fine enough to allow flow to pass around the surface as it moves.
In the image on the left, the 3D mesh surrounding the moving shell is quite coarse.
As the valve opens due to the force of the fluid, very little fluid can pass around it
until it has opened about half way. In reality, fluid would leak past such a valve at
the onset of motion, and is shown in the model with a finer mesh on the right:
14-70
Guidelines
Keep in mind that the amount of bookkeeping necessary to track the motion of a
moving surface is similar to that of a moving solid. Because of this, moving surface
motion analyses are as resource intensive as moving solid analyses, for a given
mesh density. The advantage of moving surfaces is that the mesh in the motion
path does not have to be as dense as for a moving solid analysis.
14.18.4
Radiation is now supported for moving solids. The view factors on a moving object
are automatically recomputed when the part has traveled 2% of the maximum
bounding box diagonal of the computation domain. This value can be changed by
modifying the following parameter in the CFdesign Flags file:
Guidelines
Moving objects that experience radiation heat transfer must not touch
any stationary object or wall at any point in the analysis. This includes the
as-built location as well as anywhere in the motion path.
Radiation cannot be used for rotating regions--it is only for moving solids.
Moving parts must be opaque. They cannot have a non-zero value of
transmissivity in their material definition.
14-71
Guidelines
ViewFactorUpdate A
Guidelines
14.18.5
CFdesign will determine and adjust the time step size (shown on the Analyze dialog) if Intelligent Solution Control is enabled (which it is by default). Click the Estimate button on the Analyze dialog to compute an initial time step size. To manually
set the time step size, disable Intelligent Solution Control on the Solution Control
dialog.
When Intelligent Solution Control is enabled, the time step for user-prescribed
motion is calculated and set automatically based on the specified distance and/or
velocity.
The time step for flow-driven motion is calculated automatically by initially using a
value based on the surrounding flow velocity and/or the initial velocity of the
object. As the object accelerates, the time step will automatically decrease to satisfy the basic criterion that an object in motion should not move through more than
one element per time step. Adjusting the time step in this way has been shown to
balance calculation efficiency with solution accuracy.
Intelligent Solution Control will automatically adjust under-relaxation parameters to
remove instabilities from the calculation. We have found that doing this does not
affect the time accuracy of the solution appreciably, and that solution stability can
be greatly improved.
More information about Intelligent Solution Control is provided in the Analyze/Solve
chapter of this book.
14.18.6
Solid body motion analyses are always run transient. When a moving solid material
is assigned, certain Solution settings are automatically set. Such settings include
switching the analysis to transient, setting the time step, and setting the number of
internal iterations to one per time step. Additionally, Mesh Enhancement is turned
Off. Weve found that for some Solid Motion analyses, the presence of Mesh
Enhancement can cause stability problems during the analysis. Because it is disabled, additional care should be taken when defining the mesh size to ensure that
the mesh density is adequate for the flow.
14-72
Guidelines
Setting the time step save interval and the number of times steps are left to the
user. Be careful not to set a save interval that fills the hard disk with time step
results sets.
As an object moves through a fluid, the space that was once occupied by the object
is converted to a fluid. With this in mind, it is recommended that when applying slip
conditions to a symmetry wall that cuts through a moving solid, that they be
applied to the surface of the object that will become a fluid boundary after the solid
has moved away. Not applying a slip condition to the surface of the solid (at its
starting location) will result in a wall surface within the slip plane.
If Intelligent Solution Control is not used, then it is recommended to apply convergence controls to pressure on the Solution Controls dialog. Use of a value of 0.25
for pressure helps stability, and will damp out noise from the calculation.
14.18.7
14-73
Guidelines
In most devices with a moving solid, there will be regions of fluid that are isolated
from other regions during some point in the movement. An incompressible fluid will
not allow pressure waves to travel throughout the medium, and may cause solution
instabilities. Additionally, objects that are to move due to flow-induced forces may
not move at all. For this reason, the use of compressiblity is recommended for flowinduced motion analyses. Enable Compressible in the Options dialog. For liquids
and gases, this will cause pressure waves to move throughout the device, and will
produce a much more realistic solution for flow-induced motion.
Guidelines
Note that it is possible to run an analysis without motion assignments, stop it,
assign motion, and then continue without losing field results. The saved results
files, however, will be deleted from the analysis directory after the field results are
interpolated onto the analysis mesh.
14.18.8
Output Tables
A .csv file is written for every moving solid in a motion analysis that contains a
time history of the linear and angular velocity, linear and angular displacement,
force and torque. This file is named with the analysis name and the part name and
the word motion. For example, the motion file for an analysis called Heating-Process that contains a moving solid called Product would be called:
HEATING-PROCESS_PRODUCT_1_motion.csv.
(In general, this will be the same name as assigned in the CAD model. However, for
some models, the name will be a combination of the name of the CAD part and the
name of the surrounding part.)
This file lists the linear and angular velocity, the linear and angular displacement,
the force, and the torque for each time step of the analysis. This data is very useful
for understanding the dynamic state of each part throughout the analysis.
14-74
Guidelines
The linear and angular displacement values are relative to the initial position of the
object as specified using the Initial Position slider on the Motion task dialog. Pay
particular attention to this if the initial position differs from the as-built location in
the CAD model.
Note that the force and torque values are the net values, and include driving,
resistance, collision, contact forces as calculated in the Motion module. The hydraulic force and torque are just the force and torque imparted on the object by the
fluid, and do not include any forces specified in the motion definition. The hydraulic
values are reported in the Wall dialog.
These files are also accessible directly from the User Interface, and are found in the
Notes tab of the Review task. Click the Motion Results button to open the Motion
file.
14-75
Guidelines
If a motion analysis contains multiple moving parts, the data for each part is displayed on a separate tab, and is selectable from the lower-left side of the dialog.
Guidelines
14-76
CHAPTE R 15
15.1
Troubleshooting
Introduction
This section discusses some common problems in three different aspects of the
analysis process:
15.2
15.2.1
15.2.1.1
If a Crash Occurs During Launch
Ensure that all parts have the same absolute accuracy. In some cases,
the absolute accuracy may have to be reduced. In some cases, reducing it
as low as 0.0001 (or lower) has fixed the issue.
Ensure the model does not have any Geom Checks.
Ensure that no parts are interfering.
Check the analysis-name_model.log file or the session trail file for the
location of bad geometry. If necessary, create a construction point at this
location to assist in locating the problem.
Suppress all cosmetic features.
If all else fails, systematically suppress components and/or slice away
parts of the model until the problem area is isolated.
15.2.1.2
15-1
Troubleshooting
15-2
Troubleshooting
In the Pro/E model, look for cosmetic features and tiny geometric features that fall
below the specified accuracy value.
Check for global interferences. Remove interferences by cutting one part from the
other. If an interference is found, but the amount is shown as ???, reduce the
absolute accuracies of the parts that interfere.
A useful diagnostic technique is to reduce the absolute accuracy on every part, sub
assembly, and assembly in the model. In some cases, this will cause one or more
parts to fail to regenerate. This often indicates which part is problematic. After fixing the issue, launch into CFdesign and determine if the volumes are selectable.
If the volumes are still not selectable, then a further technique is to open each part
individually into CFdesign to identify which part is causing the problem.
If all parts come into CFdesign properly, then the problem likely is in the assembly
relations. To investigate this, place all but two neighboring parts on a layer and
blank the layer. When CFdesign is launched, only those parts not blanked will come
into CFdesign. This makes it easier to troubleshoot which assembly definition is
causing the problem. Sequentially add neighboring parts back into the visible model
and launch back into CFdesign until the problem occurs again--indicating which
relation or pair of parts is causing the problem.
15-3
Troubleshooting
Another problem may be that a shell surface was included as a surface feature
within a part. This will not work with Pro/E Wildfire. Shell surfaces must be added
as separate parts to the assembly.
Troubleshooting
dition is lost. It is not recommended to use multi-body parts in Pro/Engineer for this
reason.
15.2.2
These include a large number of tools such as Solid Works, Solid Edge, Unigraphics,
and Inventor.
15.2.2.1
If a Crash Occurs during Launch
Search the geometry for obvious errors--check to see if mating components contact properly, check for any sliver-type volumes or surfaces.
Check the analysis-name_meodel.log file for the location of bad geometry. If necessary, create a construction point at this location to assist in
locating the problem.
If all else fails, systematically suppress components and/or slice away
parts of the model until the problem area is isolated.
15.3
15.3.1
Basic Techniques
15.3.1.1
Geometry from Pro/Engineer
Ensure that there are no interfering parts in the model.
The mesher is pretty good at fixing intersecting elements, but if the
geometry is too small, and the element size is too large, then the mesher
might falter. Try a smaller element size.
The problem might be caused by one or more components in the model
that contain errors. Try to suppress parts systematically to find out which
component is the culprit. Once located, it can be fixed.
Check the analysis-name_mesh.log file found in the working directory.
Create a datum point in Pro/E to help locate the problem area.
15-4
Troubleshooting
Check the Pro/E trail file. This file contains all of the messages written
during the meshing process, and will list the coordinates of problem areas.
15.3.1.2
Geometry from Parasolid and Acis CAD Tools
The mesher is pretty good at fixing intersecting elements, but if the
geometry is too small, and the element size is too large, then the mesher
might falter. Try a smaller element size.
The problem might be caused by one or more components in the model
that contain errors. Try to suppress parts systematically to find out which
component is the culprit. Once located, it can be fixed.
Check the analysis-name_mesh.log file found in the working directory.
The locations of errors occurring during the meshing of Parasolid and Acis models
are reported in the mesh log file (jobname_mesh.log). Specifically, the CFdesign ID
of the problematic surface(s) are given in this file. An excerpt from such a file is
shown:
The next step would be to either apply (or refine) a surface mesh size to the surface
or to return to the CAD tool and repair the geometry at the indicated location.
15.3.2
15-5
Troubleshooting
With the CFdesign ID, it is convenient to locate exactly where the problem is occurring.
Troubleshooting
If the last few lines in the trail file or mesh log look something like this:
!%CI(2) face meshing 54/87
!%CItag = 54, type = Unknown
You will need to review the surface topology of the model.
The mesher first meshes the individual surfaces. Failure at this point indicates that
the mesher failed to mesh a particular surface. In this example it is likely to be surface #54 out of a total of 87 surfaces. You should investigate the surface to determine if there is an error in the geometry, perhaps an unintentional sliver surface, or
if just refining the mesh on that surface will suffice. To mesh highly curved surfaces
effectively, use an element size that is small enough that a nodes are spaced every
30 degrees along the arc.
15-6
Troubleshooting
Out of Memory
If the last few lines of the trail file or meshing log look something like this:
!%CI0 unsnapped vertices from cavity meshing
!%CI(2) smoothing volume mesh started
!%CI(2) optimizing volume mesh started
CFdesign Users Guide
15-7
Troubleshooting
You can also use the next piece of information in the log file:
Troubleshooting
out of memory
All of the available computer memory (RAM) has been used. Assign larger element
sizes or modify the geometry so that fewer elements will be required.
15.4
15.4.1
Startup Problems
Before Starting
If the Go button is grayed out and unavailable, the CFdesign server (not the license
server) is likely not running. Start Servman (located in the CFdesign installation
folder), and click the Install button if it is not installed. Click the Start button if the
service is installed, but not running.
15-8
Troubleshooting
15.4.2
Once Go on the Analyze dialog is hit, if an error occurs and the analysis does not
start, consult the Status file (Review_Notes) to read the error. Various errors that
can occur are:
Could not connect to server: Make sure that the solver machine has
the process cfdserv.exe running. If the analysis is to be solved locally, this
process should start automatically, but verify that it did using the Task
Manager. Start it manually if necessary opening the server manager (servman.exe) in the installation directory, and hit Start.
Could not connect to server: A second solution is to verify that a
network connection exists between the local computer and the solver computer. Ensure that permissions (including within the firewall) allow reading
and writing between both machines.
Licensing problem: Verify that the licensing is configured and operating correctly.
Unable to find the GBI file: chances are the working directory (as set
in Pro/E) is not the same directory as where the Pro/E model was saved.
Change the working directory and try again, and/or copy the model files
into the intended working directory.
An analysis will sometimes stop during mesh enhancement, before any iterations
are completed. A message in the analysis window will indicate that an error
occurred during mesh enhancement and direct you to view the status file.
First, take a look at the status file. Click the Notes tab in the Review task to find the
Status File button. Typically the error will read that the mesh is too coarse. A list
of the nodes and their coordinates are contained in the status file to help locate
where the mesh enhancement is failing.
Before re-meshing, try adjusting the mesh enhancement thickness factor. This
parameter can be found under the mesh enhancement button at the bottom of the
mesh definitions page. Reduce the thickness factor in increments of 0.05 until you
reach 0.05. If you must go less than this thickness factor, you may need to investigate refining your mesh by changing the mesh size on volumes, surfaces or edges.
15-9
Troubleshooting
15.4.3
Troubleshooting
15.4.4
Once the analysis phase has started, the start up processing steps are displayed in
the information window of the Analysis window. When all input processing is completed, iterations should commence. These are some of the more common errors
that may occur after initial processing is complete, but before any iterations are
run.
bicgstab.c, iner product (**,**) equals 0: This means that there is
a significant error in the analysis setup. Examine the boundary conditions
to determine if they define an ill posed problem (a setup that violates the
conservation of mass such as velocities specified on both inlets and outlets). Check the analysis units. Check the materials and property definitions. Check internal fans and distributed resistances definitions. Check
rotating regions and moving object definitions. Check the mesh. The solution might be that the mesh needs to be refined somewhere in the model.
If the Analysis hangs: Make sure the program has been installed
properly and that all CFdesign files are in the installation directory. Check
licensing, and the server using the Servman executable found in the CFdesign installation folder. For very large analyses, be patient--the first iterations may take some time to complete.
If there is not enough in-core memory available for the CFD problem
being run, the message Maximum available memory may have been
exceeded will be printed in the status file. If the memory limit is
exceeded, CFdesign can be run using a virtual memory manager to page
to the hard disk.
Analysis Queued: If CFdesign thinks that there is another analysis
running, it will add the current analysis into the Queue. If there was not
another model running and the current analysis was added to the Queue,
hit the Stop button, and exit out of CFdesign. Start Servman (located in the
CFdesign installation folder), and Stop the server. Click the Uninstall button. This will clear the Queue. Install the server, and exit from Servman.
Start CFdesign again, and run the current model. If it is added to the queue
again, hit the Stop button, exit CFdesign and reboot the computer.
15-10
Troubleshooting
15.5
Even with Automatic Solution Control invoked, most of the problems that cause
quick divergence have to be fixed by the user.
Check property values and variations (a zero viscosity frequently causes quick
divergence) in the summary file or on the Materials dialog. Also, make sure the
length unit specified in the Feature Tree is correct (for Pro/E models) or results in
the expected dimensional lengths in the geometry.
If you are using variable properties, the temperature should be initialized to some
appropriate value. A temperature of zero will definitely cause problems.
If the flow is turbulent, but laminar is selected from the Turbulence dialog on the
Options dialog, the solution will diverge quickly. Try turning on a turbulence model.
Also, make sure the Automatic Turbulent Start Up is turned On.
Try increasing the Turb/Lam Ratio in the Turbulence dialog on the Options dialog by
an order of magnitude.
15.6
If the inlets or outlets contain recirculation zones, the problem is not well-posed
mathematically and may eventually diverge. You may have to move these boundaries out, as shown in the Boundary Condition section of this chapter.
If there are gaps which have fewer than 3 interior nodes, the solution may also
diverge. This is usually only true if the gap is in a critical area of the flow. Make sure
Mesh Enhancement is enabled, and that more than one element layer will be generated.
15-11
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
15.7
1. Lower the convergence control on the pressure equation from the default value
to 0.2. This is done on the Convergence Controls dialog on the Analyze task.
2. Try setting the Auto Turb to Extend in the Options_Turbulence dialog. This is a
variation of the Automatic Turbulent Startup algorithm that is particularly useful for
some compressible flow problems.
3. Observe the solution results during the analysis in the Results dialog. Errant
velocity vectors or splotches of high or low pressures indicate where the solution is
having difficulty. Often refining the mesh in these locations solves the problem. If
necessary, you may have to re-run the analysis and stop just before divergence
occurs (1-2 iterations). The turbulence quantities (TKE and EPS) can also be indicators.
15.8
Oscillating Results
There are three scenarios which cause results to oscillate in the Convergence Monitor:
15-12
Troubleshooting
1. The first is that the mesh is not fine enough. By observing where the solution
changes while the analysis running, it is easy to quickly locate areas of the model in
need of mesh refinement. Show vectors, and note where the directions are changing. Often you will see one or a small number of vectors in some critical location
such as a wake oscillating.
2. Another scenario which causes this condition is recirculation zones crossing
inlet/outlet planes. Again, this can be quickly diagnosed by observing the Results
window. If these zones can be eliminated in your model, the solution should converge.
3. The third cause of oscillating residuals is vortex shedding. If you switch to transient, you should be able to obtain a converged solution.
In some instances, the oscillation amplitude may be small enough that the solution
may be converged enough for the purpose of the analysis. Use the Automatic Solution Control and Automatic Stop to determine if such oscillations are not altering
the results substantially.
15.9
For those customers that have purchased CFdesign directly from Blue Ridge
Numerics in the United States and Canada:
Target
Number or Address
Phone Support
Fax Number
434.977.2714
Support e-mail
support@cfdesign.com
License Request
licensing@cfdesign.com
Sales e-mail
info@cfdesign.com
web site
http://www.cfdesign.com
ftp site
ftp://ftp.cfdesign.com
15-13
Troubleshooting
If all else fails, please contact Blue Ridge Numerics or your reseller for technical
support.
Troubleshooting
For those customers that have purchased CFdesign directly from Blue Ridge
Numerics in Europe:
Target
Number or Address
Phone Support
Fax Number
Phone Support in
German and French
Support e-mail
eu.support@cfdesign.com
Password Request
eu.licensing@cfdesign.com
Sales e-mail
info@cfdesign.com
web site
http://www.cfdesign.com
ftp site
ftp://ftp.cfdesign.com
For those customers that have purchased CFdesign directly from Blue Ridge
Numerics in Asia:
Target
Number or Address
Phone Support
Fax Number
+1 434.977.2714
Support e-mail
asia.support@cfdesign.com
Password Request
asia.licensing@cfdesign.com
Sales e-mail
info@cfdesign.com
web site
http://www.cfdesign.com
ftp site
ftp://ftp.cfdesign.com
Blue Ridge Numerics also has a strong reseller network throughout Europe and
Asia. If you purchased CFdesign through a reseller, please contact that reseller
directly for support and licensing.
15-14
Index
Index
displacement 14-74
angular motion 7-18, 14-
54
Abaqus 12-3
absolute accuracy 15-1
absolute pressure BC 4-4
absolute velocity 11-9,
14-63
15-5
23
45
albedo 14-43
altitude effects 14-7
analysis 13-1
analysis client 9-10
analysis computer 9-10,
9-11
Analysis Intelligence 9-
15
17
19
14
24
attenuation 14-26
author of a report 10-25
Auto Turb (ATSU) 8-8
Automatic Convergence
Assessment 9-19, 14-
Automatic Mesh
Sizing 5-13
Automatic on
Extrusion 5-25
Automatic Size button 5-
14
automatic wall
specification 4-18
axial velocity 6-52
axis of nutation 7-56
axis of rotation 7-21, 7-37
axisymmetric 14-31
11
background
temperature 4-9
baffles 6-37
Basic 1-6, 14-1
batch mode 9-14
16
Boundary Mesh
Adaptation 5-45
bounds 7-8, 7-23, 7-37, 739, 7-57, 7-73, 7-74
Bring Analysis into a
Project icon 2-4
Bring analysis into a
project icon 13-4
bulk data from
project 11-37
bulk flow rate 11-36
bulk modulus 6-7
bulk output files 11-37
bulk results 13-11
bulk thrust 11-36
bulk velocity
components 11-36
buoyancy 14-8
11
I-1
Index
Index
external 14-49
internal 14-48
14-21
I-2
report 10-27
condensation 14-23
condensed water 8-12
conduction 14-7
conduction-only 8-1
conductivity 6-6, 6-20
configurations 1-6
conjugate heat
transfer 14-11
connection to server 15-
constant eddy
viscosity 8-8
Constant in Time 7-76
constant internal fan
flow rate 6-51
constant loss
coefficient 6-42
constant property
type 6-9
Constant Vector 7-75
contact information 1-17
contact resistance 6-23
Continue From 9-12
contour lines 11-9, 11-48
convection boundary
condition 4-6
convection
coefficient 11-46
convergence controls 9-
21
17
cut surface
orientation 11-17
cut surface rotate 11-26
cut surface task
dialog 11-16
cutoff pressure 11-46
cutoff strain rate 6-12
cutoff viscosity 6-12
cutting surface table 11-
17
14
6-17
7-72
30
Index
Server 13-12
dialog placement 2-10
die 6-67
dielectric 6-78
diffuse energy
transfer 14-26
direction vector 7-7, 7-35,
7-65
displacement 14-74
distributed resistance 521, 5-40, 6-32, 6-37, 14-
12
diurnal 14-44
diurnal heating 8-9
divergence
50
14
24
13-14
FEA 1-3
loads 4-23
materials 6-79
feature tree
placement 2-10
FEMAP 12-5
Fieldview 2-9
file export options 2-9
File menu 2-8
file types 1-14
fill voids in CATIA 3-20
fillvoids 3-6
film coefficient 11-46
film coefficient boundary
condition 4-6
film coefficient result 11-
45
14
18
I-3
Index
Earth 8-5
edge bias factor 5-42
edge curvature 5-16
edge diagnostics 5-8
edge mesh size 5-41
editting a note 10-16
effective PCB
properties 6-73
element 5-1
element size criteria 5-42
embedded surfaces 6-25
emissivity 4-10, 6-7, 6-20,
14-26, 14-42
empirical film
coefficient 9-24
end layering 5-26
Index
16
14
11
24
14-10
I-4
15
external 14-5
internal 14-2
Incremental rotation
icon 2-6
industrial fans 6-52
infinite strain viscosity 6-
13
Information 9-14
initial angular velocity 7-
conduction 14-7
forced convection 14-10
gravity 8-5
mixed convection 14-10
natural convection 8-5,
14-8
off 8-3
on 8-3
radiation 8-5
Height of Fluid 4-20, 1421
help 2-19
Herschel-Buckley 6-13
high speed jets 14-3
Highlight Edges Slider 512
initial nutation
velocity 7-61
initial position 7-7, 7-23,
7-36, 7-39, 7-57, 7-66
initial velocity 7-12, 7-78
inlet boundary
conditions 4-17
Highlight Surfaces
slider 5-7
HTML report 10-20
humidity 8-12, 14-22, 14-
23
humidity boundary
condition 4-5
hydrodynamic forces 11-
45
I-DEAS 12-5
28
20
18
interferences in Pro/E 3-
Index
14-4
k-epsilon turbulence
model 8-7
key in points 11-29
known rotational
speed 6-64
Knudsen number 14-4
34
massed particle
gravity 11-34
massed particle initial
path 11-34
massed particle
radius 11-33
massed particle
traces 11-31
material appearance 11-
6-17
17
laminar 8-7
latitude 8-11
launching 1-7
layers 5-26
layers of surface parts 6-
28
74
mesh size
fundamentals 5-37
mesh size reduction 6-23
Mesh Size task dialog 2-
38
mesh-independent
solution 5-38
meshing by parts 5-46
meshing moving
objects 14-65
meshing problems 15-4
meshing refinement
inlets/outlets 5-40
moving solds 5-41
porous media 5-40
rotating regions 5-40
solid boundaries 5-39
sudden discontinuity 540
thermal boundaries 5-40
meshing strategy 5-38
MicroSoft PowerPoint 1154
MicroSoft Word 11-55
min and max 7-8, 7-23, 737, 7-39, 7-57
Minimum Refinement
Length 5-8
mirror icon 11-6
mirrored symmetry 14-
30
I-5
Index
adaptation 5-45
number of layers 5-45
thickness factor 5-45
mesh generation 1-3, 547, 9-13
mesh import 3-27
mesh inspection 9-13
mesh preview dots 5-16
mesh reference points 542
mesh refinement 5-39,
14-2
mesh size estimate 5-41
Index
74
22
31
53
61
8-1
Nastran 12-3
Nastran mesh 3-27
natural boundary
condition 14-47
natural convection 14-8
natural convection
boundaries 14-8
natural convection
domain 14-8
natural convection
guidelines 14-9
navigation 2-22
near wall
temperatures 11-46
new analysis 1-7
New icon 2-4, 13-2, 13-4
newlink fan-
I-6
21
24
thermostat 6-49
newlink transmissivity 6-
16
46
part dependent
legend 11-49
part interference 15-1
part suppression 5-3
particle trace 11-27
particle trace
appearance 11-31
particle trace residence
time 11-29
particle traces with
mass 11-31
Patankar 1-3
PCB material 6-69
PCB thickness 6-76
Peel Surface icon 11-4
percent metal 6-77
perforated plates 6-37
periodic boundary
condition 4-8
periodic boundary
conditions 14-16
periodic symmetry 14-31
periodic time curve 4-14
permeability 6-43, 6-47,
14-12
Index
16
14-11
15
PowerPoint 11-54
Prandtl number 14-8
preferences 2-10
pressure boundary
condition 4-3
pressure control 9-22
pressure direction 12-2
pressure drop in a
pipe 14-3
pressure flow-rate
curve 6-45
pressure result 11-45, 12-
settings 3-26
queue 9-14
14
reflectivity 14-27
re-initialize 4-20
relative velocity 11-9, 1135, 14-63
relaxation values 9-16
remove analysis from
DRC 13-11
renaming entities 2-29
repeating (piecewise
linear) 4-16
report generation 11-52
report settings 2-11
report template 10-21
reports 10-20
Reset to Local 13-13
Reset View icon 2-5
residence time 11-29
Residence Time scalar
quantity 14-22
residuals 10-4
resistance 6-22
resistance directions 6-
33
constant loss
coefficient 6-42, 1412
Darcy Equation 6-47, 1414
free area ratio 6-44, 1414
friction factor 6-44, 1413
pressure-flow rate
curve 6-45, 14-14
resistive force 7-13
resistive nutation
torque 7-62
resistive torque 7-29
resistivity 6-21, 6-23
Restore Default Max
button 5-12
result quantities 9-23
result scale 11-13
result set 13-11
results
I-7
Index
Arrhenius 6-11
Carreau 6-13
constant 6-9
equation of state 6-10
first order polynomial 614
Herschel-Buckley 6-13
inverse polynomial 6-15
non-Newtonian 6-12
piece-wise linear 6-16
polynomial 6-15
power law 6-9
second order
polynomial 6-14
Sutherland 6-11
pumps 14-53
Index
results display on
groups 11-11
results interpolation 12-1
results output interval 9-
11-16
30
rotational velocity
boundary
condition 4-3
runtime monitor
points 10-6, 10-7
I-8
Assignments 13-13
save table 11-17
Save View Settings
icon 11-2
saving a note 10-16
scalar boundary
condition 4-5
scalar filtering 11-48
scalar legend 11-13
scalar quantities 8-6
scalar result quantity 11-
14
selection 2-24
Selection Basis 2-24
sensing location 6-49
server 1-11
server manager 9-11, 15-
14-40
14-43
condition 4-4
slip factor 4-7, 6-54
sliver surfaces 5-4
solar flux 14-40
solar heat flux 14-44
solar heating 4-10, 8-9
solid boundaries 5-39
Solid Edge 1-7, 3-12, 6-31,
15-4
13
17
Index
40
12
14-50
11-12
20
stagnation 8-2
static 8-2
total 8-2
temperature boundary
condition 4-4
temperature control 9-22
temperature dependent
14-72
transient boundary
conditions 4-13, 14-
20
transient loads
periodic 4-14
piecewise linear 4-16
polynomial 4-16
power law 4-15
ramp step 4-14
transient results
transfer 12-6
transmissivity 4-10, 6-20,
14-26
14-43
19
turbulence 8-6
turbulence inlet
quantities 4-17
Turbulence models
constant eddy
viscosity 8-8
k-epsilon model 8-7
Low Reynolds model 8-7
mixing length 8-8
RNG model 8-8
acis/parasolid 3-16
Pro/E 3-8
two dimensional
models 6-28
harmonic 4-15
inverse polynomial 4-16
I-9
Index
Index
unconstrained motion 7-
70
under-relaxation 9-21
Unigraphics 3-12
unit of time 14-20
units 2-11, 2-27, 11-9
units conversion 2-27
universal file 2-9
unknown boundary
condition 4-5, 14-47
up button 10-23
Upfront CFD 1-2
upgrade from 7.0 1-16
Use Uniform button 5-17,
5-19
58
I-10
45
forces 11-45
heat flux 11-45
output 11-47
pressure 11-45
results 11-44
roughness 6-7, 6-8,
6-21
XY
XY
XY
XY
XY
XY
y+ 5-39, 5-45
Z-Clip 11-5
Z-clip icon 2-6
zero strain viscosity 6-13
Zoom icon 2-7